FANUC ROBOCUT-LINK+

FANUC PC FAPT CUT +

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

B-85344EN/03
 • No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export from Japan may be subject to an export license by the
government of Japan.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
B-85344EN/03 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
When actually applying NC data(Note) prepared using FANUC PC FAPT CUT i to the wire-cut electric
discharge machine (simply called the machine),
the following safety precautions must be observed.

Precautions

1. Before attempting to use NC data to control NC machines, ensure that those machines and tools that
will be under the control of the NC data will operate safely.

If invalid NC data is used, or if NC data (confirmed as being satisfactory) is applied incorrectly, the
machine and tool may behave unexpectedly, possibly damaging the tool, machine, and/or workpiece,
and presenting the risk of injury to the operator and/or bystanders.
Refer to the manual of the machine how to use the machine safely, i.e., safety precautions like cover,
emergency stop, etc.

2. FANUC PC FAPT CUT i does not check whether the NC data, that it creates automatically, works
on the target machine satisfactorily. When using the output NC data to control an actual NC
machine, Precaution 1 must be observed.

3. Due to deterioration of the storage medium, or as a result of errors introduced during communication,
the NC data actually loaded into a machine may vary slightly from that originally created.
Therefore, even when using NC data that has already been used successfully with an actual machine,
Precaution 1 must be observed.

NOTE
In this document, the term NC data refers to programs that specify NC machine
operations. Note that in NC machine manuals, machining program, part
program, or program may be used in place of NC data. Whenever using data
that conforms to the definition of NC data as used in this document, irrespective
of how it may be referred to in other documents, the above precautions must be
observed.

s-1
B-85344EN/03 PREFACE

PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi. / FANUC PC FAPT CUT i

FANUC PC FAPT CUT i is an automatic programming software package developed for the FANUC
ROBOCUT wire-cut electric discharge machine. It is used to handle all processes from drawing input to
NC data preparation.
FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi is a machining monitoring system developed for the FANUC ROBOCUT
wire-cut electric discharge machine.
To take full advantage of the functions and features of FANUC ROBOCUT- LINKi /FANUC PC FAPT
CUT i , users are advised to read and become familiar with the entire contents of this manual.

FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi /FANUC PC FAPT CUT i is operating under Microsoft® Windows®. This
manual does not attempt to explain basic Windows operations. Those users who are unfamiliar with
Windows should first read the Windows documentation for an explanation of Windows fundamentals.

FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi /FANUC PC FAPT CUT i uses the following products, whose copyright is
owned by Microsoft of the USA.

Microsoft® Visual StudioTM

NOTE
Microsoft are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation of the USA. Visual
Studio are trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

Checking the contents of the package

Immediately after opening the package, check that you have received the following items.

1. If you purchased FANUC PC FAPT CUT i

(1) CD
FANUC PC FAPT CUT i (A08B-9310-J830#EN11)
(2) Protector
FANUC PC FAPT CUT Protector
USB protector is supplied.
(3) Operator's manual
FANUC PC FAPT CUT i / FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi Operator's Manual (this document)

2. If you purchased FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi

(1) CD
FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi (A08B-9610-J600)
(2) Operator's manual
FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi /FANUC PC FAPT CUT i Operator's Manual (this document)

Readme file on the system disk

Given the need to quickly respond to requests to improve FANUC PC FAPT CUT i, the system software
may be upgraded before this manual is revised. Therefore, the readme file on the FANUC PC FAPT
CUT i system disk is provided to ensure that the latest information related to upgrading is available to the
user. The user should read this information carefully before attempting to use an upgraded version of
FANUC PC FAPT CUT i. Chapter 2, "BASIC OPERATION", in Part I explains how to read the
readme file.

p-1
PREFACE B-85344EN/03

About this manual

PREFACE
Describes the use of this manual and related materials. Also, briefly describes some of the features of
FANUC PC FAPT CUT i.

Ⅰ. FANUC PC FAPT CUT i

1. SETUP
Describes the environment needed to run FANUC PC FAPT CUT i, and the method of setting up
and enabling the use of FANUC PC FAPT CUT i.
2. BASIC OPERATION
Explains how to start and stop FANUC PC FAPT CUT i, and describes its basic operations. Also,
briefly describes the functions provided by the side menu and menu bar.
3. PROGRAMMING OPERATION
Provides examples of the operation of FANUC PC FAPT CUT i.
4. SAVING AND LOADING FILES
Explains how to save the contents of programming as a new file, and also how to load the saved file.
5. CREATING A NEW PROGRAM
Explains how to start programming.
6. FIGURE CREATION
This chapter provides fundamental information related to the creation of figures other than involute
gear, such as straight lines and circles. It also describes how to modify and copy figures.
7. INVOLVE GEAR FIGURE CREATION
This chapter describes how to create involute gear figures.
8. MACHINING FIGURE CREATION
This chapter describes how to create machining figures by supplying data such as thickness and
taper to two-dimensional contour figures.
9. MACHINING INSTRUCTION
This chapter describes how to specify the way a product is manufactured from a machining profile,
by selecting the machine to be used and setting the cutting conditions.
10. NC DATA CREATION
This chapter describes how to create NC data based on the supplied machining specification. It
also describes how to print and output NC data.
11. ITEMS TO BE SET ON THE MACHINE
This chapter describes the items to be set on the machine before NC data can be actually used with
that machine.
12. PLOTTING
Describes how to output NC data from the drawing window to the plotter.
13. CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
Describes the exchange of data between PC FAPT CUT i and general CAD software. Also
explains the precautions to be observed when using FANUC PC FAPT CUT i to handle data
prepared in another CAD system.
14. FILE TRANSFER
Describes how to transfer the NC data to CNC system, etc.
15. DIMENSION MEASUREMENT
This chapter describes a function for measuring the coordinates of figures and the related distance.
16. RENDERING FUNCTION
This chapter describes the rendering function that makes a machining figure easier to
understand and adds reality to 3D animation display during creation of NC data.
17. EXTRACT MACHINING FIGURE FROM NC DATA
This chapter describes a function for extracting the machining figures from NC data.
18. SETTING
This chapter describes how to change certain settings, such as initial values displayed on the
conversational screens and those settings related to FANUC PC FAPT CUT i operations.

p-2
B-85344EN/03 PREFACE
19. NC MACHINE SETTING
This chapter describes how to set the specification of NC machines.
20. TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter describes the processing to be performed if an error occurs. It also explains the errors
that may occur while FANUC PC FAPT CUT i is being set up.

APPENDIX
A. NC DATA FORMAT
This chapter describes the format of the NC data prepared by FANUC PC FAPT CUT i.
B. SETTING THE PROGRAMMED PLANE & WORKPIECE THICKNESS
This chapter describes both ways of selecting the programmed plane and
workpiece thickness in both FANUC PC FAPT CUT i and ROBOCUT.
C. OTHER
Explains the use of the AWF result monitor.

Ⅱ． FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi
1. SETUP
Describes the environment needed to run FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi, and the method of setting up
and enabling the use of FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi.
2. REGISTRATION AND SETTING
Explains how to start and stop FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi, and describes its basic operations.
3. PROGRAM MANAGER
Explains how to upload and download NC programs between FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi and
ROBOCUTs.
4. OPERATION MONITOR
Explains how to reference the operating states of ROBOCUTs.
5. MAIL FUNCTION
Explains how to send emails from FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi.
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
Explains how to examine communication failures when they occur.

Notations
• Product name abbreviations
Major product names are abbreviated as stated below.
FANUC PC FAPT CUT i -> PC FAPT CUT i
FANUC PC FAPT CUT Protector -> Protector
FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi -> ROBOCUT-LINKi
Microsoft® Windows® -> Windows

• Keys
When a sequence of keys are to be pressed and held down, the keys in the sequence are indicated
with an intervening dash (--), as shown below:

Example) CTRL--ALT--TAB, ALT--F4

• Menus
When a command is to be selected from the menu bars, a right arrow (=>) is used to link the menus
in the sequence, as shown below:

“First menu => second menu => third menu”

Example) The menus shown below would be indicated as follows:

“Setting => Parameter Setting => NC Data Preparation”
p-3
PREFACE B-85344EN/03

• Screen examples
The screens shown in this document are merely examples. Their layouts and the file names
displayed may differ from those of your machine.

Features of PC FAPT CUT i

• Operation under Windows
Comfortable operating environment is afforded by Windows which provides a de facto standard user
interface.

• Self-study function
Even the beginner can master the usage in a short term.

• Operating procedure for experienced operators

PC FAPT CUT i commands can be entered from the keyboard, enabling experienced operators to
operate the system quickly.

• Instant menu switching

The screen can be instantly switched between the machining figure creation and machining
definition functions. With this function, you do not have to restart from scratch, even if you
discover that a drawing is missing during machining definition.

• Machining profile creation function

Involute gear and taper figures, usually produced by wire-cut electric discharge machining, can be
created by applying a simple method. The created figures are displayed three-dimensionally, so it
is easy to confirm tapers as well as contours.

• AI Cutting condition setting

PC FAPT CUT offers a AI cutting condition setting function, which is already available on the
FANUC ROBOCUT. This function enables the effective selection of desired cutting conditions
from the thousands of ROBOCUT cutting conditions provided by PC FAPT CUT i.

Features of ROBOCUT-LINKi
• Operation monitor
This monitor can monitor the operating states of up to 32 ROBOCUTs at once real-time.
It also enables you to view the machining status of ROBOCUTs at any time you require, using a
tablet PC and so on.

• Mail function
This function enables you to send the machine state to a smartphone and a cellular phone by email in
the event of an alarm and a wire break and at the end of program operation.

p-4
B-85344EN/03 PREFACE

• Program manager (NC program management)

Program manager enables you to upload and download NC programs between computer and
ROBOCUTs.
It also enables you to transfer NC programs created with an automatic programming system such as
FANUC PC FAPT CUT i to ROBOCUTs at high speed.

[ROBOCUT] [Tablet PC]

Send the operating
states of ROBOCUTs

Upload and download NC programs

[HUB]
LAN

[Computer]

WAN [Broadband router]

Send generated
alarms by email

[Cellular phone]

[Internet service provider]

Models covered by ROBOCUT-LINKi（ROBOCUT）

‧ FANUC ROBOCUT α- C400iA / C600iA
‧ FANUC ROBOCUT α- 0iE / 1iE (NOTE)
‧ FANUC ROBOCUT α- 0iD / 0iDp / 0iDe / 1iD / 1iDp / 1iDe (NOTE)

NOTE
For some models, some functions cannot be used.

ROBOCUT-LINKi security
‧ Use ROBOCUT-LINK i with a reliable network such as an internal network.

‧ Do not create a network environment in which the computer on which ROBOCUT-LINKi is set up can
be accessed by PCs, tablet PCs, smartphones, and the like on the Internet.

p-5
B-85344EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1

Ⅰ．FANUC PC FAPT CUT i

1 SETUP..................................................................................................... 3
1.1 PRIOR TO SETTING UP (OPERATING ENVIRONMENT) ........................... 3
1.1.1 Prerequisites .............................................................................................................3
1.1.2 Other Usable Devices ...............................................................................................4
1.2 SETTING UP PC FAPT CUT i....................................................................... 5
1.2.1 About Setup..............................................................................................................5
1.2.2 About Setting up Again............................................................................................7
1.2.3 About Uninstalling ...................................................................................................7
1.2.4 Precautions when using CD. ....................................................................................9

2 BASIC OPERATION ............................................................................. 10

2.1 FUNDAMENTALS ....................................................................................... 10
2.1.1 Starting PC FAPT CUT i........................................................................................10
2.1.2 Terminating PC FAPT CUT i.................................................................................10
2.1.3 Reading the Latest Information about PC FAPT CUT i ........................................10
2.1.4 Other PC FAPT CUT i Icons..................................................................................11
2.1.5 Contents of PC FAPT CUT i Window ................................................................11
2.1.6 Using the Help Function to Become Familiar with the Operating Procedure ........15
2.1.7 Confirming the Version..........................................................................................15
2.1.8 Modifying the Operation Flow...............................................................................15
2.2 FUNCTIONS PROVIDED BY SIDE MENU.................................................. 16
2.2.1 Figure Creation.......................................................................................................16
2.2.2 Machining Instruction and NC Data Preparation ...................................................22
2.3 FUNCTIONS PROVIDED BY MENU BAR................................................... 23
2.3.1 File Menu ...............................................................................................................23
2.3.2 Modify Menu..........................................................................................................23
2.3.3 Edit Menu ...............................................................................................................24
2.3.4 View Menu .............................................................................................................25
2.3.5 Window Menu........................................................................................................26
2.3.6 Auxiliary Menu ......................................................................................................26
2.3.7 Setting Menu ..........................................................................................................27
2.3.8 Help Menu..............................................................................................................27

3 PROGRAMMING OPERATION ............................................................ 28

3.1 PROCEDURE.............................................................................................. 28
3.2 FIGURE CREATION.................................................................................... 29
3.3 MACHINING FIGURE CREATION .............................................................. 30
3.4 MACHINING INSTRUCTION....................................................................... 31
3.4.1 Preparation Information .........................................................................................31
3.4.2 Machining Start Point Setting ................................................................................31
3.4.3 Cutting Condition Setting.......................................................................................32
3.4.4 Cutting Type Selection...........................................................................................32
3.5 NC DATA PREPARATION .......................................................................... 33
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-85344EN/03

4 SAVING AND LOADING FILES............................................................ 34

4.1 SAVING A FILE ........................................................................................... 34
4.2 LOADING A FILE......................................................................................... 34
5 CREATING A NEW PROGRAM ........................................................... 35
6 FIGURE CREATION ............................................................................. 36
6.1 TYPES OF FIGURES .................................................................................. 36
6.2 SPECIFYING A RADIUS, DISTANCE, AND ANGLE .................................. 36
6.3 SPECIFYING POSITIONS .......................................................................... 37
6.4 SELECTING ENTITIES ............................................................................... 38
6.5 COORDINATE SYSTEM ............................................................................. 39
6.5.1 World Coordinate System ......................................................................................39
6.5.2 Drawing Coordinate System...................................................................................39
6.6 LAYER......................................................................................................... 39
6.6.1 Layer Categories.....................................................................................................39
6.6.2 Setting Drawing Layers..........................................................................................39
6.7 MODIFYING FIGURES BY EXTENSION/TRIMMING ................................. 40
6.8 COPYING FIGURES ................................................................................... 41
6.9 CREATING POLYGONS ............................................................................. 45
6.10 FITTING CURVE ......................................................................................... 45
6.10.1 Creation Method of a Fitting Curve .......................................................................45
6.10.2 Adjusting the Creation Method of a Fitting Curve.................................................46
6.11 OFFSET ...................................................................................................... 47
6.11.1 Outward Offset for a Corner...................................................................................47
6.11.2 Inward Offset for a Corner .....................................................................................48
6.12 ASSEMBLE POLYLINE/POLYGON ............................................................ 49
7 INVOLUTE GEAR FIGURE CREATION ............................................... 53
7.1 OPERATING PROCEDURE........................................................................ 53
7.2 CREATING A GEAR.................................................................................... 53
7.2.1 Tooth Definition .....................................................................................................53
7.2.2 Gear Definitions .....................................................................................................54
7.2.3 Auxiliary.................................................................................................................55
7.2.4 Confirming the Gear...............................................................................................55
7.3 MODIFYING GEARS................................................................................... 55
7.3.1 Selecting Gears to be Modified ..............................................................................55
7.3.2 Modifying a Gear and Its Teeth .............................................................................55
7.3.3 Modifying the Position of a Gear ...........................................................................55
7.3.4 Performing Modification after "Move/Copy" ........................................................55
7.4 CAUTIONS ON USING THE "MODIFY/EDIT" MENU COMMANDS ........... 56
7.4.1 "Modify" Menu Commands (Which Do Not Change The Nature of an Involute
Gear).......................................................................................................................56
7.4.2 "Edit" Menu Commands.........................................................................................56

8 MACHINING FIGURE CREATION........................................................ 57

8.1 OPERATING PROCEDURE........................................................................ 57
8.1.1 Creation ..................................................................................................................57
8.1.2 Modification ...........................................................................................................58
8.2 CREATING CONTOURS............................................................................. 58
8.3 CREATING A MACHINING FIGURE........................................................... 59
c-2
B-85344EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.3.1 Selecting Contours .................................................................................................59
8.3.2 Setting Data ............................................................................................................59
8.4 MODIFYING MACHINING FIGURES .......................................................... 63
8.4.1 Performing Modification Using a Dialog Window ................................................63
8.4.2 Modifying Contours ...............................................................................................63
8.4.3 Performing Modification after [Move/Copy] .........................................................63
8.5 MACHINING FIGURE CREATION FUNCTIONS (FOR
STRAIGHT/TAPERED FIGURES)............................................................... 64
8.5.1 Each and All Creation ............................................................................................64
8.5.2 Taper Specification.................................................................................................64
8.5.3 How to Specify Corner Rs......................................................................................64
8.5.4 Modifying Contours ...............................................................................................65
8.5.5 Extension ................................................................................................................65
8.5.6 Color and Layer......................................................................................................65
8.6 MACHINING FIGURE CREATION FUNCTIONS FOR 4-AXIS
INDEPENDENT FIGURES .......................................................................... 65
8.6.1 Specifying Synchronizing Points on the Top and Bottom Planes..........................65
8.6.2 Canceling Synchronizing Point ..............................................................................65
8.6.3 Canceling All Synchronizing Points at the Same Time .........................................66
8.6.4 Modifying Contours ...............................................................................................66
8.6.5 Color and Layer......................................................................................................66
8.7 MACHINING FIGURE CREATION FUNCTION FOR DIE WITH RELIEF
FIGURES..................................................................................................... 66
8.7.1 Creation for Each Figure and Creation for All Figures ..........................................66
8.7.2 Taper Specification.................................................................................................66
8.7.3 Corner R Specification Method..............................................................................66
8.7.4 Changing the Contour Figure .................................................................................67
8.7.5 Extension ................................................................................................................67
8.7.6 Color and Layer......................................................................................................67
8.8 COORDINATE SYSTEMS........................................................................... 67
8.8.1 Machining Figures and Coordinate Systems..........................................................67
8.8.2 Single Coordinate System and Multiple Coordinate Systems................................67
8.9 THREE-DIMENSIONAL DRAWING ............................................................ 68
8.10 NOTE ON CUTTING DIFFERENT PATTERNS AT TOP AND BOTTOM
FIGURES..................................................................................................... 68
9 MACHINING DEFINITION..................................................................... 69
9.1 OPERATING PROCEDURE........................................................................ 69
9.2 PREPARATION INFORMATION ................................................................. 70
9.2.1 Machine Setting......................................................................................................70
9.2.2 Use Function...........................................................................................................70
9.2.3 Outputting G10.......................................................................................................72
9.2.4 Wire Diameter, Workpiece Material, Nozzle Gap Setting .....................................72
9.2.5 Program Start Point ................................................................................................73
9.2.6 Clearance ................................................................................................................73
9.3 WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING................................................. 73
9.4 SPECIFYING AND CANCELING MACHINING USING A MACHINING
FIGURE ....................................................................................................... 74
9.4.1 Closed-Area Machining Specification--Setting The Wire Cut Start Point.............74
9.4.2 Specifying Open-Area Machining..........................................................................77
9.4.3 Specifying of Batch Processing of Circular Figure ................................................78
9.4.4 Canceling of Cutting ..............................................................................................79
c-3
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-85344EN/03

9.4.5 Cautions Related to an Escape Amount of 0 ..........................................................79

9.4.6 Cutting Taper Figure ..............................................................................................80
9.4.7 Cutting 4-Axis Independent Figures ......................................................................80
9.4.8 Notes on Specifying the Glue Tab Position For 4-Axis Independent Figures .......81
9.5 SPECIFYING A CLEARANCE FOR EACH FIGURE................................... 82
9.6 SETTING, REGISTERING, AND CONFIRMING THE CUTTING
CONDITIONS .............................................................................................. 82
9.6.1 Setting the Cutting Conditions ...............................................................................82
9.6.2 Registering/Extracting Cutting Conditions ............................................................86
9.6.3 No Offset ................................................................................................................86
9.7 CUTTING TYPES ........................................................................................ 87
9.7.1 Cutting Types .........................................................................................................88
9.7.2 Cutting Type (basic).............................................................................................109
9.8 EDITING MACHINING DEFINITIONS ....................................................... 109
9.9 MACHINING ORDER EDITING FUNCTION ............................................. 110
9.10 OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR PRACTICAL APPLICATIONS ............. 111
9.10.1 Creating NC Data for an Unlisted Machine .........................................................111
9.10.2 If No Work Material is Available.........................................................................111
9.10.3 Machining Work-pieces of Different Thickness and Materials ...........................112
9.10.4 Producing Two or more Identical Figures............................................................112

10 NC DATA PREPARATION.................................................................. 113

10.1 PREPARING NC DATA ............................................................................. 113
10.2 SETTING THE NC DATA OUTPUT FORMAT........................................... 115
10.3 OUTPUTTING NC DATA........................................................................... 117
10.4 PRINTING NC DATA................................................................................. 117
10.5 PRINTING MACHINING TIME ESTIMATES ............................................. 117
11 ITEMS TO BE SET ON THE MACHINE.............................................. 118
11.1 MOUNTING THE WORKPIECE ON THE TABLE ..................................... 118
11.2 CUTTING CONDITIONS ........................................................................... 119
11.3 OFFSET AMOUNTS.................................................................................. 119
11.4 AI CORNER CONTROL ............................................................................ 119
11.5 AUTOMATIC WIRE FEED (AWF) MECHANISM....................................... 119
11.6 OPTIONAL SKIP ....................................................................................... 120
11.7 OPTIONAL STOP...................................................................................... 120
11.8 MACHINING START POINT...................................................................... 120
11.9 OTHERS.................................................................................................... 120
12 PLOTTING........................................................................................... 121
12.1 PLOTTER SETTING.................................................................................. 121
12.2 PROCEDURES ......................................................................................... 122
13 CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT............................................................... 125
13.1 CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT ..................................................................... 125
13.1.1 CAD Data .............................................................................................................125
13.1.2 Handling of CAD Data by This System ...............................................................125
13.1.3 Handling CAD Data Efficiently ...........................................................................126
13.1.4 Precision of CAD Data.........................................................................................127
13.2 DXF FILE INPUT/OUTPUT........................................................................ 128
13.2.1 Overview of DXF.................................................................................................128
c-4
B-85344EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
13.2.2 DXF File Input .....................................................................................................129
13.2.3 Setting the Input Conversion Method ..................................................................130
13.2.4 DXF File Output...................................................................................................134
13.2.5 Setting the Output Conversion Method................................................................135
13.3 DXF CONVERSION SPECIFICATIONS FOR DXF FILE INPUT/OUTPUT137
13.3.1 DXF Input Conversion Specifications..................................................................137
13.3.2 DXF Output Conversion Specifications...............................................................139
13.4 IGES FILE INPUT/OUTPUT ...................................................................... 140
13.4.1 Overview of IGES ................................................................................................140
13.4.2 IGES File Input ....................................................................................................141
13.4.3 Setting the Input Conversion Method ..................................................................142
13.4.4 IGES File Output..................................................................................................146
13.4.5 Setting the Output Conversion Method................................................................147
13.5 CONVERSION SPECIFICATION FOR IGES FILE INPUT/OUTPUT ........ 149
13.5.1 IGES Input Conversion Specifications.................................................................149
13.5.2 IGES Output Conversion Specifications ..............................................................152

14 FILE TRANSFER ................................................................................ 154

14.1 FUNCTION OUTLINE................................................................................ 154
14.1.1 Application Software............................................................................................154
14.1.2 Devices to Which Data can be Transmitted .........................................................154
14.1.3 Data Format That can be Transmitted ..................................................................154
14.1.4 Transmission Protocols ........................................................................................154
14.1.5 File Operation Functions ......................................................................................154
14.2 ACTIVATING THE FILE TRANSMISSION TOOL...................................... 155
14.2.1 Activation Using the PC FAPT CUT i Output Function......................................155
14.2.2 Activating Only the File Transmission Tool ........................................................155
14.2.3 Activating the File Transmission Manager ..........................................................156
14.3 FILE TRANSMISSION TOOL SCREEN .................................................... 156
14.3.1 Menus ...................................................................................................................156
14.3.2 File Specification Areas .......................................................................................156
14.3.3 Buttons .................................................................................................................157
14.3.4 Operation Guide ...................................................................................................157
14.4 OPERATING PROCEDURE...................................................................... 157
14.4.1 Selecting the Device and Setting the Transmission Conditions ...........................157
14.4.2 Specifying Files....................................................................................................158
14.4.3 Selecting a Command...........................................................................................158
14.4.4 Changing the Contents of the Transmission Operation........................................158
14.4.5 Starting Transmission...........................................................................................159
14.4.6 Checking the Transmission Status........................................................................159
14.4.7 Ending the Transmission Operation .....................................................................160
14.5 OUTLINE OF PROCESSING FOR EACH FUNCTION ............................. 161
14.5.1 Send ......................................................................................................................161
14.5.2 Receive .................................................................................................................161
14.5.3 Delete....................................................................................................................161
14.5.4 Clear .....................................................................................................................161
14.5.5 Rename.................................................................................................................162
14.5.6 Read-Only and Read/Write ..................................................................................162
14.5.7 Refresh..................................................................................................................162
14.6 SETTING TRANSMISSION CONDITIONS ............................................... 162
14.6.1 Setting Procedure .................................................................................................162
14.6.2 Specifying the Device and Plotter ........................................................................165
14.6.3 Standard Setting Files...........................................................................................165
c-5
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-85344EN/03

14.6.4 Setting The Communication Conditions ..............................................................165

14.6.5 Setting the Transmission Control Conditions.......................................................166
14.6.6 Setting Reception Control Conditions..................................................................167
14.7 TRANSMISSION SCHEDULE MANAGEMENT ........................................ 168
14.7.1 Contents of The Screen ........................................................................................168
14.7.2 Changing the Schedule.........................................................................................169
14.7.3 Exiting the File Transmission Manager ...............................................................169
14.8 EXAMPLE TRANSMISSION PROCEDURES ........................................... 169
14.8.1 Transmission to and from the CNC......................................................................169

15 DIMENSION MEASUREMENT ........................................................... 171

15.1 DIMENSION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION .............................................. 171
15.2 MEASURABLE DIMENSIONAL VALUES.................................................. 171
15.3 ACTIVATING DIMENSION MEASUREMENT ........................................... 172
15.4 MEASURING COORDINATES.................................................................. 172
15.5 DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO POINTS ...................................................... 173
15.6 DISTANCE BETWEEN POINT AND ENTITY............................................ 174
15.7 CIRCLE/ARC RADIUS .............................................................................. 175
15.8 ANGLES FORMED BY TWO LINES ......................................................... 176
15.9 NOTE......................................................................................................... 177
15.10 DISPLAYING MEASUREMENTS .............................................................. 178
15.11 SWITCH OVER OF THE ON/OFF OF MEASURED INFORMATION........ 179
15.12 SETTING ................................................................................................... 179
15.13 FROM THE MENU, SELECT AUXILIARY, MEASURE, AND MODIFY IN
THIS ORDER............................................................................................. 180
15.14 DRAWING MODE...................................................................................... 180
15.15 NOTES ...................................................................................................... 181
16 RENDERING FUNCTION.................................................................... 182
16.1 HOW TO USE THE RENDERING FUNCTION.......................................... 182
16.2 COMMANDS ON THE [VIEW] MENU ....................................................... 182
16.3 COMMAND DESCRIPTION ...................................................................... 183
16.3.1 Change the View Direction of the Figure.............................................................183
16.3.2 Move the Position of the Figure ...........................................................................183
16.3.3 Change the Size of the Figure ..............................................................................183
16.3.4 Enlarges a Specified Rectangle by Mouse to Fill the Window ............................183
16.3.5 Display All Figures ..............................................................................................183
16.3.6 Enlarges the Drawing Window Display by a Factor of 2.....................................184
16.3.7 Reduces the Drawing Window Display by a Factor of 2 .....................................184
16.3.8 Auto-rotate/Pause .................................................................................................184
16.3.9 Step.......................................................................................................................184
16.3.10 Reset and Redraw .................................................................................................184
16.3.11 Option...................................................................................................................184

17 EXTRACT MACHINING FIGURE FROM NC DATA ........................... 185

17.1 OPERATION.............................................................................................. 185
17.1.1 Selection of NC Data............................................................................................185
17.1.2 Specifying Converting Range ..............................................................................185
17.1.3 Execution of Extraction........................................................................................185
17.1.4 Display Log ..........................................................................................................186
17.2 SETTING ................................................................................................... 186
c-6
B-85344EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
17.2.1 FANUC Format ....................................................................................................186
17.2.2 M Format..............................................................................................................187
17.2.3 S Format ...............................................................................................................187
17.2.4 Se Format .............................................................................................................188
17.2.5 Extracting Option .................................................................................................189
17.2.6 Environment .........................................................................................................189

18 SETTING ............................................................................................. 190

18.1 PARAMETER SETTING ............................................................................ 190
18.1.1 Parameter Setting for View ..................................................................................190
18.1.2 Parameter Setting for Figure Operation ...............................................................190
18.1.3 Parameter Setting for Machining Figure Extracting from NC Data.....................191
18.1.4 Parameter Settings Related to Machining Definition ...........................................192
18.1.5 Parameter Setting for Preparing NC Data ............................................................193
18.1.6 Parameter Setting for Auto Saving.......................................................................195
18.2 STANDARD SETTINGS ............................................................................ 195
18.2.1 Standard Settings Related to Involute Gears ........................................................195
18.2.2 Standard Settings Related to Machining Profiles .................................................196
18.2.3 Standard Settings Related to Machining Instruction ............................................196
18.2.4 Standard Settings Related to NC Data Preparation ..............................................198
18.3 RESTORING SETTINGS .......................................................................... 198
18.4 TOOL BAR SETTING ................................................................................ 198
18.4.1 Storing The Tool Bar Definition File ...................................................................198
18.4.2 Creating Icons.......................................................................................................198
18.4.3 Displaying the Tool Bar Setting screen................................................................199
18.4.4 Registering Menu Items .......................................................................................199
18.4.5 Deleting Buttons/Spaces.......................................................................................199
18.4.6 Inserting Spaces....................................................................................................199
18.4.7 Changing Icons.....................................................................................................199
18.4.8 Saving Settings/Returning to the Normal State....................................................200
18.4.9 Discarding the Settings/Returning to the Normal State........................................200
18.5 SETTING OPERATING ENVIRONMENTS ............................................... 200
18.6 SETTING FOR EXTERNAL APPLICATION .............................................. 200
19 NC MACHINE SETTING ..................................................................... 203
19.1 NC MACHINE FILE ................................................................................... 203
19.2 NC MACHINE SPECIFICATION................................................................ 203
19.3 NC DATA FORMAT................................................................................... 205
19.4 NC MACHINE SETTING TOOL OPERATION........................................... 205
20 TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................ 207
20.1 BEFORE TROUBLE OCCURS.................................................................. 207
20.2 IF TROUBLE OCCURS ............................................................................. 207
20.3 MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING SETUP.............................................. 208

APPENDIX
A NC DATA FORMAT ............................................................................ 213
A.1 GENERAL FORMAT ................................................................................. 213
A.2 NC DATA FOR USING THE [AI SETTING (STANDARD CUTTING
CONDITION)] FUNCTION......................................................................... 214
A.3 NC DATA FOR USING THE [AI CORNER CONTROL] FUNCTION ......... 214
c-7
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-85344EN/03

A.4 NC DATA FOR USING THE [AUTO WIRE FEED] FUNCTION................. 215
A.5 NC DATA FOR USING THE [AWF RESULT MONITORING] FUNCTION 215
A.6 NC DATA FOR USING THE [RETRACE] FUNCTION .............................. 216
A.7 M CODE FOR A STOP IMMEDIATELY AFTER CUTTING-OFF............... 216
A.8 M CODES FOR WIRE CUT AND STOP AFTER ESCAPE PRECEDED BY
CUTTING-OFF .......................................................................................... 217
A.9 REVERSE CUT ......................................................................................... 217
B SETTING THE PROGRAMMED PLANE & WORKPIECE THICKNESS
............................................................................................................. 218
B.1 THE WORKPIECE BOTTOM SURFACE IS THE PROGRAMMED PLANE.
................................................................................................................... 218
B.2 THE WORKPIECE TOP SURFACE IS THE PROGRAMMED PLANE...... 218
B.3 THE WORKPIECE BOTTOM SURFACE IS THE PROGRAMMED PLANE
(WORKPIECE IS RISING UP FROM THE TABLE TOP). ......................... 219
B.4 THE WORKPIECE TOP SURFACE IS THE PROGRAMMED PLANE
(WORKPIECE IS RISING UP FROM THE TABLE TOP). ......................... 219
C OTHER ................................................................................................ 220
C.1 AWF RESULTS MONITOR ....................................................................... 220

Ⅱ．FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi
1 SETUP................................................................................................. 223
1.1 SETTING UP THE COMPUTER................................................................ 223
1.1.1 Required System...................................................................................................223
1.1.2 Confirming the Installation of Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 ..........................225
1.1.3 Setting a Unique IP Address ................................................................................226
1.1.4 Setting up Windows Live Mail ............................................................................230
1.1.5 Setting up the Internet Information Services (IIS) ...............................................233
1.1.6 Setting the Firewall ..............................................................................................237
1.1.7 Changing the Folder Access Permission Setting..................................................239
1.2 SETTING UP THE ROBOCUT .................................................................. 240
1.3 NETWORK CONNECTION ....................................................................... 243
1.4 CONFIRMING THE NETWORK CONNECTION ....................................... 245
1.5 INSTALLING ROBOCUT-LINKi ......................................................................... 247
1.6 ADDING AND DELETING ROBOCUT-LINKi FEATURES ........................ 250
1.7 UNINSTALLING ROBOCUT-LINKi ................................................................... 252
1.8 PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE CD .................................................. 253
2 REGISTRATION AND SETTING ........................................................ 254
2.1 STARTING ROBOCUT-LINKi SETTING ................................................... 254
2.2 REGISETERING AND DELETING ROBOCUTS ....................................... 256
2.2.1 Registration ..........................................................................................................256
2.2.2 Entering Comments ..............................................................................................262
2.2.3 Changing Registration Data .................................................................................263
2.2.4 Deleting Registration Data ...................................................................................264
2.3 SETTING THE PROGRAM MANAGER .................................................... 265
2.3.1 Setting the NC Program Storage Folder...............................................................265
2.3.2 Setting the NC Program File Extension ...............................................................266
c-8
B-85344EN/03 TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.3.3 Specifying an Editor.............................................................................................266
2.4 SETTING THE MAIL FUNCTION .............................................................. 267
2.4.1 Registering a Mail Address ..................................................................................267
2.4.2 Changing Registration Data .................................................................................269
2.4.3 Deleting Mail Addresses ......................................................................................270
2.4.4 Setting Sending Conditions ..................................................................................270
2.4.5 Adding Mail Contents ..........................................................................................271
2.4.6 Testing Mail Transmission ...................................................................................271
2.4.7 Referencing the Transmission Log.......................................................................272
2.5 ENDING ROBOCUT-LINKi SETTING ....................................................... 274

3 PROGRAM MANAGER....................................................................... 275

3.1 STARTING THE PROGRAM MANAGER .................................................. 275
3.2 TRANSFERRING PROGRAMS................................................................. 276
3.2.1 Transferring Programs from ROBOCUT to Computer ........................................276
3.2.2 Transferring Programs from Computer to ROBOCUT ........................................278
3.3 DELETING PROGRAMS........................................................................... 279
3.3.1 Deleting NC Program Files from the Computer...................................................279
3.3.2 Deleting NC Programs from the ROBOCUT.......................................................280
3.4 RENAMING NC PROGRAM FILES........................................................... 281
3.5 REFERENCING AND EDITING NC PROGRAMS..................................... 282
3.5.1 Referencing and Editing NC Program Files in the Computer ..............................282
3.5.2 Referencing and Editing NC Programs in the ROBOCUT ..................................284
3.6 EXITING THE PROGRAM MANAGER...................................................... 284
3.7 CAUTIONS ................................................................................................ 285
3.8 ERROR CODES ........................................................................................ 286
4 OPERATION MONITOR...................................................................... 287
4.1 STARTING THE OPERATION MONITOR ................................................ 287
4.1.1 Starting ROBOCUT-LINKi Server ......................................................................287
4.1.2 Starting the Web Browser ....................................................................................288
4.2 REFERENCING A MACHINE LIST ........................................................... 290
4.3 REFERENCING OPERATING STATES.................................................... 291
4.4 REFERENCING THE CUTTING MONITOR SCREEN .............................. 292
4.5 CHANGING CUTTING CONDITIONS ....................................................... 295
4.6 EXITING THE OPERATION MONITOR .................................................... 298
4.6.1 Exiting the Web Browser .....................................................................................298
4.6.2 Exiting the ROBOCUT-LINKi Server .................................................................298

5 MAIL FUNCTION ................................................................................ 299

5.1 STARTING THE MAIL FUNCTION............................................................ 299
5.2 EXITING THE MAIL FUNCTION ............................................................... 300
5.3 MAIL CONTENTS...................................................................................... 300
5.4 CAUTIONS ................................................................................................ 302
6 CUTTING RESULT DATA COLLECTION .......................................... 303
6.1 COLLECTING CUTTING RESULT DATA ................................................. 303
6.2 REFERENCING CUTTING RESULT DATA .............................................. 304
6.2.1 Menu.....................................................................................................................304
6.2.2 Cutting result list ..................................................................................................305
6.2.3 Result....................................................................................................................306
c-9
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-85344EN/03

6.2.4 Event.....................................................................................................................308
6.2.5 Graph ....................................................................................................................311
6.2.6 Ending Reference .................................................................................................311
6.3 COMPARING CUTTING RESULT DATA .................................................. 312
6.3.1 Registering Master Data .......................................................................................312
6.3.2 Comparing Cutting Result Data ...........................................................................313
6.4 CREATING A REPORT ............................................................................. 314
6.5 MANAGING CUTTING RESULT DATA..................................................... 315
7 TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................................................ 316
7.1 CHECKING THE COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT ............................ 316
7.2 CHECKING THE IP ADDRESSES AND SUBNET MASKS....................... 318
7.3 CHECKING THE FIREWALL (ROBOCUT-LINKi SERVER)...................... 319
7.4 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS ....................................................... 321
7.4.1 No Reply to the ping Command...........................................................................321
7.4.2 Error Code 0x*** Displayed by the Program Manager .......................................322
7.4.3 ROBOCUT Not Connected to ROBOCUT-LINKi Server ..................................322
7.4.4 ROBOCUT Status "END"....................................................................................323
7.4.5 "Server Error in '/' Application." Displayed on the Operation Monitor ...............324
7.4.6 No Images Displayed on the Operation Monitor .................................................325
7.4.7 "Internet Explorer cannot display the webpage" Displayed on the Operation
Monitor.................................................................................................................326
7.4.8 Cutting Monitor Screen Not Displayed on the Operation Monitor ......................326
7.4.9 "HTTP Error 500.19 – Internal Server Error" Displayed on the Operation Monitor
..............................................................................................................................327
7.4.10 Operation Monitor Window Not Displayed on Another Computer in the Network
..............................................................................................................................328
7.4.11 Mail Transmission Disabled.................................................................................329
7.4.12 Mail Transmission Confirmation Dialog Box Displayed.....................................329
7.4.13 Registration of the Second and Subsequent ROBOCUTs Using Enter (Automatic)
Disabled................................................................................................................330

c-10
Ⅰ．FANUC PC FAPT CUT i
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 1.SETUP

1 SETUP
1.1 PRIOR TO SETTING UP (OPERATING ENVIRONMENT)

1.1.1 Prerequisites
The following operating environment is needed to run PC FAPT CUT i.

Personal Computer on which any of the OS shown below operates.

• Operating system
Windows 2000, Windows XP(excluding Windows XP Professional x64 Edition), Windows Vista,
Windows 7, Windows 8
• Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1
Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1 is required when the System edition of PC FAPT CUT i is 07.1 or
later. It can also be installed from the PC FAPT CUT i CD. For details, see the README file.

NOTE
When the operating system is Windows 7 or later, Microsoft .NET Framework 1.1
is not needed.
You can use Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 preinstalled on your personal
computer.
If Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 is not installed on the personal computer used,
download it from the website of Microsoft Corporation.

• CPU
Pentium II or higher (Operating systems mentioned above have to operate properly.)
• Memory
64MB or more for Microsoft Windows 2000
128MB or more for Windows XP,
512MB or more for Windows Vista
1GB (x86) / 2GB (x64) or more for Windows 7, Windows 8
(A larger capacity might be required when the rendering function is used.)
• Hard disk
Free area of 100MB or more
• CD-ROM drive
• Display
Resolution 1024×768 or higher
Color 256 colors or more
(High color (16 bits) or True color (32 bits) is required when the rendering function is used.)
• Parallel port for a printer or USB port
• Keyboard, mouse

-3-
1.SETUP FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Parallel-interface printer cable

When the parallel 36-pin protector is used, a printer cable is required for connecting the protector

Other devices are required when the rendering function is used.

• Hardware
3D video accelerator
(Hardware to intensify the 3D graphic processing to speed up the three-dimensional figure display)
• Microsoft DirectX
DirectX 8.0 or a later version has to be installed.
(It can also be installed from the PC FAPT CUT i CD. For details, see README file.)
The Rendering function makes a machining figure easier to see and understand.
3D animation can be used to add reality during creation of NC data.

1.1.2 Other Usable Devices

• Printer
Windows printer driver
NOTE
When the parallel 36-pin protector is used, a parallel port and a printer cable are
required for connecting the protector.

• Plotter
A plotter equipped with a serial interface and which supports HP-GL commands.

NOTE
PC FAPT CUT cannot operate with plotters designed to operate under the
control of HP-GL2 commands.

-4-
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 1.SETUP

1.2 SETTING UP PC FAPT CUT i

1.2.1 About Setup

Preparation
1. First, decide a folder name on the hard disk to which the PC FAPT CUT i system program will be
stored.
(In the default settings, the folder is set up to\Program Files\FANUC PC FAPT CUT i on the drive
in which Windows is installed.)
Example) C: \Program Files\FANUC PC FAPT CUTi
• Do not set up PC FAPT CUT i in the root directory (\).
• If other programs have already been set up, do not set up PC FAPT CUT i in the same folder as
these programs.

2. Do not attach the PC FAPT CUT i protector.

• When you are going to use the PC FAPT CUT i after completing the setup, attach the protector.

Printer Cable
Protector

Printer

The above figure shows how to attach the parallel 36-pin protector. When using the parallel 25-pin
or USB protector, attach the protector to the corresponding connector.

3. Switch on the computer and start Windows.

Setup Procedure
Insert the CD.
After some moment “Setup Preparation complete” window appears.
Press [Finish] button to shut down (Power off) the computer. Please turn off the computer manually if it
isn’t shut down automatically.
Turn power on again and remove CD and set it again.
(The above “Setup Preparation complete” window may not appear depends on the case. See Notes on
setup (1) )
When you insert the CD-R, the setup startup screen is displayed. Select the application to be set up. This
starts the setup.
Next, follow the on-screen instructions. If the on-screen instructions or descriptions are unclear, do not
change any setup items. Leave the default settings as they are and proceed to the next step.
For details on how to handle CD, see "1.2.4 Precautions when using CD."

-5-
1.SETUP FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Setup startup screen

NOTE
If the setup startup screen is not displayed, use the Explorer to display the
contents of the CD-ROM drive, and execute "autorun.exe" in the root directory
by either clicking or double-clicking it.

Icons that are registered

Notes on Setup
(1) If the USB protector is connected before the setup, the normal setup operation cannot be performed.
Detach the USB protector, then start the setup procedure again.
(2) The system driver to identify the Protector will be setup automatically if the system driver is not
installed yet or the version of it is revised. In this case, “Setup Preparation complete” window
appears.
(3) The following data are stored to the predetermined folder:
These folder s can be altered after finishing the setup, by the environment setting.
Example of the data
• Part file
• NC data file
• NC machine file
(4) After the setup is completed, the computer must be restarted before you start up PC FAPT CUT i.
Even if you enter "No" in answer to the prompt "Restart computer?" after the setup is completed, be
sure to restart the computer before you start up PC FAPT CUT i. If you start up PC FAPT CUT i
without restarting the computer, a protector recognition error (protection violation) or an unexpected
error may occur.
(5) Perform the setup in the client computer. As far as possible do not to perform the setup in the server
computer.
(6) When using Windows NT or Windows 2000, log in at the "administrator" prompt.
Please consult your system administrator for details.
(7) Microsoft DirectX
To use the rendering function, DirectX must have been installed. For details, see the description
file.

-6-
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 1.SETUP

1.2.2 About Setting up Again

If you attempt a re-set in a previously set up folder, but PC FAPT CUT i of the same version has already
been set up, a prompt is displayed asking whether to re-set up the folder.
If the set up version is newer than the one you attempt to set up, an error message is displayed.
If any of the NC machine, standard machining condition, and other files that have been set up differs from
the one you attempt to set up, that file is automatically backed up. The backup folder name is
UPXXX.BACK (where XXX is the version you attempt to set up.)

1.2.3 About Uninstalling

Follow the procedure below to delete PC FAPT CUT i once it has been installed.
The following explanation uses Windows 7 as an example.

(1) From the Windows Start menu, start the Control Panel.

(2) Click "Uninstall a program".

(3) A list of software programs installed in the computer is displayed.

From the list, double-click "FANUC PC FAPT CUT i ...".

-7-
1.SETUP FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(4) A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click "Yes".

(5) When the uninstallation is complete, the "Uninstall Complete" dialog box is displayed.
Click the "Finish" button.

If an attempt is made to uninstall any files in common use by Windows applications (shared files), a
window may be displayed asking you to confirm whether to delete the shared files. These files may be
used by other applications. For safety's sake, do not delete these files.

Precautions Relating to Uninstalling

(1) Part files, NC data and other data are not uninstalled. Delete these files manually as required.
In the default setting, this data is stored to the \!PC FAPT CUT i folder in the drive in which
Windows is installed.
(2) To uninstall the system driver for the protect key, select "Sentinel System Driver" in [Add/Remove
Programs] in the [Control panel].

-8-
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 1.SETUP

1.2.4 Precautions when using CD.

(1) Handle CD taking care not to scratch, leave fingerprints and allow to dust or dirt to become attached
to the recording surface of the CD. The recording surface is the other side of the printed label side of
the CD.
(2) Wipe off any dust or dirt on CD gently with a soft, dry cloth or using a commercially available CD
cleaner. Never use solvents.
(3) You can write only on the printed label side of the CD. When you write on the printed label, use an
oil-based pen or water-based felt-tip pen. Do not use a ball-point pen, pencil or other sharp-tipped
object.
(4) Do not leave CD in the direct sunlight or in high-temperature or humid locations.
(5) Do not affix labels on disks.

-9-
2.BASIC OPERATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

2 BASIC OPERATION
2.1 FUNDAMENTALS

2.1.1 Starting PC FAPT CUT i

Double-click the PC FAPT CUT i icon.

NOTE
You can start more than one instance of PC FAPT CUT i at a time. Note,
however, the following:
• If more than one instance writes data to the same file, the data written last will
be effective, regardless of the file type (part, NC data, NC machine, etc.).
Make sure that files are not overwritten.
• Various settings such as standard settings and operating environment settings
are saved in files. As described in the preceding paragraph, overwrite the
same setting with care.
• Starting more than one instance of the transfer tool supplied with PC FAPT
CUT i at a time is prohibited. The tool is, however, not checked to see if the
tool and the transfer tool supplied with PC FAPT CUT (16-bit version) have
been started at a time. Do no use them at the same time.

2.1.2 Terminating PC FAPT CUT i

Select "File => Exit" from the PC FAPT CUT i menu.

2.1.3 Reading the Latest Information about PC FAPT CUT i

Double-click the Read Me file icon. The Read Me file contains information relating to PC FAPT CUT i
that users should be aware of, together with information specific to the installed version. The information
in the Read Me file does not appear in the operator's manual. It is imperative, therefore, that the user read
the contents of this file.

- 10 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 2.BASIC OPERATION

2.1.4 Other PC FAPT CUT i Icons

There are several other executable icons for PC FAPT CUT i. These correspond to the File
Transmission Tool, File Transmission Manager.

The File Transmission Tool enables NC data exchange with an external device via a serial port. The File
Transmission Manager is an application that manages the transmission schedule and performs the actual
communication. Usually, it is not used independently.

2.1.5 Contents of PC FAPT CUT i Window

This section describes the PC FAPT CUT i windows, using, as an example, the first window to appear
after PC FAPT CUT i becomes operable.

Menu bar Title bar

Tool bar

Side menu

Drawing window

Status
window
Prompt area

(1) Title bar

The title bar usually displays the name of the file being processed. If the file has not yet been
saved, "untitled" is displayed.

(2) Menu bar

Commands to be executed can be selected from the menu bar. Command execution can be nested
up to about 20 levels.
• File menu
Provides the functions used to manipulate files.
• Modify menu
Provides the functions used to modify individual figure entities.
• Edit menu
Provides the functions used to edit two or more figures at one time.
• View menu
Provides drawing and machining path display functions.

- 11 -
2.BASIC OPERATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

• Window menu
Provides drawing window display functions.
• Auxiliary menu
Provides auxiliary functions, such as changing drawing coordinates, confirming entity
information, and calculating distances.
• Setting menu
Provides functions for setting information such as standard values and operating environments.
• Help menu
Provides functions that help explain the use of PC FAPT CUT i.

(3) Tool bar

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n) (o) (p) (q) (r) (s) (t) (u) (v) (w)

Those functions that are used most frequently are also provided as icons, so that processing can be
simplified. Moreover, the tool bar can be customized as necessary.
The standard tool bar contains icons corresponding to the following functions.
(a) Read data from a file.
(b) Save the data currently being processed into a file.
(c) Cancel, or undo, the previous operation.
(d) Recover, or redo, a canceled operation.
(e) Erase figures.
(f) Redraw.
(g) Automatically enlarge or reduce the view area.
(h) Enlarge a specified range within the view area.
(i) Double the size of the view area.
(j) Half the size of the view area.
(k) Reposition the view area.
(l) Drawing layer setting
(m) Trim/Extend Intersection
(n) Trim/Extend Both entities
(o) Erase Section 2 Positions
(p) Break Both entities
(q) Round
(r) Window x 1
(s) Window x 2
(t) Entity Information
(u) Measure(Distance of 2 points)
(v) Zoom backward
(w) Zoom forward

- 12 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 2.BASIC OPERATION
(4) Side menu

Figure creation
mode
Machining
instruction/
NC data
preparation
mode

Side menus contain icons corresponding to the major commands related to programming and figure
creation.
The side menus are configured in a hierarchy.
• Primary menu
Either figure creation, or machining instruction and NC data preparation, is selected.
• Secondary menu
Either the figure creation or machining instruction and NC data preparation main menu is
displayed.
• Tertiary menu
A sub-menu corresponding to each figure appears only in figure creation mode.

(5) Drawing window

The drawing window displays information such as parts figure, those figures created in figure
creation mode, and tool paths.
When using the mouse to specify a position or select an entity in this window, simply click the
corresponding item directly.

- 13 -
2.BASIC OPERATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(6) Prompt area

Key entry panel

Position specification panel Mode switch box

Entity selection panel

Prompt back button

Interrupt release button

In the prompt area, the user can enter responses to prompts output by the current processing. System
messages also appear in this area.
The prompt area may contain the following entities, depending on the type of the prompt and the
particular installation.
(a) Prompt back button (Back button)
(b) Interrupt release button (ESC button)
(c) Mode switch box
(d) Key entry panel
(e) Position specification panel
(f) Entity selection panel
(g) Other panels as required

(7) Status window

The status window displays the current status of an entity being prepared, such as color, line type,
and layer No. The status of an entity can be modified directly using the status window.
The status window contains the following items.
(a) Color setting button
(b) Line type setting button
(c) Figure search direction switch button
(d) Machining plane depth entry field
(e) Drawing layer No. entry field
When the PC FAPT CUT i window is small, or if the display unit supports only a low resolution, the
status window may not appear. In such a case, access the equivalent function on the menu bar
(Auxiliary => Set Current Attributes).

- 14 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 2.BASIC OPERATION

2.1.6 Using the Help Function to Become Familiar with the

Operating Procedure
Users can use the Help function to help them become familiar with the operating procedure of PC FAPT
CUT i. Whenever the user is unsure of how to proceed, accessing the Help function will provide guidance
on the correct procedure. This function provides information that does not appear in the operator's
manual.
Whenever the Help button appears in a window, double-clicking the button will provide help relating to
that window. Whenever there is no Help button, help can be displayed by pressing the F1 key or by
selecting the Help menu from the menu bar.
The help menu contains the following sub-menus.
• Contents
This sub-menu enables the table of contents to be searched for topics related to PC FAPT CUT i.
• Search for Help on
This sub-menu enables a search to be made for topics related to PC FAPT CUT i according to a
specified keyword. Selecting this sub-menu causes a list of keywords that can be used for a search
to appear.
• How to Use Help
This sub-menu explains how to use the help function.

2.1.7 Confirming the Version

When it is necessary to confirm the installed version of PC FAPT CUT i, such as when performing
maintenance, select “Help => About PC FAPT CUT i” from the menu bar. The version of PC FAPT
CUT i and information relating to the computer on which it is running will be displayed, as shown below.

2.1.8 Modifying the Operation Flow

PC FAPT CUT i commands are executed by selecting from side menus or menu bars. Usually, a
conversational screen or a string of prompts appear. Operation is performed by responding to the
displayed messages or prompts.
This section explains how to abandon the execution of one command in favor of another, as well as how
to correct operator errors.
• Abandoning one command and executing another
Using the side menu, it is always possible to switch the command being executed. Clicking an icon
halts execution of the current command and starts execution of the command corresponding to the
clicked icon.
Whenever it is not possible to click an icon in a side menu, click a button such as OK, Cancel, Close,
or Exit in the prompt area or in any current conversational screen, then try to click the desired icon
again.
• Interrupt by another command
The commands available on a menu bar or tool bar are executed like interrupts. While a command is
being executed, if another command is selected from a menu bar or tool bar, the current command is
temporarily suspended while the newly selected command is executed. Upon completion of the

- 15 -
2.BASIC OPERATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

newly selected command, execution of the original command is resumed from the point at which
processing was suspended.
• Exiting an interrupt
Whenever a command is selected from a menu bar or tool bar, the ESC button appears in the prompt
area. The command currently being executed can be terminated by clicking the ESC button or
pressing the ESC key.

EXAMPLE
This method can be used, for example, to terminate an edit or modify command
that is repeatedly executed for two or more figures, such as figure copy or
Trim/Extend.

Command interrupts can be nested up to about 20 levels. Within this limit, commands can
be interrupted by others without terminating the original commands.
When an icon on a side menu is clicked, all interrupting commands are terminated
automatically, and the newly selected command is executed, even if the user does not
intend to terminate those commands.

• Returning to the previous prompt

If the current command displays more than one prompt area, clicking the Back button in a prompt
area or pressing the CTRL-BS keys returns you back to the previous prompt area (if any).

EXAMPLE
This function can be used with the command used to define a straight line
passing through two points. When you are prompted to enter the second point
after entering the first point, you may decide that you want to re-specify the first
point. In such a case, use this function.

2.2 FUNCTIONS PROVIDED BY SIDE MENU

2.2.1 Figure Creation

• Figure creation mode
The figure creation mode side menu enables the generation of the following figure entities.

Icon Function
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Point and plural points creation

Single point
• Start or end point of an entity
• Intersection/tangency point of two entities
• Mid-point of an entity
• Center of a circle/arc entity
• Existing point
• Grid point
• Free point

- 16 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 2.BASIC OPERATION

Linear plural points (with intervals specified)

Linear plural points (with a number of divisions specified)

Circular plural points (with intervals specified for the arc section)

Circular plural points (with the number of divisions specified for the arc section)

Circular plural points (with the number of divisions specified for the entire circumference)

Rectangular plural points

Grid plural points

Icon Function
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Point and plural points creation (continuation)

Random plural points

Add a point to random plural points

Insert a point into random plural points

Move a point among random plural points

Delete a point from random plural points

Determine random plural points

Select plural points as the target of operation

Plural points as nodes of a fitting curve

Icon Function
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Straight line creation

Horizontal line

Vertical line

Horizontal and vertical lines

Straight line passing through a specified point and having inclination a

Straight line tangential to a specified circle and having inclination a

- 17 -
2.BASIC OPERATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Straight line passing through two specified points

Straight line perpendicular bisector of a line segment between two specified points

Straight line passing through a specified point and parallel to a specified straight line

Straight line passing through a specified point and perpendicular to a specified straight
line

Straight line passing through a specified point and tangential to a specified circle

Straight line tangential to two specified circles

Straight line having a distance d from a specified straight line

Straight line bisecting an angle between two specified straight lines

Icon Function
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Circle creation

Circle having a specified point as its center and radius r

Circle having a specified point as its center and passing through a specified point

Circle having a specified point as its center and tangential to a specified entity

Circle of radius r, passing through a specified point, and tangential to a specified entity

Circle of radius r and passing through two specified points

Circle of radius r and tangential to two specified entities

Circle passing through three specified points

Circle tangential to three specified entities

Circle passing through a specified point and tangential to two specified entities

Circle passing through two specified points and tangential to a specified entity

Circle for which the difference in radius between the circle and a specified circle/arc is d

- 18 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 2.BASIC OPERATION
Icon Function
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Arc creation

Arc having a specified point as its center and radius r

Arc having a specified point as its center and passing through a specified point

Arc having a specified point as its center and tangential to a specified entity

Arc of radius r, passing through a specified point, and tangential to a specified entity

Arc of radius r and passing through two specified points

Arc of radius r and tangential to two specified entities

Arc passing through three specified points

Arc tangential to three specified entities

Arc tangential to a specified entity at the start point and another specified entity at the end
point, and passing through a specified point

Arc starting at a specified point and tangential to two specified entities

Arc starting at a specified point, ending at another specified point, and tangential to a
specified entity

Arc starting at a specified point, passing through another specified point, and tangential to
a specified entity

Arc for which the difference in radius between the arc and a specified arc is d

Arc for which the difference in radius between the arc and a specified circle is d

Icon Function
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Rectangle creation

Rectangle defined by diagonal two points

Rectangle having the specified horizontal and vertical widths, and inclination angle a

Icon Function
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Assemble Polyline/polygon

Line segment starting at a specified point and ending at another specified point
- 19 -
2.BASIC OPERATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Arc tangential to a previous entity at the start point

Arc passing through a specified point

Arc tangential to a specified entity

Arc of radius r and drawn counterclockwise

Arc of radius r and drawn clockwise

Determine as a polyline

Determine as a polygon (by closing the start and end points)

Create a polyline/polygon along other entities (trace mode)

Cut a line segment/arc at an intersection with another entity and determine as a polyline

Cut a line segment/arc at an arbitrary point and determine as a polyline

Select a polyline/polygon as a target of operation

Connect a polyline/polygon to another entity

Icon Function
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Fitting curve creation

Node addition

Node insertion

Node movement

Node deletion

Open fitting curve creation

Closed fitting curve creation

Select a fitting curve as a target of operation

Ellipse

- 20 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 2.BASIC OPERATION
Icon Function
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Involute gear creation and modification

Involute gear tooth creation

Involute gear tooth modification

Icon Function
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Machining figure creation

Basic figure creation

Straight/taper figure creation (Basic figure)

Smooth taper specification

Corner R specification

Corner R specification (All)

4-axis independent figure (Different shape patterns at top & bottom figure) creation

Basic figure creation

Specification of Synchronizing point

Cancellation of Synchronizing point

Cancellation of Synchronizing (All)

Die with relief figure creation

Die with relief figure creation (Basic figure)

Corner R specification

Corner R specification (All)

Icon Function
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Machining figure modification

- 21 -
2.BASIC OPERATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

2.2.2 Machining Instruction and NC Data Preparation

The machining instruction side menu includes the following functions.

Icon Function
━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━━

Set up information

Work coordinate system setting

Specifies a machining figure

Closed figure contouring

Open figure contouring

Batch processing of full circles

(Contouring/Coreless)

Clearance specification for each figure

Specifies cutting conditions

Cancels machining

Selects a cutting type

Prepares NC data

- 22 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 2.BASIC OPERATION

2.3 FUNCTIONS PROVIDED BY MENU BAR

2.3.1 File Menu

Menu item Function
New Cancels the figure and machining instruction data currently being
created and creates a new figure and machining instruction data.
Open Reads a figure and machining data from a file.
Save Saves the figure and machining instruction data currently being
created to a file.
Save As Specifies a file name and saves the figure and machining instruction
data currently being created to the specified file.
Zoom backward Step backward the window display by this function.
Can step back Maxq steps.
Clear Machining Data Cancels the machining data currently defined and defines new
machining data.
Import FANUC standard cutting Loads ROBOCUT machining conditions from external files such as a
conditions floppy disk.
This function is not provided for some machine types.
Exchange CAD Data Actives the CAD data exchange option.
• DXF-Input Accepts a DXF file.
• DXF-Output Outputs a DXF file.
• IGES-Input Accepts an IGES file.
• IGES-Output Outputs an IGES file.
Extract Machining Figure from NC data Extract Machining Figure from existing NC data
Print Out Outputs a figure and tool path to a printer.
Set Up Printer Sets conditions for figure output to a printer.
Plot Out Outputs a figure and tool path a plotter.
Set Up Plotter Sets conditions for figure output to a plotter.
Exit Terminates PC FAPT CUT i.

2.3.2 Modify Menu

Menu item Function
Trim/Extend Extends or trims an entity.
• Intersection Extends or trims an entity up to its intersection with a reference entity.
• Intersection - Modal Extends or trims multiple entities up to their intersections with a
reference entity in succession.
• Nearby Point Extends or trims an entity up to a selected point.
• Both Entities Extends or trims two entities up to their intersection.
• Both Ends Extends or trims the both ends of an entity up to its intersection with
two reference entities.
• Both Ends - Modal Extends or trims the both ends of multiple entities up to their
intersections with two reference entities in succession.
Erase Section Erases a specified section of an entity.
• 2 Positions Erases a section specified by two points from an entity.
• 2 Positions - Modal Erases a section specified by two points from multiple entities in
succession.
Break Divides an entity into multiple entities.
• Intersection Divides an entity at its intersection with a reference entity.
• Intersection - Modal Divides multiple entities at their intersections with a reference entity in
succession.

- 23 -
2.BASIC OPERATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Menu item Function

• Nearby Point Divides an entity at a selected point.
• Both Entities Divides an entity at a intersection with two reference entities .
• 2 Positions Divides an entity at two points.
• 2 Positions - Modal Divides multiple entities at two points in succession.
Round Rounds a corner.
Rounds Rounds all corners of a polygon or polyline at one time.
Outer Round Circle Rounds an outer corner.
Outer Round Circles Rounds all outer corners of a polygon or polyline at one time.
Chamfer Chamfers a corner.
Chamfers Chamfers all corners of a polygon or polyline at one time.
Erase Corner Entity Erases the specifications of corner R, outer round circle, or
chamfering.
Erase Corner Entities Erases the specifications of corner R, outer round circle, and
chamfering for all corners of a polygon or polyline.

2.3.3 Edit Menu

Menu item Function
Undo Restores the previously created, modified, or edited figure to its
previous state.
Redo Reproduces a figure restored by the Undo command to its previous
state.
Erase Erases the figure entity. Multiple entities can be selected and erased
at one time.
Erase - Modal Erases the figure entity one by one continuously.
Copy Copies the figure entities.
• Parallel-Positions Copies a figure to specified positions in parallel mode.
• Parallel - Distance Copies a figure to multiple positions at uniformly spaced intervals in
parallel mode.
• Parallel - Division No. Copies a figure in parallel mode to the multiple positions determined
by equally dividing the total distance
• Parallel - Position, Division No. Copies a figure in parallel mode to the multiple positions determined
by equally dividing the distance to a specified final copy destination.
• Rotate - Distance Copies a figure to each position determined by rotating the figure
repeatedly by the same angle.
• Rotate - Division No. Rotates and copies a figure to the positions determined by equally
dividing the angle to an end point.
• Mirror - Plane Specifies a mirror plane perpendicular to the drawing plane, then
produces the mirror image of the figure. The original figure is not
erased.
• Mirror - Position Specifies a mirror plane perpendicular to the drawing plane by
specifying a base position and copy destination, and produces the
mirror image of the figure. The original figure is not erased.
• Arbitrary Specifies a basic axis for the source and copy destination, and copies
a figure.
Move
• Parallel - Position Moves a figure to a specified position in parallel mode.
• Parallel - Distance Moves a figure by specified distance in parallel mode.
• Rotate Rotates a figure to a specified position.
• Mirror - Plane Specifies a mirror plane perpendicular to the drawing plane, then
produces the mirror image of the figure. The original figure is erased.
• Mirror - Position Produces the mirror image of a figure by specifying a mirror plane
perpendicular to the drawing plane and defining a reference position
and move destination. The original figure is erased.

- 24 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 2.BASIC OPERATION

Menu item Function

• Arbitrary Moves a figure by specifying basic axes for a source reference point
and a move destination reference point.
Reverse Reverses the entities(to view the backside).
• Keep Original Reverses and copies a figure.
• Erase Original Reverses and moves a figure.
• Assemble Polyline/Polygon Assembles the entities to a polyline/polygon.
• Disassemble Polyline/Polygon Disassembles a polyline/polygon to the entities.
Offset
• Keep Original Offsets the entire polyline or polygon. The original figure is not erased.
• Erase Original Offsets the entire polyline or polygon. The original figure is erased.
Offset of Part
• Keep Original Offsets part of a polyline or polygon. The original figure is not erased.
• Erase Original Offsets part of a polyline or polygon. The original figure is erased.
Offset - Closed figures
• Keep Original Offsets multiple polygons at a time. The original figure is not erased.
• Erase Original Offsets multiple polygons at a time. The original figure is erased.
Scale-Copy
• All axes Copies a figure while changing its size. The same scaling factor is
applied to the x-, y-, and z-axes.
• Each axis Copies a figure while changing its size. Different scaling factors are
applied to each of the x-, y-, and z-axes.
Scale-Move
• All axes Moves a figure while changing its size. The same scaling factor is
applied to the x-, y-, and z-axes.
• Each axis Moves a figure while changing its size. Different scaling factors are
applied to each of the x-, y-, and z-axes.

2.3.4 View Menu

Menu item Function
Rendering Window Makes a machining figure easier to see and understand. It also adds
reality to 3D animation display during creation of NC data.
Set View Direction Sets the direction of display or rotates the display.
Redraw Redraw a drawing window.
Zoom Redraws the currently selected window.
Auto Scale Redraws a drawing window with automatic scaling to enable the entire
figures to be displayed.
Double Enlarges a drawing window display by a factor of 2.
Half Reduces a drawing window display by a factor of 2.
Pan Moves a drawing window display in parallel mode.
Zoom backward Step backward the window display by this function.
Can step back Maxq steps.
Zoom forward Step forward the window display which was stepped by [Zoom
backward]
Check for duplicate entities Change over the mode of checking duplicated entities.
Drawing layer Turns the drawing layer display on and off.
Wire path layer Turns the indication of the wire path layer ON and OFF.
Measured Information Turns the measured information display on or off.

- 25 -
2.BASIC OPERATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

NOTE
1 Notes on checking overlapping entities
In check mode, the portions not overlapped are displayed in white when the
background color is black. The overlapped portions are displayed in a color
other than white.
Note that, however, when the number of entities overlapping with one another is
odd, the overlapped portion is displayed in white, so that portion appears not to
be overlapped.
When the background color is not black, the portions not overlapped are not
always displayed in a single color, which can make the overlap check difficult.
Therefore, it is recommended that the background color be set to black
(standard setting).
Even when figures do not actually overlap with each other, setting a certain
drawing magnification can cause these figures to be redrawn in the same
position as if they overlapped. In such a case, enlarge the display before
checking.
In check mode, entities are redrawn in different colors from the colors used when
these entities were created. Some entities may be displayed in the same color
as the background color, so they may be invisible. As soon as ending the
check, turn off check mode.
2 You can enlarge and reduce the currently selected drawing window display also
by using the scroll wheel of the mouse.

2.3.5 Window Menu

Menu item Function
Open a new window Opens a new drawing window.
Window x1 Creates a single window.
Window x2 Creates two windows that display figures in different ways.
Window x3 Creates three windows that display figures in different ways.
Window x4 Creates four windows that display figures in different ways.
Cascade display Arranges the drawing windows such that each overlaps the others
Tile display Arranges the drawing windows such that none overlaps any other.
Arrange icons Arranges iconized drawing windows at equal intervals.

2.3.6 Auxiliary Menu

Menu item Function
Drawing coordinate system Specifies the coordinate system (origin and direction) for figures to be
created.
Entity Information Displays information relating to figures (such as entity type, pen number,
and coordinates).
Set Individual Attributes Changes the entity attributes (such as the color and pen number) of a
figure.
Set Current Attributes Sets the entity attributes (such as the color and pen number) of a figure to
be prepared.
Measure Displays the measuring data(such as distance, angle, etc.) See chapter
15.
• Coordinates Measures the coordinates of start and end points of entities.
• Distance between two points Measures the distance between two points.

- 26 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 2.BASIC OPERATION

Menu item Function

• Distance between a point and an Measures the shortest distance between a point and a line segment or arc.
entity
• Circle/arc radius Measures the radius of a circle/arc.
• Angle between two lines Measures an angle made by two lines.
• Measured information Displays measured dimension information.
• Drawing mode Sets a standard for the size of a dimension, character, etc.
• Setting Sets the size of a dimension line, etc.
• Modify Modifies the created dimension figure.
Layer Enables the manipulation of those layers where figures are created.

2.3.7 Setting Menu

Menu item Function
Parameter Setting
• View Option Sets parameters related to displays, such as Axis Mark, Origin Mark, Grid,
and Cursor Tracking.
• Figure Operation Sets parameters related to figure creation, modification, and editing.
• Extract Machining Figure from NC data type is selected.
NC data
• Machining Instruction Sets parameters related to Machining Instruction.
• NC Data Preparation Sets the system behavior related to NC data preparation.
• Auto Saving Sets the parameters needed to automatically save existing figures and
machining definition data.
Standard Setting
• Involute Gear Creation Enables the setting of initial values on the dialog window for creating
involute gear tooth figures.
• Machining figure creation Enables the setting of initial values on the dialog window for creating
machining figures.
• Machining Instruction Enables the setting of initial values on the dialog window for Machining
Instruction.
• NC Data Preparation Enables the setting of initial values on the dialog window for NC data
preparation.
Tool Bar Setting for Customizes the tool bar.
Reset settings Returns settings to their defaults.
Environment Sets the storage location for each data file.
Setting for external application Setting for starting external application from PC FAPT CUT i.

2.3.8 Help Menu

Menu item Function
Contents and Keywords Finds an explanation using the table of contents or keywords.
How to Use Help Explains how to use help information.
About PC FAPT CUT i Displays PC FAPT CUT i version information.

- 27 -
3.PROGRAMMING OPERATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

3 PROGRAMMING OPERATION
This chapter describes the procedure for preparing NC data with PC FAPT CUT i.

3.1 PROCEDURE
PC FAPT CUT i is used according to the following procedure:
Figure creation

Figure creation

• Contour
• Fitting curve
• Involute gear

Machining figure creation

• Basic machining figure

• Taper specification
• Corner R specification

Machining instruction

Machining instruction

• Machine type selection

• Function selection
• Wire/work/nozzle setting
• Machining figure designation
• Cutting condition setting
• Cutting type selection

NC data preparation

The user can switch between figure creation and machining instruction at any time. So, if the user
notices a missing figure during machining definition, it is not necessary to restart from the beginning, thus
improving work efficiency.
The above information relating to figure creation and machining instruction is referred to as a program.
The program can be filed and saved to a hard or floppy disk. A file saved in this way is referred to as a
part file.
- 28 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 3.PROGRAMMING OPERATION

3.2 FIGURE CREATION

Create the contour figure using the figure creation functions available in the side menu.
The following describes how to create the contour figure shown below.
The origin of the X and Y axes is the bottom left of the figure.
The workpiece thickness is 10 mm, and the taper is facing downwards at an angle of 10°. These however
are described in "3.3 Machining Figure Creation."

Confirm that "Figure creation" has been selected, and click on (press) the "Rectangle" button

At this point, confirm that the secondary menu "Rectangle (2 diagonal points)" has been selected.
Now enter:
Start point: X = 0, Y = 0
Diagonal point: X = 30, Y = 60
Click on the "Auto scale" button on the tool bar. Select the menu "Modify => Rounds" then
enter 10. Clicking on a rectangle on the screen creates four corner Rs. Next, click on the "Circle"
button , and confirm that the secondary menu "Circle (center and radius)" has been selected.
Radius: 20
Center: X= 10, Y = 30
Now, remove all unnecessary portions from the contour figure. Click on the button .

- 29 -
3.PROGRAMMING OPERATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

5
3

Click on 1 and 2 as the first and second reference entities, then 3 as a modification entity. Likewise,
click on 4, 5, and 6.
Click on the "Auto scale" button .

3.3 MACHINING FIGURE CREATION

Let's create a machining figure having information such as plate thickness and taper angle, based on the
contour figure. Assume that the plate thickness is 10 mm and the taper spreads downwards at 10
degrees. We use two windows to display the profile three-dimensionally. Click on the button .

Click on the "Machining figure creation" button .

1
2

Click on a rectangle portion 1 and an arc portion 2 on the screen as figure entities. Then, click on the
"End (E)" button. All entities have to be selected one by one by the mouse. Or you can use other
entity selection mode like rectangle, etc.
In the lower section of the PC FAPT CUT i screen, the machining figure creation menu is displayed,
allowing us to specify the necessary items.
- 30 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 3.PROGRAMMING OPERATION

In this example, the Z coordinate of the program plane is set to 0 on the Z axis of the drawing coordinate
system. The specification also states that the thickness is 10mm.

Thickness = 10

Work Program plane = 0

Table

Apply the setting procedure described below.

Press the "Z value" button. Program plane must be set to 0, and the thickness to 10. As these
correspond to the default values, we only have to press the "OK" or cancel button to exit from the setting
screen.
Select "Wider at bottom" and set 10 degrees as taper angle.
Then press End button.

3.4 MACHINING INSTRUCTION

Click on the "Machining Instruction" button . At this point, we select a machine type, function,
and workpiece material/wire diameter. We also designate the machining figure and cutting conditions,
and select a cutting type.

3.4.1 Preparation Information

Click on the "Machine type selection" button .

(1) Machine type
Select the machine type.
(2) Function selection
AI corner control is selected as the default function to be used.
(3) Workpiece material, wire diameter and nozzle gap
A wire diameter of 0.2 mm and other default settings are selected.
The default settings may be used as these settings. So, click OK.

3.4.2 Machining Start Point Setting

Click on the "Machining Figure Specification" button , and confirm that has been selected.
Then, specify the machining start point by entering:
X = 15, Y = -10
Click on 1 as an approach entity. The interactive screen is displayed. Select the glue tab and escape
amount. If the default values can be used, simply press the return key.

- 31 -
3.PROGRAMMING OPERATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

1
3.4.3 Cutting Condition Setting

Click on the "Cutting condition setting" button to display the cutting condition setting screen.

Click the cutting condition search button and select a cutting condition. The details of the cutting
condition are displayed, and the speed, accuracy, and surface roughness in the lower left section of the
screen change. Clicking the "OK" button here determines the condition.

NOTE
Depending on the model, the configuration of the cutting condition setting screen
and the displayed items differ. Refer to Help for details.

3.4.4 Cutting Type Selection

Click on the "Cutting type selection" button to select the desired machining type. In our example,
we select punch (Punch/Finish then cut off).

- 32 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 3.PROGRAMMING OPERATION

3.5 NC DATA PREPARATION

Clicking on the "NC data preparation" button causes the NC data preparation screen to appear in
the lower section of the PC FAPT CUT i screen. Clicking on the "Start" button triggers NC data
preparation.

Upon the completion of NC data preparation, clicking on the "Execution list display" button
displays the NC data.

- 33 -
4.SAVING AND LOADING FILES FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

4 SAVING AND LOADING FILES

4.1 SAVING A FILE
Once figures and machining definitions have been prepared, they can be saved. To do this, select the
"File => Save As" command. Alternatively, click the Save As button on the tool bar, and specify
a destination drive as necessary.

4.2 LOADING A FILE

A saved file can be loaded. To do this, select the “File => Open” command. Alternatively, click the
File Open button on the tool bar, and select the required file.

- 34 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 5.CREATING A NEW PROGRAM

5 CREATING A NEW PROGRAM

When PC FAPT CUT i is activated, a new file is created automatically. This new file contains no part
figure, or machining instruction data. The file is assigned a temporary name (untitled). Thus, when
creating a new program, the user can start programming immediately, using this file.
To create a new program at any other time, select “File(F) => New(N)” command from the menu bar. To
create machining instruction data using only existing and part figure data, select “File(F) => Clear
Machining Data(C)”.
When the contents of a program to be created closely approximate those of an existing file, the user can
read the original file, then assign it a new name and store it under that name.

NOTE
When New or Clear Machining Data is executed, the file being manipulated at
that instant is discarded. If the program being manipulated has not yet been
saved, a prompt appears asking the user to specify whether the program should
be stored before initialization.

- 35 -
6.FIGURE CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

6 FIGURE CREATION
6.1 TYPES OF FIGURES
This section explains the types of figures that can be handled.

(1) Figure entities

The smallest graphics unit is called a figure entity. Figure entities include:
• Point
• Straight line
• Circle
• Arc
• Polyline
An open figure entity consisting of multiple connected arcs and straight lines with both ends of
the entity not connected.
• Polygon
A closed figure entity consisting of multiple connected arcs and straight lines.
• Fitting curve
A figure entity formed by connecting a series of points with arcs and straight lines smoothly.
• Involute gear
An Involute gear figure that is created by giving the technical data for the gear and the teeth.
• Machining figure
A figure that is represented 3-dimensionally by giving thickness, taper angle.

(2) Group
A group consists of multiple figure entities. At present, only a point group is defined as a group.
• Point group

6.2 SPECIFYING A RADIUS, DISTANCE, AND ANGLE

Enter values such as a radius, distance, and angle from the keyboard. An angle is positive in the
counterclockwise direction and negative in the clockwise direction, relative to the positive axis.

- 36 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 6.FIGURE CREATION

6.3 SPECIFYING POSITIONS

When figures are created, modified , and edited, the positions of figure entities, the positions of figure
intersections, or positions in a plane may have to be selected. Before specifying positions, select the
position specification mode by using the following buttons:
(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (i) (j) (k) (l) (m) (n)

(1) Specifying a coordinate system and dimensions

(a) Coordinate system and dimension
Specify one coordinate system and dimension from among the 2-dimensional drawing
coordinate system (2D), 3-dimensional drawing coordinate system (3D), and 3-dimensional
world coordinate system(3DW).
2D: X and Y coordinates are specified in the drawing coordinate system.
3D: X, Y, and Z coordinates are specified in the drawing coordinate system.
3DW: X, Y, and Z coordinates are specified in the world coordinate system.
For details of the coordinate systems, see Section Coordinate system.

(2) Coordinate specification method

(b) Cartesian coordinates
Specify a position by inputting the X and Y coordinates.
(c) Polar coordinates (reference point is fixed)
Specify a position by means of the distance from the fixed reference point and the angle, which
indicates the direction.
(d) Polar coordinates (reference point is updated automatically)
Specify a position by means of the distance from the position input immediately before and the
angle, which indicates the direction.
(e) Origin of the polar coordinate system
Set the origin of the polar coordinates system.

(3) Specifying a location with the mouse

(f) Start point or end point of an entity
Click on a point near the start point or end point of an entity to select the start point or end
point.
(g) Intersection of a figure
Click on a point near an intersection to select it.
(h) Intersection of two figure entities
Click on a point near each of two figure entities to select the intersection of the two figure
entities. The intersection of the extended lines of two entities can also be selected.
(i) Midpoint of an entity
Click on a point near an entity to select its middle point. The middle point is determined as
follows:
• Line segment: Midpoint of the line segment
• Circle: Center of the circle
• Arc: Middle point on the circumference of the arc
• Others: Middle point of one of the entities constituting the target entity
(j) Center of a circle or arc
Click on a point near a circle or arc to select the center of the circle or arc.
(k) 4 points on periphery
Click near the four points on the periphery with the mouse button to select.
- 37 -
6.FIGURE CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(l) Already entered point or point group

Click on a point near an already entered point or point group to select it.
(m) Grid display point
Click on a point near a grid display point to select it.
(n) Position of the mouse pointer in the window
Click on a desired point in the drawing window to select the mouse pointer position.

6.4 SELECTING ENTITIES

To select an entity, click the corresponding position.
When an entity is selected, figure search processing is performed in figure type order (point to straight
line to circle to arc ...). When entities are close together, a desired entity sometimes cannot be selected. In
such a case, the figure search direction switch button displayed in the status window can be clicked to
reverse the search order.
To select more than one entity, the user can select them one-by-one, by clicking them with the mouse.
Alternatively, the user can specify a rectangle and select all the entities in that rectangle. Or, a particular
entity in the rectangle can be excluded.
The method of selecting entities can be set using the entity select mode, as follows.

(a) Select/Deselect
Whether an entity is to be selected or deselected is indicated.
(b) Entities nearby the mouse pointer
An entity is selected by moving mouse pointer close to the entity and pressing mouse button.
(c) Entities inside a rectangle
All entities inside a rectangle are selected. select entities by dragging diagonal corners of the
rectangle to indicate the range of selection.
(d) Entities inside a rectangle and entities touching the rectangle frame
All entities inside a rectangle and all entities that touch the rectangle frame are selected. Select
entities by dragging diagonal corners of the rectangle to indicate the range of selection.
(e) Entities outside a rectangle
All figures that are located entities outside a rectangle are selected. Select elements by dragging
diagonal corners of the rectangle to indicate the range of selection.
(f) Entities outside a rectangle and entities touching the rectangle frame
All entities that are located outside a rectangle and entities that touch the rectangle frame are selected.
Select elements by dragging diagonal corners of the rectangle to indicate the range of selection.
(g) All entities displayed in a window
All entities displayed in a window are selected. Click on an arbitrary point in a target window to
select all elements in the window.

NOTE
When a dimension line is selected with "Entities inside a rectangle", the entire
dimension line can be selected by specifying a rectangle including a dimension
value or the start point of the extension line.

- 38 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 6.FIGURE CREATION

6.5 COORDINATE SYSTEM

This section explains two coordinate systems: the world coordinate system and drawing coordinate
system.

6.5.1 World Coordinate System

Created figures and tool paths are stored in a dedicated three-dimensional database. These data items are
managed using a unique coordinate system which is used as a base coordinate system to indicate all
positions. This absolute coordinate system is called the world coordinate system.
Normally, parts or other structures have one point that is used as a reference point for the entire structure.
Placing this reference point at the origin of the world coordinate system streamlines figure creation and
other processing.

6.5.2 Drawing Coordinate System

If a machine or structure consists of multiple parts, each component(part) will have its own reference
position. When creating a profile for such a structure, shifting the coordinate system origin to the
reference position of each component will make it easy to input coordinates.
PC FAPT offers a drawing coordinate system to enable the flexible setting of a coordinate system for the
purpose mentioned above.
A drawing coordinate system can be set to any location in the world coordinate system, using the
commands in the “Auxiliary => Drawing coordinate system” menu on the menu bar.

6.6 LAYER
Layers are used to make it easy to view, arrange, and confirm complicated machining figures and their
draft lines.
A set of layers can be compared to a set of transparent sheets; layers corresponds to sheets on a
one-to-one basis.
Changing the setting of a layer(sheet) on which a drawing is created or displayed enables you to either
view an image of the entire product, or to examine a part in detail.

6.6.1 Layer Categories

Layers are roughly categorized into the following two types, according to the way in which they are used.
• Drawing layers: These layers are used to create figures. There are 256 layers in this category.
For more information, see Chapter 8, “MACHINING FIGURE CREATION.” Whether all the
drawing layers are to be displayed or hidden can be selected using the “Display => NC data creation
layer” command.
• Wire path layer: This layer is used to display the wire path while preparing the NC data. It
cannot be used to create figures. Whether the Wire path layer is to be displayed or hidden is
switched automatically when NC data preparation is started or stopped, or upon executing the “View
=> Wire path layer” commands.

6.6.2 Setting Drawing Layers

Drawing layers can be specified for the following item by using the “Auxiliary => Layer => Setting”
command on the menu bar. The “Layer set” button on the standard tool bar can also be used for
the same purpose.

- 39 -
6.FIGURE CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

• Drawing: Specifies the layer number with which a figure will be registered. No more than one layer
number can be specified. A layer number can also be specified in the status window in the lower
right section of the PC FAPT window.
• Display: Specifies the layer from which a figure is to be displayed on the screen. The specified
layers can be overlapped so that the figures on these layers also overlap one another. Figures on
hidden layers are not subject to entity selection.
• Recognition: Specifies whether figures(including those displayed) are to be subject to entity
selection. If “Do not recognize” is specified, figures(even if displayed) will not be subject to entity
selection.
• Layer name: Enables the arbitrary naming of a layer.Moving and copying figures from one layer to
another

A figure is first created on one of the 256 layers. It can subsequently be moved or copied to another layer
by using the “Move between layers” or “Copy between layers” command in the “Auxiliary => Layer”
menu on the menu bar.

6.7 MODIFYING FIGURES BY EXTENSION/TRIMMING

A figure can be modified by trimming unnecessary parts of figure entities such as unnecessary draft lines
and by extending parts of figure entities to specified position.

(a)Trimming (b)Trimming (c)Trimming (d)Trimming

(a)Extension (b)Extension (c)Extension (d)Extension

Using the above figures as examples, modifying figures by selecting “Modify=>Trim/Extend” from the
menu is described below. The operations for extension and trimming are the same in the examples below.

(a) Extending/trimming a figure entities up to an intersection

1) Select “Modify => Trim/Extend => Intersection” from the menu.
2) Select point 1 and point 2 in this order.
(b) Extending/trimming a figure entities up to a nearby point
1) Select “Modify => Trim/Extend => Nearby Point” from the menu.
2) Select point 1 and point 2 in this order.
(c) Extending/trimming two figure entities up to the intersection of the entities
1) Select “Modify => Trim/Extend => Both Entities” from the menu.
2) Select point 1 and point 2 in this order.
(d) Extending/trimming both ends of figure entities
1) Select “Modify => Trim/Extend => Both Ends” from the menu
2) Select point 1, point 2, and point 3 in this order.

- 40 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 6.FIGURE CREATION

6.8 COPYING FIGURES

A figure can be copied in many different ways.
(a) Parallel-Positions
A figure can be copied to specified multiple positions in parallel mode.
1) Select “Edit => Copy => Parallel-Positions” from the menu.
2) Select point 1 to specify the figure to be copied, then select the End button.
3) Select point 1 to specify the reference point of the figure to be copied.
4) Select point 2 and point 3 as copy destinations, then select the End button.
5) Press the ESC button.

(b) Parallel-Distance
A figure can be copied to the multiple positions at uniformly spaced intervals in parallel mode.
1) Select “Edit => Copy => Parallel-Distance” from the menu.
2) Select point 1 to specify the figure to be copied, then select the End button.
3) Enter 15 and -15 to specify space interval values DZ and DY, respectively.
4) Enter 2 to specify the number of copy destinations.
5) Press the ESC button.

(c) Parallel-Division No.

A figure can be copied in parallel mode to the multiple positions determined by equally dividing the
total copy distance.
1) Select “Edit => Copy => Parallel-Division No.” from the menu
2) Select point 1 to specify the figure to be copied, then select the End button.
3) Enter 30 and -30 to specify maximum copy distance values DZ and DX, respectively.
4) Enter 2 to specify the number of copy destinations.
5) Press the ESC button.

- 41 -
6.FIGURE CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(d) Parallel-Position, Division No.

A figure can be copied in parallel mode to multiple positions determined by equally dividing the
distance to a specified final copy destination.
1) Select “Edit => Copy => Parallel-Position, Division No.” from the menu.
2) Select point 1 to specify the figure to be copied, then select the End button.
3) Select point 1 to specify the reference point of the figure to be copied.
4) Select point 2 to specify the final copy destination.
5) Enter 2 to specify the number of copy destinations.
6) Press the ESC button.

(e) Rotate-Distance
A figure can be copied to positions determined by rotating the figure repeatedly by the same angle.
1) Select “Edit => Copy => Rotate-Distance” from the menu.
2) Select point 1 to specify the figure to be copied, then select the End button.
3) Select point 2 to specify the center of rotation.
4) Enter 60 to specify the angle of rotation.
5) Enter 2 to specify the number of copy destinations.
6) Press the ESC button.

- 42 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 6.FIGURE CREATION

(f) Rotate-Division No.

A figure can be copied to positions determined by equally dividing a specified total angle of
rotation.
1) Select “Edit => Copy => Rotate-Division No” from the menu.
2) Select point 1 to specify the figure to be copied, then select the End button.
3) Select point 2 to specify the center of rotation.
4) Enter 120 as the total angle of rotation.
5) Enter 2 to specify the number of copy destinations.
6) Press the ESC button.

(g) Mirror-Plane
The mirror image of a figure can be produced by specifying two points to define a mirror plane
perpendicular to the drawing plane.
1) Select “Edit => Copy => Mirror-Plane” from the menu.
2) Select point 1 to specify the figure to be copied, then select the end button.
3) Select point 2 and point 3 to specify the mirror plane.
4) Select the ESC button.

(h) Mirror-Position
The mirror images of a figure can be produced by defining a reference point and copy destination to
specify a mirror plane perpendicular to the drawing plane.
1) Select “Edit => Copy => Mirror-Position” from the menu.

- 43 -
6.FIGURE CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

2) Select point 1 to specify the figure to be copied, then select the End button.
3) Select point 1 to specify the reference point of the figure to be copied.
4) Select point 2 to specify the copy destination.
5) Select the ESC button.

(i) Arbitrary
A figure can be copied by specifying a copy source reference point and the directions of two
associated orthogonal axes and a copy destination reference point and the directions of two
associated orthogonal axes.
1) Select “Edit => Copy => Arbitrary” from the menu.
2) Select point 1 to specify the figure to be copied, then select the End button.
3) Select point 1 to specify the reference point of the figure to be copied.
4) Select point 3 and point 4 to define the directions of the first axis and second axis.
5) select point 5 to specify the reference point of the copy destination.
6) Select point 6 and 7 to define the directions of the first axis and second axis.
7) Press the ESC button

- 44 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 6.FIGURE CREATION

6.9 CREATING POLYGONS

A polygon can be created by combining multiple entities.

(a) (b)

This section explains how to create the polygon in (a) above from the figure in (b) above.
1) Create figure in (b) with a rectangle and two lines.
2) Select the icon for polygon from the side menu.

3) Select the icon for Trace from the side menu.

4) Select start point P1.
5) Select the polygon entities P2, P3, P4, P5, P6, P7, and P2 in this order.
6) Select “Edit => Erase” from the menu.
7) Select P8, P9, and P10. Then, select the End button.
8) Select “View => Redraw” from the menu.

NOTE
It is possible to connect entities by “Assemble Polyline/Polygon” on Edit menu.
See 6.12 “Assemble Polyline/Polygon” for details.

6.10 FITTING CURVE

6.10.1 Creation Method of a Fitting Curve

A smooth curve that passes through a series of points is called a fitting curve. A fitting curve consists of
a series of tangent arcs. When three consecutive points lie on the same straight line, they can be
connected by a straight line. Generally, one section (between two adjacent points) is connected by two
arcs. When there is an inflection point within a section, the section is connected with four arcs.

- 45 -
6.FIGURE CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

6.10.2 Adjusting the Creation Method of a Fitting Curve

Normally, the method of creating a fitting curve need not be adjusted. When necessary, however, the
method of creating a fitting curve can be adjusted by changing the three parameters explained below.
To adjust the creation method, modify the Fig_FcvCvdg parameter registered in the initialization file (the
standard initialization file is pcfaptcu.ini) in the same folder as that in which PC FAPT CUT i is installed,
then restart PC FAPT CUT i. By changing this parameter setting, the screen for setting the parameters is
displayed each time a fitting curve is created:
Fig_FcvCvdg=FALSE => Fig_FcvCvdg=TRUE

(1) Dumping constant

The dumping constant parameter is used for adjusting a section which has no inflection point and
which is connected by two arcs.
When the arcs for such a section are obtained, a tangent vector is obtained at each end point first.
Then, an arc tangent to each tangent vector is obtained. The fitting curve can be adjusted by using
the dumping constant to correct the tangent vector at the end point, as shown in the figure below.
When the dumping constant is set to 100, no adjustment is made.
When the dumping constant is set to a value other than 100, a different fitting curve will be obtained
from the same series of points, depending on whether the creation order is reversed. Therefore, the
dumping constant should be used carefully.
A value between 0 and 100 can be set as the dumping constant. The initial value is 100.

(2) Movement rate of inflection point

The movement rate of inflection point parameter is used to adjust the position of the inflection point
when a section contains an inflection point.
An inflection point is the intersection of the inflection point vector and the perpendicular bisector of
the straight line connecting the start and end points.
As the value of this parameter is reduced, the position of the inflection point approaches nearer to
the midpoint of the start and end points.
The inflection point vector is obtained as follows:

- 46 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 6.FIGURE CREATION
A1: Angle between the start point tangent vector and the straight line
connecting the start and end points
A2: Angle between the end point tangent vector and the straight line connecting the start and end
points
Ap: Angle between the inflection point vector and the straight line connecting the start and end
points
A1 - A2
Ap = ----------- x ( Movement rate of inflection point) / 100
2
A value between 0 and 100 can be set. The initial value is 75.

(3) Tolerance for section judgment

This parameter is used to determine a straight line section.
When the angle formed by three consecutive points is equal to or less than the value specified for
this parameter, the sections corresponding to those three points are recognized as being a straight
line. The units are radians.
The default is 0.000572958 degrees (0.00001 radian).

6.11 OFFSET
A figure can be created by shifting a polyline/polygon, either entirely or partly, through a specified
distance. This function is called the offset function.
To execute this function, select Edit => Offset, or Edit => Offset of part.
The following sections explain the use of the offset function to shift a corner both out and in.

6.11.1 Outward Offset for a Corner

When outward offset is applied to a corner, the corner entities will be separated from each other. Each
entity must be extended in order to reconnect them. By default, PC FAPT CUT i extends the offset
entities when outward offset is applied. If it is impossible to reconnect them simply by extending them,
a corner interpolation mode is used. There are four interpolation modes. The desired mode is selected
by responding to the corner interpolation prompt which appears in the prompt area when Edit => Offset
or Edit => Offset of Part is selected.

(1) Segment/OFF
When this mode is selected, entities are extended by a straight line to connect them. When the
original entity is a straight line, it is simply extended directly. When the original entity is an arc, a
straight line tangent to the arc is extended.

(2) Segment/Tolerance
In this mode, the Length of Corner cut position, set when Setting => Parameter Setting => Figure
Operation is selected, is referenced.

- 47 -
6.FIGURE CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Basically, the operation performed in this mode is almost the same as that performed in
Segment/OFF mode. In this mode, however, when the distance from the vertex of the original
corner to the vertex of the new corner obtained by the offset operation exceeds the value set for
Length to Chamfering position, each entity is extended with a straight line by an amount equal to the
offset. Then, both ends are connected with a straight line. This operation is called chamfering.

(3) Segment/Auto
In this mode, the corner angle is referenced.
When the corner angle is smaller than 90 , chamfering is performed in the same way as explained
above.
When the corner angle is equal to or greater than 90 , the operation performed is the same as that
performed in Segment/OFF mode.

(4) Arc
In this mode, the entities are connected by an arc having a radius equal to the specified offset.

6.11.2 Inward Offset for a Corner

When inward offset is performed for a corner, the figure entities obtained by performing offset may cross
other entities, or the positional relationship between entities may differ from the original figure. Such
conditions are referred to as interference.

- 48 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 6.FIGURE CREATION

The operation performed in the case of interference is determined according to the setting of the When
Interfering item, which appears when Setting = Parameter Setting => Figure Operation is selected.
If "The interfered element is not removed." is selected, the offset figure is created with the interference
left as is.
If "The interfered element is removed." is selected, the interference is first removed, then the figure is
created. If removing the interference causes the figure to disappear, as in the case of Example 1 above,
an error occurs.
By default, "The interfered element is removed." is set.

6.12 ASSEMBLE POLYLINE/POLYGON

(1) Re-calculation of intersections
Combines multiple figures to form a Polyline/Polygon.
When using this function, execute [Re-connect] or not can be selected.
When utilizing CAD data, for example, in case that two entities are crossed or separated, there is a
possibility of Re-connecting these entities by re-calculating the intersections.

With the standard settings, when adjacent entities cross or when adjacent entities are separate but
can be crossed or connected if they are extended as shown in Figs. 1 through 3, they can be
connected by re-calculating the intersections.
If the distance of “ “ is within the setting of “Continuity tolerance”, it is possible to
re-connect.

- 49 -
6.FIGURE CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Extra portion will be Two entities will be Both entities will be

removed and extended and extended and
re-connected. re-connected. re-connected.
Fig. 1 Fig. 2 Fig. 3

It is not possible to re-connect when the two entities won’t be connected by extending them as in Fig.
4.

Cannot be re-connected
by extending the entities.
Fig. 4

If the option of "Connection by entity correction" is used, there is a possibility that the entities
shown in Fig. 4 can also be connected.
If distance d between the end points of adjacent entities is shorter than the "Continuity tolerance"
and distance t is shorter than the "Maximum shift amount" the entities can be connected after
corrected.
Normally, the entities are corrected so that a new intersection is placed at the middle point between
the end points of the entities.

When a straight line and an arc are connected, and the straight line is horizontal or vertical, only the
arc is corrected.
t

- 50 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 6.FIGURE CREATION

NOTE
1 The standard setting of the "Continuity tolerance" is 0.01 mm (0.0005 inch).
When "Re-connect" is not performed, system standard tolerance 0.0001 mm
(0.00001 inch) is used for determining connection.
When the "Continuity tolerance" setting is large (0.1 mm or 0.005 inch or more),
the system first searches for a connectable entity by using the standard setting of
the "Continuity tolerance" to prevent connection to a non-adjacent entity where
possible. If a connectable entity cannot be found, the system uses the set value
to search for an entity again.
2 The standard setting of the option of "Connection by entity correction" is "No
use".
3 The standard setting of the "Maximum shift amount" is 0.01 mm (0.0005 inch).
When "Re-connect" is not performed, the system standard tolerance, 0.0001
mm (0.00001 inch), is used as the Maximum shift amount.
4 If a too large "Continuity tolerance" value is set, a connection to an entity that
should not be connected may result.
5 When "Use" is specified for the option of "Connection by entity correction", an
original figure is corrected automatically if the presence of an error is determined.
Therefore, if a too large "Continuity tolerance" is set, there is a possibility that the
necessary dimensional accuracy cannot be obtained. So, this option should be
used very carefully.
The system standard tolerance, 0.0001 mm (0.00001 inch), is always used to
determine the presence of an error.
6 When "No use" is specified for the option of "Connection by entity correction",
using a relatively large "Continuity tolerance" value does not lead to a forced
connection with low accuracy. In this case, modify the figure manually as
necessary.

(2) Overlapping entities

When CAD data is used, an input figure may appear to be just one line though entities actually
overlap partly or entirely.
In " Assemble Polyline/polygon " and "machining figure creation", on the other hand, entities of
which end points match are connected as a continuous figure. Therefore, the presence of
overlapping entities may adversely affect the figure creation.

When the option of "Connection of partly overlapping entities" is used, entities that partly overlap
with each other can be connected.

A A
B C B C

When the option of "Neglect overlapping entities" is used, overlapping entities with the same size
(the both ends of an entity match those of the other entity) can be ignored.
As shown in Example 2, even when the entity to be connected is short, it is ignored if the end points
of the entities match.

- 51 -
6.FIGURE CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Example 1
A C A C
B B
B’ B’
Even when A, B, and C are to be When this option is used,
connected in this order, A, B, and overlapping entity B' is ignored,
B' are connected if overlapping and connection to entity C can
entity B' is found prior to entity C. be made.

Example 2
B B
B’ B’
When entities A and C in the When this option is used, the
previous example are not overlapping entity B' is
present, B and B' are ignored, and only B is
connected as a closed figure recognized as an open figure.
with area 0.

NOTE
1 The standard setting of the option of "Connection of partly overlapping entities"
is "No use".
2 The standard setting of the option of "Neglect over lapping entities" is "Use".
3 When partly overlapping entities are connected, connection of the end points
takes priority because some overlapping entities like entities B and C in the
following figure should not be connected:

A A
D
B C B C

4 When one entity is located inside the other entity (the end points do not match)
as shown in the figure below, the system does not perform special processing.
When such entities are selected at the time of " Assemble Polyline/polygon " or
machining figure creation, they are created as separate figures.

- 52 -
 7.INVOLUTE GEAR
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i FIGURE CREATION

7 INVOLUTE GEAR FIGURE CREATION

7.1 OPERATING PROCEDURE
To create an involute gear, follow the procedure below.
(1) Select the involute gear icon from the side menu for figure creation.

(2) To create or modify an involute gear, perform the following steps.

(a) Creating an involute gear
<1> Select the involute gear creation icon .
<2> Specify the center of the gear.
<3> When the conversational window appears, specify the technical data for the gear and its teeth.
For some items, an initial value is displayed in the dialog window. These initial values can be
changed using the "Involute Gear Creation" item in the "Setting => Standard setting" menu of
the menu bar.
(b) Modifying an involute gear
<1> Select the involute gear modification icon .
<2> Using the mouse, select a gear to be modified from the drawing window.
<3> When the conversational window appears, specify the technical data for the gear and its teeth.
(c) Modifying the position of a gear
To modify the position of a gear, use the "Edit => Move" item on the menu bar.

7.2 CREATING A GEAR

The involute gear figure creation window consists of the "Tooth definition" and "Gear definition" pages.
Using the "Draw" button enables the figure of the gear to be confirmed in advance without having to exit
from the conversational window. After confirming the figure, click the "OK" button.

7.2.1 Tooth Definition

(1) Externally- and internally-toothed gear
Specify whether an externally- or internally-toothed gear is to be created.
(2) How to indicate the gear tooth size
• Select "Module" or "Diametral pitch," then set a value (positive real number).
- 53 -
7.INVOLUTE GEAR
FIGURE CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

• Usually, the input units (inch/metric) are not displayed. The units are displayed and can be
specified once diametral pitch has been selected.
(3) Addendum modification coefficient
• Select "Direct," "Displacement over teeth," or "Over-pin dimension".
• If "Direct" is selected, specify an addendum modification coefficient directly (using a real
number). Initially, "Direct" is selected, and the initial value is 0.
• If " Displacement over teeth " is selected, the "Displacement" and "Number of teeth" setting
items appear. Specify a value for each of these items using a positive real number and
positive integer, respectively.
• If the "Over-pin dimension" is specified, the "Over-pin dimension" and "Pin diameter" setting
items appear. Specify values for these using positive real numbers.
• Once all the required items have been specified for the addendum modification coefficient, the
coefficient is calculated automatically then displayed, provided "Displacement over teeth" and
"Over-pin dimension" have been specified.
(4) Number of teeth
• Specify the total number of teeth.
• Usually, the number of teeth is a positive integer, but it can also be specified as a real number,
that is, a number with decimal places. If a real number is specified, however, an alarm is
displayed. If "Over-pin dimension" is selected when setting an addendum modification
coefficient, it must be specified as a positive integer.
(5) Cutter pressure angle
• The cutter pressure angle (α) must satisfy the following:
0 degrees < α < 90 degrees.
• The initial value is 20 degrees. This can be changed using the "Default value setting" item.
(6) Clearance coefficient
• Specify the clearance coefficient using a real number.
• The initial value is 0.25. This can be changed using the "Default value setting" item.
(7) Backlash
• Specify the amount of backlash using a real number.
• The initial value is 0. This can be changed using the "Default value setting" item.

7.2.2 Gear Definitions

(1) Major diameter
Specify the Major diameter, using a positive real number.
(2) Minor diameter
• Usually, a check mark is placed against the "Auto" item, and the Minor diameter is determined
automatically.
• If a check mark is placed against the "Auto" item, input is not possible. To specify a Minor
diameter manually, therefore clear the check mark, then specify the diameter as a positive real
number.
• Whenever a check mark is placed against "Auto", the Minor diameter is determined
automatically.
• The initial value of the Minor diameter is determined automatically if no value has been
specified, even if a check mark is not placed against "Auto."
(3) Rounding/chamfering
• Specify the amount of rounding or chamfering for the Major and Minor circles, using 0 or a
positive real number, as required.
• The initial value is 0, and can be changed using the "Standard setting" item.
(4) Direction of rotation
Specify the direction of rotation to be used when creating a tooth figure.
(5) Totally- or partially-toothed gear
Specify whether to create teeth over the entire periphery of the gear or only part of the periphery.
- 54 -
 7.INVOLUTE GEAR
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i FIGURE CREATION

(6) Specifying the start position

• Specify either the "Tip" or "Root" in the combo box.
• Set the start point using an angle. The initial value of the angle is 0, that is, the positive
direction of the first axis of the drawing coordinate system. It can be changed using the
"Default value setting" item.
(7) Specifying the end position
• Select either the "Tip" or "Root" in the combo box.
• Select either the "Rotation Angle" or "Number of teeth" in the combo box.
• Specify the angle using a value greater than zero but less than or equal to 360, and the number
of teeth using a positive integer.

7.2.3 Auxiliary
Number of involute gear nodes
The precision of the involute circle depends on the number of nodes between the base circle and
addendum circle. Eight nodes are used by default. So, change the number of nodes according to the
required precision.
The default number of nodes can be changed using the "Involute gear" item on the "Set=>Standard
setting" menu on the menu bar.

7.2.4 Confirming the Gear

• The "Draw" button can be used to confirm the figure of the gear in advance without exiting from the
conversational window.
• If any required item has not been specified, clicking the "Draw" button will result in an error.
• Clicking the "Draw" button iconizes the conversational window to enable the viewing of the figures
in the drawing window.
• Clicking the "OK" button restores the conversational window to its normal size.

7.3 MODIFYING GEARS

7.3.1 Selecting Gears to be Modified

• Select the involute gear modification icon.
• Using the mouse, select the gear to be modified from the drawing window.

7.3.2 Modifying a Gear and Its Teeth

• Once the conversational window appears, modify the technical data for the gear and its teeth.
• Clicking the "Draw" button allows the figure of the gear to be confirmed without having to exit from
the conversational window.

7.3.3 Modifying the Position of a Gear

To change the position of a gear, use the "Edit => Move" items on the menu bar.

7.3.4 Performing Modification after "Move/Copy"

When modifying an involute gear that has been transformed using a move/copy/reverse/scale command,
specify data such as dimensions and angles for the original figure. The original figure is modified
according to the specified data, then transformed in the same way as before.
- 55 -
7.INVOLUTE GEAR
FIGURE CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

7.4 CAUTIONS ON USING THE "MODIFY/EDIT" MENU

COMMANDS
When an involute gear figure is modified or edited using the "Modify/Edit" command, the type and
nature of the figure entities may be changed by the command. This is explained in detail below.

7.4.1 "Modify" Menu Commands (Which Do Not Change The Nature

of an Involute Gear)
The "Modify" menu commands do not change the nature of an involute gear. The modification
functions can be applied only to an involute gear that has neither been extended nor contracted. In other
words, modification such as extension or contraction performed using the "Modify" command is
canceled.

7.4.2 "Edit" Menu Commands

(1) "Edit" menu commands that do not change the nature of the involute gear
The following commands do not change the nature of an involute gear.
• Move
• Copy
• Reverse
• Scale

(2) "Edit" menu commands that change the nature of an involute gear
The following "Edit" menu commands affect the nature of an involute gear, changing it to a
polygonal line or a polygon. Therefore, the involute gear modification function is disabled.
• Polygonal line/polygon creation (*Note)
• Offset

NOTE
If the polygonal line/polygon creation command is executed for an involute gear
figure that is combined with another figure, it is changed to a polygonal
line/polygon. If the command is executed for an involute gear figure alone, it
has no effect.

- 56 -
 8.MACHINING FIGURE
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i CREATION

8 MACHINING FIGURE CREATION

8.1 OPERATING PROCEDURE
To create a machining figure creation, follow the procedure below.

1. Select the machining figure creation icon from the machining figure creation side menu.

2. To create or modify a machining figure, follow the steps below.

8.1.1 Creation
To create a machining figure, follow the steps below.

(1) Straight/taper figures

1. Select the machining figure creation icon .
2. Select the figure corresponding to the contour of the target machining figure. The figure should have
been prepared in advance.
3. When a dialog window appears, enter data such as the program plane and plate thickness of the
machining figure. Also, specify the required amount of taper. At this point, clicking the [End]
button causes the basic machining figure to be created.
4. Select the following icons from the side menu and specify a corner R and smooth taper, as required.
Specifies a corner R (Each)
Specifies a corner R (All)
Specifies a smooth taper

(2) 4-axis independent figures (Different shape patterns at tap & bottom figure)

1. Select the icon corresponding to 4-axis independent figures .

2. Select figures indicating the target top and bottom contours. The figures should have been
prepared in advance.
3. When a dialog window appears, enter data such as the program plane, top, and bottom planes. At
this point, clicking the [End] button causes the fundamental machining figure to be created.

- 57 -
8.MACHINING FIGURE
CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

4. Select the following icons from the side menu. Specify or cancel the top and bottom surface
correspondence points, as required.
Specifies top and bottom contours synchronizing points.
Cancels a synchronizing entity specification.
Cancels synchronizing entity specifications (All).

(3) Die with relief figures

1. Select the machining figure creation icon .
2. Select the figure indicating the contour of the target machining figure. The figure should have been
prepared in advance.
3. When a dialog window appears, enter data such as the top and bottom planes, land thickness, and
taper amount.
At this point, clicking the [End] button causes the fundamental machining figure to be created.
4. Select the following icons from the side menu to specify a corner R or smooth taper, as required.
Specifies a corner R (Each)
Specifies a corner R (All)

8.1.2 Modification
To modify a machining figure, follow the steps below.
1. Select the machining figure modification icon .
2. Using the mouse, select the machining figure to be modified from the drawing window.
3. When a dialog window appears, modify the data for the necessary items.

8.2 CREATING CONTOURS

Before a machining figure can be created, it is necessary to create contours using figure entities such as
straight lines, arcs, and involute gears. The contours of a straight/taper machining figure and a die with
relief figure must be in a plane parallel to the XY plane of the drawing coordinate system. For a 4-axis
independent shape, the contours of the top and bottom planes may be in a plane at an angle to the XY
plane.

NOTE
The end points of adjacent entities fundamental to machining figure creation
must coincide with each other. There is no restriction on the sequence in which
Each entities are created, however. They merely have to be in a row as one
contour.

HINT
For other than die with relief figures, the contour of a machining figure can be
either closed or open.
Machining can be specified in such a way that only part of a machining figure
defined here is created.

- 58 -
 8.MACHINING FIGURE
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i CREATION

8.3 CREATING A MACHINING FIGURE

A machining figure is created by first selecting a previously created contour and then specifying a plate
thickness and taper.

8.3.1 Selecting Contours

1. Select a set of entities created as a contour.
- For straight/taper figures and die with relief figures, more than one contour can be selected at a
time.
- For 4-axis independent figures, a contour must be selected for each figure to be created.
2. Select whether to execute [Re-connect]. If you want to re-connect contour entities by
re-calculation, select the "Yes".
This method is useful if contour entities of CAD data do not meet accurately.
When executing re-connection, be sure to check a value specified as "Continuity Tolerance] selected
from Parameter Setting => Figure Operation => Polyline/Polygon.
3. A dialog window for machining figure creation appears. Enter data such as a plate thickness and
taper in the dialog window.

NOTE
It is also possible to connect entities beforehand by “Assemble Polyline/Polygon”
on Edit menu. See Chapter 6 Figure creation, “Assemble Polyline/Polygon” for
details.

8.3.2 Setting Data

Specify the data necessary for the target machining figure.

(1) Straight/taper figures

a) Name
Specify the name of the target machining figure. This can double as a comment that will later
remind the user of the purpose of the machining profile. The name can consist of up to 12
full-size (or 24 half-size) characters.
b) Definition mode
If more than one contour is selected when the first figure selection is made, the definition mode
must be specified as "All" or "Each."
c) Changing selected figures
To change the figure of a selected machining profile to another figure, click on the "Other
Figure" button.
d) Changing the program plane and plate thickness
To change the height of the plate top and bottom planes and the Z coordinate of the program
plane, click on the "Z value" button.
e) Taper
Settings common to each entity
[Taper direction]
• Specify "Wider at bottom" or "Wider at top" in case closed figure.
• Specify "Left at top" or "Right at top" in reference to the direction of contour definition in
case open figure.
The direction of contour definition is shown by an arrow.
• Specify "No" in case Straight figure or when canceling the taper designation.

- 59 -
8.MACHINING FIGURE
CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

[Angle]
Specify taper angle by degree.
Taper direction will be opposite if the negative value is set. When the taper for each
element is not given, this taper is applied to all elements of the contour figure.
[Extension]
If a taper is specified, the contour of the top or bottom surface may become larger than the
reference contour. Should this occur, it is necessary to specify whether the end point of
each entity is to be extended.
Settings specific to each entity
To specify a different taper angle for each entity, click on the "Entity" button. Different
taper angles can be specified for each entity.
A line segment to show the tilting direction of the taper appears.
As for the setting of this Line segment, see the default setting of the Machining Figure
Creation.
f) Setting the program plane and thickness
Standard
• Program plane
Specify the position of the program plane using the Z coordinate of the drawing
coordinate system.
• Thickness
Set the position of the other side of the work piece.
Use plus value when the other side is above the Program plane.
Use minus value when the other side is below the Program plane.

NOTE
When the program plane is located between top and bottom surface, the figure
won’t be drawn at the opposite side of the thickness.
In this case, please set total thickness (actual thickness) at the AI cutting
condition setting window.

When “Advanced setting” of standard setting is selected

• Bottom plane height
Specify the bottom plane height relative to the program plane. If the bottom plane is
higher than the program plane in the direction of the Z axis, specify a positive value.
Otherwise, specify a negative value.
• Top plane height
Specify the top plane height relative to the program plane. If the top plane is higher than
the program plane in the direction of the Z axis, specify a positive value. Otherwise,
specify a negative value.
• Program plane Z value
Specify the position of the program plane using the Z coordinate of the drawing
coordinate system.

- 60 -
 8.MACHINING FIGURE
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i CREATION

NOTE
Usually, either the top or bottom plane is specified as the program plane. It is
also possible to specify an imaginary plane, which is neither the top nor bottom
plane, as the program plane.

(2) 4-axis independent figures (Different shape patterns at top & bottom figure)
Specify the data necessary for the target machining figure.
a) Name
Specify the name of the target machining figure. This can double as a comment to remind the
user of the purpose of the machining figure. The name can consist of up to 24 characters.
b) Automatic synchronizing
To sequentially synchronize entities on the top plane contour with those on the bottom plane
contour starting at the start point, check the [Each Entity] check box. If the check box is not
checked, the top and bottom surface contours are synchronized with each other using equally
spaced points on the contours. The check box is checked by default, provided both top and
bottom plane contours have the same number of entities. Otherwise, the check box is not
checked by default.
c) Changing selected figures
To change the figure of a selected top or bottom plane contour to another figure, click the
[Other Fig] button.
d) Changing the Z coordinate of the program plane, top, or bottom plane
To change the Z coordinate of the program plane, top, or bottom plane of a machining figure,
click the [Z value] button.
e) Contour information
• Start point
To change the start point of the contour of a top or bottom plane, click the [Start Point]
button.
• Reverse
To reverse the direction in which the top or bottom plane contour is created, click the
[Change dir.] button.
f) Setting the program plane and thickness
Standard
Same as Straight/taper figures

When “Advanced setting” of standard setting is selected

• Z coordinate of the top plane
Specify the position of the top plane using the Z coordinate of the drawing coordinate
system. Initially, the Z coordinate of the top plane contour is specified.
• Z coordinate of the bottom plane
Specify the position of the bottom plane using the Z coordinate of the drawing coordinate
system. Initially, the Z coordinate of the bottom plane contour is specified.
• Z coordinate of the program plane
Specify the position of the program plane using the Z coordinate of the drawing
coordinate system. Initially, the Z coordinate of the top plane contour is specified.

- 61 -
8.MACHINING FIGURE
CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

NOTE
If the top or bottom plane is on a slant plane, specify the Z coordinate of a
representative point (for example, the start point of a contour). Usually, either
the top or bottom plane is specified as the program plane. It is also possible to
specify an imaginary plane, which corresponds to neither the top nor bottom
plane, as the program plane.

(3) For die with relief figures

a) Name
Specify the name of the figure. It can be used as the comment. A maximum of 24 characters
can be specified.
b) Definition mode
[All] or [Each] can be selected as a creation method of the machining figure when more than
one contouring figure is selected.
c) Other figure
Click the [Other fig] button to replace the figure to be made Machining figure.
d) Alteration of Program plane and Thickness
Click the [Z value] button to alter the Upper Z value, Lower Z value or Thickness of Land.
e) Taper
• Angle
Specify taper angle by degree.
• Extend
A relief portion shape might become bigger than the Land (cutting portion) shape when
the taper is specified. In this case, specify whether to extend the end point of each element
of the shape.
A line segment to show the tilting direction of the taper appears.
As for the setting of this Line segment, see the default setting of the Machining Figure
Creation.
f) Setting of Program plane, Thickness of land and Thickness of relief
Standard
• Program plane
Specify the position of the program plane using the Z coordinate of the drawing
coordinate system.
• Thickness of land
Input the Thickness of land.
Use plus value when the land is above the Program plane.
Use minus value when the land is below the Program plane.
• Thickness of relief
Input the Thickness of relief. Sign of the value does not matter.

- 62 -
 8.MACHINING FIGURE
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i CREATION

When “Advanced setting” of standard setting is selected

• Upper Z value
Input the position of Top plane by the Z value of the drawing coordinate system.
• Lower Z value
Input the position of Bottom plane by the Z value of the drawing coordinate system.
• Thickness of Land
Select the position of Land from Top or Bottom.
• Land position
Select the position of Land from Top or Bottom.

NOTE
Program plane position
A program plane is set at the boundary of the land and the relief.

8.4 MODIFYING MACHINING FIGURES

This section describes how to modify machining figures.

8.4.1 Performing Modification Using a Dialog Window

From the drawing window, select a machining figure to be modified. Then, modify the necessary items.

8.4.2 Modifying Contours

A contour must be modified or created in advance. Click the [Other Fig.] button in the dialog window,
then select a previously created contour figure as the replacement figure entity.

8.4.3 Performing Modification after [Move/Copy]

When a request is made to use the machining figure modification function for modifying a machining
figure that has been transformed by a move/copy/reverse/scale command, the original figure is first
modified, then transformed in the same way as before.
- 63 -
8.MACHINING FIGURE
CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

8.5 MACHINING FIGURE CREATION FUNCTIONS (FOR

STRAIGHT/TAPERED FIGURES)
This section describes the machining figure creation functions.

8.5.1 Each and All Creation

This function is used to specify how a machining figure is to be created when more than one contour has
been specified when a figure is first selected.
• All creation
This mode is selected when all machining profiles are to be created at the same time, by applying the
same setting to all figures.
• Each creation
This mode is selected to change the setting of Each figure.

8.5.2 Taper Specification

A uniform or smooth taper can be specified. It is also possible to specify different taper angles for each
entity.
• Uniform taper angle
Specify a typical taper angle for the target figure, in units of degrees. If a taper is not specified for
each entity, this setting is applied to all entities of the target figure. If no taper is required, specify
0 degrees. A taper angle of between -90 degrees and +90 degrees can be specified.
• Different taper angles for each entity
To specify different taper angles for each entity, click the [Element] button. A taper angle can then
be specified for each entity.
• Smooth taper angle
If the amount of taper of an entity is not equal to that of the immediately subsequent entity, the
amount of taper can be changed gradually so that no step is formed. Such a taper is called a smooth
taper. A smooth taper can be specified for two entities with a smooth connection. Select the
[Smooth Taper Specification] icon from the side menu. A smooth taper is created by selecting the
entities of the machining figure to be modified, then clicking the [End] button.

NOTE
• In case the closed figure, if the specified taper angle is positive the figure extends
downwards.
• If the figure is open, and the taper angle is positive, the lower side of the figure shifts to
the right relative to the direction in which figure creation progresses. The figure creation
direction is displayed by an arrow when making a machining figure.

8.5.3 How to Specify Corner Rs

The corner of a basic machining figure can be modified in either of the following two modes.
• Each specification
Corner Rs are modified separately. Select the target corner R and its type, then click the [End]
button; the corner will be modified.
• All specification
All corner Rs for the target machining figure are modified at the same time. Select the target
machining figure and the corner R type, then click the [End] button; all corners are modified at the
same time.
A corner R type can be selected from:
1. Conical corner R (average)
- 64 -
 8.MACHINING FIGURE
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i CREATION

2. Conical corner R (small)

3. Conical corner R (large)
4. Identical Corner R for top and bottom figures
5. Independent Corner R for top and bottom figures
6. Smooth corner R
7. Ordinary corner R
Selecting [Ordinary Corner R] 7 cancels the specification of any of the other six types.

8.5.4 Modifying Contours

To replace the contours for a machining figure, click the [Other Fig.] button and select the contours to be
replaced.

8.5.5 Extension
If a taper is specified, the contour of the top or bottom surface may become larger than the reference
contour. Should this occur, it is necessary to specify whether to extend the end point of each entity. Even
if extension is specified, the offset figure will not be extended when the entity touches another entity.

8.5.6 Color and Layer

• Color
The color in which a machining figure is displayed can be specified by selecting [Setting =>
Standard Setting => Machining Figure Creation].
• Layer
Layer 10 is used to store machining figures.

8.6 MACHINING FIGURE CREATION FUNCTIONS FOR 4-AXIS

INDEPENDENT FIGURES
(Different shape patterns at top & bottom figure)
This section describes the machining figure creation functions.

8.6.1 Specifying Synchronizing Points on the Top and Bottom

Planes
The following procedure is used to specify points on top and bottom planes, used to synchronize their
contours with each other.
1. Select a target machining figure
2. Specify a synchronizing point on both the top and bottom plane. An edge line connecting the
synchronizing points is drawn. Repeat this setting for all the desired synchronizing points.
Specify a synchronizing point at the end point of an entity. If a synchronizing is to be established in the
middle of the entity, split the entity at the desired point in advance.

8.6.2 Canceling Synchronizing Point

The following procedure is used to cancel synchronizing point.
1. Select a edge line indicating a synchronizing point. Two or more edge lines can be selected.
2. To cancel the synchronizing, terminate the selection.

- 65 -
8.MACHINING FIGURE
CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

8.6.3 Canceling All Synchronizing Points at the Same Time

All synchronizing points can be canceled at the same time by selecting the entire machining figure; all
synchronizing points are canceled together.

8.6.4 Modifying Contours

To replace the contours of the top and bottom planes of a machining figure, click the [Other Fig.] button,
then select the contours and replacement occurs.
8.6.5 Color and Layer
• Color
The color in which a machining figure is displayed can be specified by selecting [Setting =>
Standard Setting => Machining Figure Creation].
• Layer
Layer 10 is used to store machining figures.

8.7 MACHINING FIGURE CREATION FUNCTION FOR DIE

WITH RELIEF FIGURES
This section describes the machining figure creation functions.

8.7.1 Creation for Each Figure and Creation for All Figures
Specify the method of creating machining figures when multiple contour figures are selected during first
figure selection.
• All
Select this item when creating machining figures at a time by applying the same setting to all
figures.
• Each
Select this item when making a different setting for each figure.

8.7.2 Taper Specification

A uniform taper can be specified.
• Specify the taper angle of the target figure in degrees.

8.7.3 Corner R Specification Method

The corner of a created basic machining figure can be modified.
Either specification for each corner or specification for all corners can be selected.
• Specification for each corner
Modification is made for each corner R.
To modify a corner, select the desired corner and its type and then press the [End] button.
• Specification for all corners
Modification is made for all the corners R of selected machining figures.
To modify corners, select the desired machining figure and the type of corner R and then press the
[End] button.

One of corner R types 1 to 6 can be selected.

1. Conical corner R (average)
- 66 -
 8.MACHINING FIGURE
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i CREATION

2. Conical corner R (smaller)

3. Conical corner R (bigger)
4. Top/bottom match corner R
5. Top/bottom independent corner R
6. Smooth corner R
7. Normal corner R
“7 Normal corner R” is used when returning to a normal corner R component by canceling one of six
types of corner R specification.

8.7.4 Changing the Contour Figure

To change the contour figure on which a machining figure is based, click the [Other Fig.] button and then
select a new contour figure.

8.7.5 Extension
When taper specification is performed, the contour figure on the top surface or bottom surface may bigger
than the reference contour figure. In this case, specify whether the end point of each element is
extended. Even when extension is specified, the offset figure is not extended if it comes in contact with
the adjacent element.

8.7.6 Color and Layer

• Color
Color used for displaying a machining figure can be set by selecting [Setting => Standard Setting =>
Machining Figure].
• Layer
The layer with a layer number of 10 is used for storing machining figures.

8.8 COORDINATE SYSTEMS

This section describes coordinate systems.

8.8.1 Machining Figures and Coordinate Systems

There are two kinds of coordinate system. Those are “Single coordinate system” and “Multiple coordinate
system”.
When the Single coordinate system is used, the origin of the drawing coordinate system in which a
machining figure is created is defined as the origin(X = 0, Y = 0) of the NC data for that machining
figure.

8.8.2 Single Coordinate System and Multiple Coordinate Systems

Coordinate systems can be applied to multi-piece machining in either of the following two ways.

• When a single coordinate system is used for all machining figures (single coordinate system)
Setting [Always Use Single Coordinate System for Output] at [NC Machine Specification] of [NC
Machine Setting] to 1 (standard) causes NC data to be prepared based on a single coordinate system.
• When separate coordinate systems are used for each machining figure (multiple coordinate systems)
If machining figures have been created using different drawing coordinate systems, or created by
copying, setting [Always Use Single Coordinate System for Output] to 0 causes NC data to be
prepared with separate coordinate systems used for each machining figure.
- 67 -
8.MACHINING FIGURE
CREATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

8.9 THREE-DIMENSIONAL DRAWING

Usually, a machining figure is drawn as a three-dimensional figure having a thickness. If there are too
many entities in a straight or taper machining figure, it is drawn as a two-dimensional figure and an alarm
is displayed. The user can specify whether a three-dimensional warning is to be used. For a 4-axis
independent figure, however, a three-dimensional drawing is always used.
If a smooth corner R is specified, the changing portion cannot be displayed accurately; it is represented as
an arc drawn with a dot-dash line. This is also true of an arc entity specified with a smooth taper.

8.10 NOTE ON CUTTING DIFFERENT PATTERNS AT TOP AND

BOTTOM FIGURES
If a program for cutting different patterns at top and bottom figures is created, cutting cannot be
performed properly if "a point on the programmed surface" and "an element on the Auxiliary surface" are
synchronized.
For example, this is true if "the edge point of an element on the programmed surface" and "a straight line
or an arc on the Auxiliary surface" are synchronized.
This is the specification of ROBOTCUT and not a malfunction. Please be careful because PC FAPT
CUT i does not show any warnings, etc.
If this happens, specify a surface containing "an element having a length" as the programmed surface.

- 68 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION

9 MACHINING DEFINITION
9.1 OPERATING PROCEDURE
Machining is defined according to the following procedure.
If you are in figure creation mode, select the icon from the side menu to switch to machining
instruction mode.

Select the icon corresponding to the command to be used to set the necessary item.

Selects the machine type for which the NC data is to be created, sets which type of NC data
(function used to create the NC data) to create, and sets the material of the workpiece to be machined,
wire diameter to be used and nozzle gap.
Selects Work coordinate system, Set Origin position, Select machining figures to be linked to a work
coordinate system.
Selects the machining figure, and selects the machining direction, machining start position, glue tab
and escape amount.
Specifies the clearance for each figure.

Sets the cutting conditions. For the ROBOCUT (Model B or later), it is also possible to use the
cutting condition AI setting function.

Cancels machining of the figure selected to the machined.

Selects the machining sequence in roughing, finishing and cutting. You can also select from the
available cutting types, or select the cutting type and cut-off method individually.
Adds and selects machining processes under new conditions different from currently defined
machining, and deletes defined machining processes.

- 69 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Edits the machining sequence in machining processes when machining two or more figures.
After specifying the desired machining type, select the icon to prepare the NC data. (See the next
chapter.)

9.2 PREPARATION INFORMATION

Click on the "Setting of Setup information" button . The interactive screen is displayed. Set the
following items.

9.2.1 Machine Setting

Select the desired machine for which the NC data is to be created.
(1) Machine type
The following two types are available. Select the desired machine type.
• FANUC ROBOCUT models
• Others (FANUC wire-cut electric discharge machine other than those described above (Note))
(2) Machine information
This setting item is divided into the following two categories. Set these items as necessary. These
settings are also saved to each machine type in use.
• NC machine specification
* How to output pause M codes can also be set.
• NC data format

NOTE
If this software is used with an old model earlier than FANUC ROBOCUT
α-0B/α-1B, the following restrictions are imposed:
1) Machining conditions cannot be output with G10. (They can be output with
an S code.)
2) On ROBOCUT α-A, only the M codes common to ROBOTCUT α-B or later
can be used.
On models other than ROBOTCUT α-A, only M00, M01, M02, M30, M50,
and M60 can be used.
3) In FANUC TAPE CUT Model L/M/N or earlier, the format for specifying
different patterns at top and bottom figures differs from that of the current
models. The format is not supported by this software.
There may occur restrictions other than those described above. Before using
NC data, thoroughly check for such additional restrictions.

9.2.2 Use Function

This item is used to specify the functions (Note1) that are to be used to prepare NC data.
(1) AI corner control
This function improves the precision of a corner. If [Use] is specified (Note2), the following control
takes place. See Appendix A for details.
• Roughing: AI corner control ON and feedrate control ON
• Finishing: AI corner control OFF and feedrate control ON
• Cutting-off: AI corner control OFF and feedrate control OFF
This item won't appear in case Series iD or later.

- 70 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION
(2) AI feed rate control
Function to improve the dimensional accuracy at convex corners.
Will be commanded together with AI-Corner control when finishing (skim).
Available when [AI feed rate control] of NC Machine spec. is set to [Used].
This item won't appear in case Series iD or later.
(3) AI controlled approach function
Function to prevent wire break when cut-in from the side of the workpiece.
Weaken the condition when starting, cut into the workpiece by the pre-determined distance. Then
return the conditions back to normal.
Available when [AI controlled approach function] of NC Machine spec. is set to [Used].
(4) Automatic wire feed
This function cuts and connects the wire automatically. (Note3)
• The wire is cut, moved to the next machining start point, and connected there.
• This function can be used if the AWF mechanism is selected from "Machine type selection."
(5) AWF result monitor function
This function monitors whether automatic wire feed are completed normally. (Note3, Note4)
• The result of automatic wire feed can be displayed.
• This function is available if [AWF Mechanism] is set to [ON] in the machine specifications and
[Automatic Connection] is used.
• Available on the machine type before iC series.
(6) Retrace
After machining ends, this function causes a retrace operation along the machined path to the
machining start point without discharging.(Note 5, Note 6)
(7) R command output of G02/G03 corner arc
NC date will be output by R command instead of G02/G03 for corner arc motion. R command will
be output in the following case.
• Corner arc of the machining figure is “Normal corner R” and the taper angles of previous
element and next element are the same.
• This function is Available when [Corner R output by R command] of NC Machine spec. is set
to [Used].
(8) Work coordinate system
It is convenient if one coordinate system can be used for each figure when cutting different shape
workpieces.
• This function is Available when [Work coordinate system setting function] of NC Machine
spec. is set to [Used]
(9) AI cutting conditions setting
ROBOCUT cutting conditions can be effectively selected on PC FAPT CUT i according to the wire
diameter, workpiece material, workpiece thickness, nozzle gap, machining feedrate and machining
precision. For details, see "Setting, Registering, and Confirming the Cutting Conditions" that
describe setting of cutting conditions in this chapter.
When AI cutting conditions setting is not used, an abridged interactive display displaying only the
bare essential items for setting the cutting conditions (e.g. condition No. (S codes), offset No. (D
code), offset amounts) is displayed. Set the actual cutting conditions on the machine.
(10) Standard cutting conditions
Sets the default for selecting whether or not to use the ROBOCUT standard cutting conditions, that
are supplied by FANUC, with the AI cutting conditions setting function.
This function is available if [AI cutting conditions setting] is set for use. Note, however, that this
function is always unavailable if the machine type is set to [Others].

- 71 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

NOTE
1 The standard ROBOCUT cutting conditions cannot be used if [Others] is
selected from [Machine Type Selection].
2 To use AI corner control, it is also necessary to set the wire diameter, workpiece
material and thickness on the machine side at machining time.
3 [Automatic Wire Feed] will be disabled if [No AWF mechanism] is selected from
[Machine Type Selection].
4 The AWF result monitor function will be disabled if [No AWF Feature] is selected
from [Machine Model Selection], or if [Automatic Wire Feed] is set to [No Use].
5 [Retrace] is disabled if [AWF Result Monitor Function] is set to [Use].
6 If [Retrace] is set to [Use], extra processing may be performed depending on the
Cutting type. Therefore, [Use] should be selected only when necessary.
7 [Retrace] is disabled for a portion where reverse cut is to be performed. It is
also disabled in open-area machining.

9.2.3 Outputting G10

This function is used to specify whether to output a G10 ... block that sets cutting condition data and
offset amounts to NC data.
Depending on the model, *9 and other information are output as comments.
In case Series iD or later, the corner control command is given by G11J_.
Also wire diameter/material/thickness are output by M21.
• Cutting conditions (Contouring/Coreless/Cutting-off)
You can set whether or not to output cutting condition data commands
(G10X_Y_ ...) for contouring and coreless cutting.
• Offset (Contouring/Coreless)
You can set whether or not to output offset amount commands (G10P_R_ ...) for contouring and
coreless cutting.
• Offset (cutting-off)
You can set whether or not to output offset amount commands (G10P_R_ ...) for cutting-off.

NOTE
Even when output is set, G10X_Y_ ... is not output to NC data for contouring if
all items for all processes in contouring are not set.
The same applies for coreless cutting.

HINT
It is possible to output G10X_Y_ ... taking the above characteristics into
consideration for contouring but only for the conditions number for coreless
cutting.

9.2.4 Wire Diameter, Workpiece Material, Nozzle Gap Setting

Set the material of the workpiece to be cut, diameter of the wire to be used and the gap between the
nozzle and the workpiece.
• Wire diameter
Select the diameter of the wire to be used.
• Workpiece material
Select the workpiece material to be used.
• Nozzle gap
Select the gap between the nozzle and the workpiece.
- 72 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION

9.2.5 Program Start Point

The program start point to be used throughout the program can be set separately from the wire cut start
point for each individual figure.
This start point can be specified using X- and Y- coordinates or the position specification mode.
To use this function, select "Use" for the program start point from "NC Machine Setting" => "NC
Machine Specification."

NOTE
Accurate tapering is impossible unless the distance between the programmed
plane used for creating a machining figure and the table top is defined
accurately.
As PC FAPT CUT i calculates this distance from the "programmed plate Z
coordinate" and the "table top Z coordinate," these values should be set
accurately for tapering.

9.2.6 Clearance
Clearance for each figure and clearance for all figures can be specified.
• Clearance for each figure
Clearance can be used to adjust the cutting size of each figure, instead of cutting them exactly as
specified on the drawing. An actual clearance amount is specified through the side menu
[Specifying clearance for each figure].
• Clearance for all figures
A clearance common to all figures can be specified.

NOTE
(Clearance for all figures - Clearance for each figure) will be output to NC data
by G10P9998R_; or G10P16R_; format.
ROBOCUT α-0iA/ α-1iA or later: G10P9998R_;
ROBOCUT α-0C/ α-1C, α-0B/ α-1B: G10P16R_;

9.3 WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING

Select Work coordinate system number (1-31) and set its Origin.
When you give machining instructions to the figures, the current Work coordinate system number will be
linked to them. Also you can change the link by the operation of the dialog window.
In addition, Work coordinate system number for the Program start point can be set.
• Work coordinate number
Select from 1 to 31.
• Work coordinate origin
Key in X, Y value direct or specify by Position designation mode.
• Machining figures to be linked to the Work coordinate system
Specify the machining figures to be linked to the Work coordinate system which is selected by
[Work coordinate number].
• Work coordinate system number for the Program start point
Specify the Work coordinate system number for the Program start point.

- 73 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

9.4 SPECIFYING AND CANCELING MACHINING USING A

MACHINING FIGURE
This function is used to specify machining figures and a corresponding cutting condition for each
machining figure. To machine a closed area, it is necessary to specify machining (die/punch machining)
for the entire range of a closed contour. To machine an open area, it is necessary to specify an open
contour or part of a closed contour.
If a cutting condition is specified for more than one machining figure, all the affected figures are
machined according to the specified cutting condition. To use a different cutting condition for each
machining figure, save a program for each figure after NC data has been prepared, and define machining
as a separate program.
Even after a machining figure has been specified as a machining target, it can be canceled.

9.4.1 Closed-Area Machining Specification--Setting The Wire Cut

Start Point
(1) Straight/taper figure and die with relief figure
Set the wire cut start point, glue tab and escape amount.

Entity to be
approached

Glue tab amount

Wire cut start point

Escape amount

Select the "Machining Figure Select" icon from the side menu, and select the "Closed-Area
Machining" icon .
Select the wire cut start point.
The interactive window is displayed when you select the entity to be approached with the mouse in
the drawing window. Enter the following data:

1 Whether or not to perform coreless cutting

When performing coreless cutting, specify the method, i.e., Polygon or Offset.
2 Prepared hole diameter
When performing coreless cutting, specify the required prepared hole diameter. (Note 1)
3 Enter the "Glue tab amount or cut off position", "escape amount", and "overlap amount". Set
secondary glue tab amount as required. The glue tab position is converted to the glue tab
amount before set.
When the "machining direction" or "position on the entity to approach" is changed during the
time from the specification of the glue tab position until the dialog window ends, the
conversion from the glue tab position to glue tab amount is performed again. When the glue
tab amount is set directly, this conversion is not performed.(Notes 2 to 4)
4 Select the machining direction.
5 Select where on the entity to approach by selecting one of the following:
• Normal to the entity (point where the normal from the wire cut start point to the entity
(Note 5)
- 74 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION

• End point of the entity (closer to the point where the entity was picked)
• Mid-point of the entity
• Point on the entity

NOTE
1 If you specify the diameter of the prepared hole when performing coreless
cutting, PC FAPT CUT performs processing so that wasted machining paths
inside the prepared hole are minimized. Set zero if a prepared hole does not
need to be selected.
2 To perform cutting-off by leaving an uncut portion, set the glue tab amount to a
positive value. To perform cutting-off at a time without leaving an uncut portion,
set the glue tab amount to zero.
When cutting-off is performed separately from contouring, only positive values
are permitted. If zero is specified, an error occurs during NC data preparation.
Neither the glue tab amount nor glue tab position can be specified for coreless
cutting.
As the glue tab position, corner sections other than ordinary corner R and
smooth taper sections cannot be used.
When the "machining direction" or the "position on the entity to approach" is
changed after the dialog window is ended then opened again, the conversion
from the glue tab position to glue tab amount is not performed. Specify the glue
tab amount or position again as necessary.
Secondary glue tab amount can be used to leave the glue tab even after cut off.
"Position" button cannot be used to specify the secondary glue tab amount.
3 The "escape amount" is not used depending on the type of machining.
Reverse cutting is sometimes performed with some portions left uncut
depending on the cutting type. If this happens, do not enter zero as the
"escape amount."
Also refer to the cautions relating to a zero escape amount at the end of this
section.
The escape amount cannot be specified for coreless cutting.
4 When performing overlapping, set the "overlap amount" to a positive value.
Otherwise, set zero. Setting a negative value will result in an error.
5 If "normal to the entity" is selected as the position on the entity to approach, the
approach is performed at -45 (4th quadrant) when the periphery on the circle is
to be approached from its center. When an arc is to be approached from its
center, the approach aims at the mid-point of the arc.
6 The wire cut start point for coreless cutting must be inside the contour figure.
7 You can specify coreless cutting on tapered circles. However, coreless cutting
will not be accurately performed if specified on an arbitrary tapered contour
figure. The figure on the programmed plane will be cut with the taper ignored.
8 For a die with relief figure, Open area cutting cannot be specified.

(2) 4-axis independent figure (Different shape patterns at top & bottom figure)
Select the "Machining Figure Select" icon from the side menu, and select the "Closed-Area
Machining" icon .
Select the wire cut start point.
The interactive window is displayed when you select the entity to be approached with the mouse in
the drawing window. (Note 1)
Enter the following data:

- 75 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

1 Enter the "glue tab amount or glue tab position", "escape amount", and "overlap amount". Set
secondary glue tab amount as required. The glue tab position is converted to the glue tab
amount before set.
When the "machining direction" or "position on the entity to approach" is changed during the
time from the specification of the glue tab position until the dialog window ends, the
conversion from the glue tab position to glue tab amount is performed again. When the glue
tab amount is set directly, this conversion is not performed.(Notes 2 to 4)
2 Select the machining direction.
3 Select where on the entity to approach by selecting one of the following:
• Normal to the entity (point where the normal from the wire cut start point to the entity
meets the entity) (Note 5)
• End point of the entity (closer to the point where the entity was picked)
• Mid-point of the entity
• Point on the entity

NOTE
1 An entity having length zero corresponding to point 1 cannot be selected as the
entity to approach. Select an entity having some length on the corresponding
other side.
2 To perform cutting-off by leaving an uncut portion, set the glue tab amount to a
positive value. To perform cutting-off at a time without leaving an uncut portion,
set the glue tab amount to zero.
When cutting-off is performed separately from contouring, only positive values
are permitted. If zero is specified, an error occurs during NC data preparation.
Neither the glue tab amount nor glue tab position can be specified for coreless
cutting.
As the glue tab position, corner sections other than ordinary corner R and
smooth taper sections cannot be used.
When the "machining direction" or the "position on the entity to approach" is
changed after the dialog window is ended then opened again, the conversion
from the glue tab position to glue tab amount is not performed. Specify the glue
tab amount or position again as necessary.
Secondary glue tab amount can be used to leave the glue tab even after cut off.
"Position" button cannot be used to specify the secondary glue tab amount.
3 The "escape amount" is sometimes not used according to the type of machining.
Reverse cutting is sometimes performed with some portion left uncut depending
on the cutting type. If this happens, do not enter zero as the "escape amount."
Also read the cautions relating to a zero escape amount at the end of this
section.
4 When performing overlapping, set the "overlap amount" to a positive value.
Otherwise, set zero. Setting a negative value will result in an error.
5 If "normal to the entity" is selected as the position on the entity to approach, the
approach is performed at -45° (4th quadrant) when the periphery on the circle is
to be approached from its center. When an arc is to be approached from its
center, the approach aims at the mid-point of the arc.
6 Coreless cutting cannot be specified for 4-axis independent figures.

- 76 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION

9.4.2 Specifying Open-Area Machining

(1) Straight or taper figure
This function is used to specify the machining of open contours such as open figures or part of
closed contours. Select the [Machining Figure Specification] icon and the [Open-Area
Machining] icon from the side menu. When a machining figure is selected, a dialog window
appears.
Perform the following steps.

1 Enter values for "approach amount", "return amount", "glue tab amount or glue tab position",
and "escape amount".
Set secondary glue tab amount as required. The glue tab position is converted to the glue tab
amount before set.
When the "machining direction" or "position on the entity to approach" is changed during the
time from the specification of the glue tab position until the dialog window is ended, the
conversion from the glue tab position to glue tab amount is performed again. After the glue
tab amount is set directly, this conversion is not performed.(Note 1)
2 The initial setting of the machining direction is displayed in the drawing window. To specify
machining in the opposite direction, click the [Cutting Direction] button.
3 The initial setting of the wire offset direction is displayed in the drawing window. To specify
an offset in the opposite direction, click the [Offset Direction] button.
4 If it is necessary to cut the wire before returning from the machining end point to the machining
start point during cyclic machining of the same figure, check the [Cut wire] check box.
5 Check “No approach” if approach/retractmotion are not necessary.
6 The position in normal 5 The position in normal direction from the starting element is set as the
Wire cut start point as default.
If it is necessary to approach from other direction than the normal direction, click [Alter St.
point] button and input the position.
7 The position in normal direction from the last element is set as the cutting end point as default.
If it is necessary to change the direction than the normal direction, click [Alter End point]
button and input the position.
8 To machine part of a selected machining figure, click the [Machining Area] button to specify
the machining area.
NOTE
1 To perform cutting-off by leaving an uncut portion, set the [Glue Tab Amount] to a
positive value. To perform cutting-off without leaving an uncut portion, set it 0.
Only a positive value can be specified if cutting-off is to be performed separately
from contouring. If 0 is entered, an error will occur during NC data preparation.
A negative value cannot be specified.
Negative values can be set for [Approach Amount] and [Return Amount],
however. Doing so reverses the approach and return directions.
As the glue tab position, corner sections other than ordinary corner R and
smooth taper sections cannot be used.
When the "machining direction" or "position on the entity to approach" is
changed after the dialog window is ended then opened again, the conversion
from the glue tab position to glue tab amount is not performed. Specify the glue
tab amount or position again as necessary.
Secondary glue tab amount can be used to leave the glue tab even after cut off.
"Position" button cannot be used to specify the secondary glue tab amount.
2 To machine the entire contour of a selected machining figure, it is unnecessary
to specify a machining area.
3 The color of the drawings can be specified for approach, return, machining
direction, offset direction, and extension. See Chapter 16 for details.
- 77 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(2) 4-axis independent figures (Different shape patterns at top & bottom figure)
This function is used to specify the machining of open contours such as open figures or part of
closed contours. Select the [Machining Figure Specification] icon and the [Open-Area
Machining] icon from the side menu. When a machining figure is selected, a dialog box
appears.
Perform the following steps.

1 Enter values for "approach amount", "return amount", "glue tab amount or glue tab position",
and "escape amount". Set secondary glue tab amount as required. (Note 1)
To perform cutting-off by leaving an uncut portion, set the glue tab amount to a positive value.
To perform cutting-off at a time without leaving an uncut portion, set the glue tab amount to
zero.
When cutting-off is performed separately from contouring, only positive values are permitted.
If zero is specified, an error occurs during NC data preparation.
No negative value can be specified.
Negative values can be set for the "approach amount" and "return amount". Doing so reverses
the approach and return directions.
The glue tab position is converted to the glue tab amount before set.
When the "machining direction" or "position on the entity to approach" is changed during the
time from the specification of the glue tab position until the dialog window ends, the
conversion from the glue tab position to glue tab amount is performed again. If the glue tab
amount is set directly, this conversion is not performed.
2 The initial setting of the machining direction is displayed in the drawing window. To specify
machining in the opposite direction, click the [Machining Direction] button.
3 The initial setting of the wire diameter offset direction is displayed in the drawing window. To
specify an offset in the opposite direction, click the [Offset Direction] button.
4 If it is necessary to cut the wire before returning from the machining end point to the machining
start point during cyclic machining of the same figure, check the [Wire Cut] check box.
5 Check “No approach” if approach/retractmotion are not necessary.
6 The standard machining start point is a position that is vertical to the start entity in the
machining area. To approach a target at a non-vertical position, click the [Change Start Point]
button to specify the machining start point.
7 The standard machining end point is a position that is vertical to the end entity in the machining
area. To change to a non-vertical position, click the [Change end point] button to specify the
machining end point.
8 To machine part of a selected machining figure, click the [Machining Area] button to specify
the machining area.

NOTE
1 To machine the entire machining figure selected, it is unnecessary to specify a
machining area.
2 Drawing colors can be specified for each of the approach, return, machining
direction, offset direction, and extension. See Chapter 17, "Setting" for details.
3 The notes on the glue tab position for straight/taper figures also apply to 4-axis
independent figures.

9.4.3 Specifying of Batch Processing of Circular Figure

Two or more circular figures can be selected for contouring and coreless cutting.
Input the data to select the figures i.e., whether contouring or coreless cutting is performed according to
the size of the circles.
Perform the following steps.
Select the [Batch processing of circular figure] icon from the side menu.
- 78 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION
1 Select the machining direction. (Note1)
2 Select a candidate for the machining figure and then press the [End] button.
3 Select [Straight/Taper Figure] or [Die with Relief Figure] as the machining figure.
4 When you want to exclude a circular figure with a large diameter from the circular figures selected
for the previous item, check [Maximum Dia. to be cut], and specify the diameter.
5 When performing the contour cutting for the part or all of circles, check [Contouring] then input
followings.
• Glue tab amount
• Escape amount
• Secondary glue tab amount
• Overlap amount
• Minimum dia.
6 When performing coreless cutting of smaller circles or not necessary to cut at all, check [Minimum
dia.] and set the diameter.
7 When performing coreless cutting of all or the part of circles, check [Coreless cutting] then input the
following.
• Pre-hole dia.
If the Pre-hole dia. is specified, PC FAPT CUT tries to remove useless machining paths inside
the prepared hole as much as possible.
NOTE
1 The [Machining Direction] item appears when selecting the figures. So, it should be
selected during that time.
2 More than one figure can be selected. When the figures other than the circle is
selected those figures are excluded.
3 To perform cutting-off by leaving an uncut portion, set the [Glue Tab Amount] to
a positive value. To perform cutting-off without leaving an uncut portion, set it to
0. Only a positive value can be specified if cutting-off is to be performed
separately from contouring. If 0 is entered, an error will occur during NC data
preparation.
Secondary glue tab amount can be used to leave the glue tab even after cut off.
"Position" button cannot be used to specify the secondary glue tab amount.
4 To perform overlapping, set the [Overlap amount] to a positive value. Otherwise
set zero. Error will occur if negative value is set.
5 Cutting of the figures other than circles has to be specified by the Closed area cutting
or Open area cutting.
6 [Escape Amount] may not be used depending on the type of machining. Reverse
cut may be performed, with some portion left uncut, depending on the machining
type. In this case, do not enter 0 as the escape amount. Also, read the
cautions related to the specification of an escape amount of 0 at the end of this
section

9.4.4 Canceling of Cutting

Select the [Cancel of cutting] icon from the side menu. Prompts appear in the prompt area. Using
the mouse, select the machining figure to be canceled from the drawing window.

9.4.5 Cautions Related to an Escape Amount of 0

When the escape amount is set to 0
An alarm message appears during machining if the escape amount is set to 0 depend on the cutting type.
This alarm indicates that two or more blocks of non-motion commands have been specified in wire
compensation or taper machining mode.
To overcome this problem, follow the steps below:
- 79 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

• Use another cutting type.

• Specify that an M code is not to be output for a temporary stop, using “NC data output format” in
[Machine Type Selection]. See Chapter 17 for details. (Be very careful when specifying the
non-output of an M code for a temporary stop, because doing so may result in the occurrence of a
safety-related problem.)

9.4.6 Cutting Taper Figure

There is a case when the cutting results are not guaranteed if the wire is approaching to an arc element.
It happens if the wire moving plane (normal to the XY plane) when approaching does not passing through
the center of the approaching arc element.
This is the specification of ROBOCUT and not a malfunction. Please be careful because PC FAPT CUT
i does not show any warnings, etc.

9.4.7 Cutting 4-Axis Independent Figures

Be careful when the top and bottom contours of the a 4-axis independent figure are misaligned.
For the PC FAPT CUT i, a wire is assumed to be vertical at the cutting start point.
Therefore, one of the top and bottom elements may be approached from inside and the other from outside
depending on the relative position of the wire and these approaching elements. In this case, the wire
diameter compensation (G41/G42) may not be output correctly, so a warning is issued during creation of
NC data. Therefore, for die figures, specify the start point and approaching elements again so that the
wire moves to the approaching elements for top and bottom contours from the inside of the contours.
A warning is issued in the cases shown below.

Approaching from the outside of the bottom approaching element

Bottom approaching element Top
corresponding to the top
Cutting start point

Specified approaching
element

Approaching action
Top
Bottom Bottom

Countermeasures
Example1 Example2

Top Bottom
Top

Changing the approaching elements Changing the cutting start point

allows both approaching elements to allows both approaching elements to
be approached from inside. be approached from inside.

- 80 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION
Note that a wire is vertical when the wire returns to the cutting start position during cutting as well as at
start and completion of cutting.

9.4.8 Notes on Specifying the Glue Tab Position For 4-Axis

Independent Figures
The glue tab position is converted to the glue tab amount before set, regardless of whether the figure is a
straight/taper figure or a 4-axis independent figure.
For 4-axis independent figures, in particular, the following should be kept in mind:

• Conversion to glue tab amount

The distance from the position on the entity to approach (or its corresponding point) to the glue tab
position (or its corresponding point) is obtained for each of the upper and lower contours, and the
longer distance is regarded as the glue tab amount.

Position on the
entity to approach
Corresponding point
Shorter distance Longer distance
Corresponding point ↓
Regarded as the
glue tab amount

Glue tab position

• When glue tab positions are at the same point

When the specified glue tab positions are concentrated at one point, the corresponding point of the
entity of the other contour is set to the point closer to the position on the entity to approach.

Position on the
entity to
A point closer to the approach
position on the entity
to approach is
regarded as the
corresponding point.

The point far from the Glue tab position

position on the entity to (concentrated at
approach is not used. one point)

- 81 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

9.5 SPECIFYING A CLEARANCE FOR EACH FIGURE

Set the amount of clearance for a figure to be cut.
Select a figure for which to specify a clearance and then press the [End] button.
Multiple figures can be selected at a time.
When a dialog window appears, set the amount of clearance.
• Clearance
Set the amount of clearance for a selected figure.
• Change color
The color can be changed when the amount of clearance is set.

To use this function, select [Clearance for each Figure] in [Setting Setup Information].

9.6 SETTING, REGISTERING, AND CONFIRMING THE

CUTTING CONDITIONS
When using a wire-cut electric discharge machine, it is necessary to specify the cutting conditions such as
the no-load voltage and wire tension. PC FAPT CUT i not only automatically selects the necessary
cutting conditions from standard cutting conditions but also enables users to register their own cutting
conditions.

9.6.1 Setting the Cutting Conditions

This function is used to set the cutting conditions. Cutting condition AI setting function is available for
The ROBOCUT. Using this function, it is possible to efficiently select the required cutting condition from
a library of thousands of ROBOCUT standard cutting conditions, prepared in PC FAPT CUT i.

(1) Selecting the cutting conditions

Select the [Cutting Condition Set] icon from the side menu. A dialog box appears. Specify the
required cutting conditions as described below.

When AI setting (standard cutting conditions) is enabled

In the conversational window, cutting condition select button, [A1], [A2], [B1], ..., are arranged starting
from the left, in the order of the roughest finishing surface to the finest. Clicking these buttons causes
the speed, precision, surface roughness, machining count, nozzle opening, and *10 displayed on the right
bottom of the window to change(Note 1). This allows you to check whether the desired machining
conditions have been selected. A button displayed with a shadow indicates that the corresponding
condition has not been registered, and cannot be clicked. If the check box for [User cutting condition] is
turned off, user-registered cutting conditions are not selected. Instead, only the standard cutting
conditions are used

When AI setting (standard cutting conditions) is disabled

Cutting conditions cannot be selected from the library of ROBOCUT standard cutting conditions.
Instead, however, user-registered cutting conditions can be selected. Use the horizontal scroll tab in the
same way as when the cutting condition AI set function is enabled.

[Work thickness adaptive control is used]

By means of Work thickness adaptive control, it is possible to cut the workpiece efficiently even
when the thickness is changing.
[Starting thickness] Set the workpiece thickness when cutting starts.
Work thickness adaptive control cannot be used for die with relief figures.

- 82 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION
Items specific to cutting of die with relief figures
For die with relief figures, separate cutting conditions can be specified for the relief and land
portions of a figure. In addition, the cutting order is specified for a figure.

[Cutting order of a figure]

Select the cutting order of a figure.
• Relief → Land
• Land → Relief
• Alternately (from relief)

Switching between the land portion and relief portion

Select a target cutting section on the switching tab to set the cutting conditions for the land and relief
portions.

[Workpiece thickness]
The workpiece thickness is determined depending on the combination of [Cutting order of a figure] and
the target cutting section. Change it as necessary.
1) Relief → Land
Board thickness of the relief portion: Entire thickness
Board thickness of the land portion: Land thickness
2) Land → Relief
Board thickness of the land portion: Entire thickness
Board thickness of the relief portion: Relief thickness
3) Alternately (from relief)
Board thickness of the relief portion: Entire thickness (first time), Relief thickness (second time or
later)
Board thickness of the land portion: Land thickness

[Cut-off/In-feed]
Select either cut-off or in-feed to be performed during rough machining for the portion to be processed
later.
When coreless cutting is selected, in-feed machining is performed regardless of the specification of this
item.

[Cutting allowance]
When [Alternately] is selected in [Cutting order of a figure], the cutting allowance of the land portion is
automatically calculated and indicated.
When the land portion is cut after cutting the relief portion, unnecessary wire routes may arise.
Therefore, this value is used to omit the unnecessary routes.

NOTE
1 The machining information items to be displayed differ depending on the
ROBOCUT model.
• Feedrate
• Precision
• Surface roughness (Ry, Ra)(*1)
• Cutting count
• Nozzle clearance
• Nozzle diameter(*2)
*1 The surface roughness indication type is selected by [Setting Operation
About Cutting Specification].
*2 The nozzle diameter to be used is indicated. Make sure the correct nozzle
is used.
- 83 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

NOTE
2 It is necessary to set the wire cut start point before setting the cutting conditions.
If the wire cut start point is set for machining figures with different thicknesses, a
corresponding message appears. For an explanation of how to respond to the
output of this message, see the description of machining workpieces with
different thickness and materials, later in this chapter.

3 The standard cutting conditions are based on those for machining straight
figures. They may not always be suitable for tapered machining figures or
4-axis independent figures that are to be machined with the wire inclined. Also,
the standard conditions do not include a coreless cutting condition.
In this case, set the conditions manually or set only the condition number (S
code) then set the conditions on the machine side.
4 If a cutting count of 1 is selected during setting of the standard cutting
conditions, both the cutting condition and offset numbers are automatically reset
to 0.

The items (2) to (8) are indicated as follows.

i ) In the case of ROBOCUT α-0iA/α-1iA or later
Related matters will be shown on the AI cutting condition setting window.
ii) In case ROBOCUT α-0C/α-1C
Related matters will be shown on the Cutting condition Registration/Confirmation window by
clicking the Regist/Confirm button.

(2) Confirming cutting conditions

Confirming of the selected cutting conditions as well as the registering of new cutting conditions are
available. The condition number (S code), offset number (D code), and offset amount can be set
directly.

(a) Data that can be confirmed

The data items such as the following are displayed. The items displayed differ depending on the
model. For details, refer to the ROBOCUT manual. The condition number (S) and compensation
number (D) are always displayed, regardless of whether AI setting (standard cutting conditions) is
enabled. The other items are displayed only when AI setting (standard cutting conditions) is enabled.

• Condition number • Wire tension

• Pulse mode • Wire feed
• No-load voltage • Dielectric fluid
• ON time • Feedrate
• OFF time • Offset number
• Servo voltage • Offset amount

(3) Number of cuts

When “AI cutting condition setting” is used, “Number of cuts” will be shown by selecting the cutting
condition button.
When “AI cutting condition setting” is not used, this function is used to manually specify the number of
cuts. So the cutting condition number (S code), offset number (D code), and offset amount must be
specified directly.

(4) Cut-off condition

This function is used to specify the cut-off condition number, offset number, and offset amount.
(a) When cut-off finishing is not performed

- 84 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION

• Condition number
Specify a condition number (S code) used for cutting-off. If omitted, the same number as that used
for the first cut is used.
• Offset number
Specify an offset number (D code) used for cutting-off. The standard value is 0.
• Offset amount
Specify an offset amount used for cutting-off. If omitted, the same offset amount as that used for the
first cut is used. This setting is enabled when [Offset (Cut off)] is set for G10 output.
(b) When cut-off finishing is performed
Specify the cut-off condition number, detail conditions, offset number, and offset amount.
When "With skim" is checked, as many cuts as the number of contouring operations can be performed.
As necessary, secure the workpiece not to cut it off.
• Condition number
Specify a condition number (S code) used for the first cut. The standard value is 10.
• Conditions
Specify detail conditions used for the first cut. In the standard setting, the same conditions as those
used for the first contouring operation are used.
In the second and subsequent cuts, the same conditions as for contouring are used.
When machining conditions are set manually, detail conditions cannot be set.
• Offset number
Specify as many offset numbers (D code) as the number of contour operations. The standard offset
numbers begin with 10.
• Offset amount
Specify as many offset amounts as the number of contour operations. This setting is enabled when
[Offset (Cut off)] is set for G10 output.

NOTE
1 Cut-off finishing is useful when cutting-off is performed separately at the end of
punching, open-area machining, and machining of a figure with holes.
2 If the condition number and offset number do not match, the NC program is
output with S and D codes even when the E code is selected in the NC machine
setting.

(5) Step over amount of coreless cutting

This function is used to specify a step over amount of coreless cutting. It can be specified by entering a
value directly or a percentage of wire diameter.
• Direct Specification - Setting
Step over amount is specified direct by the value.
• Percentage of the Wire dia.
Specify a percentage of the Wire dia.(%)

NOTE
The step over amount in coreless cutting must satisfy the following conditions:
(width of figure) > (offset amount in coreless cutting *2) + (step over amount in
coreless cutting)

(6) Step over amount of in-feed cutting (for die with relief figure cutting)
When coreless cutting is specified, in-feed cutting is applied to the portions to be added later.
This item is used to specify the step over amount of the in-feed cutting.
The setting method is the same as that of coreless cutting.

- 85 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(7) Enabling/disabling AI corner control

The AI corner control function is enabled by checking the AI corner control check box at function
selection. AI corner control can be disabled for the final n cuts.

(8) [Relief angle] (for die with relief figure cutting)

Indicates the relief angle of the figure to be cut. Change the item as necessary. When registering the
cut conditions, they are distinguished by the angle of a relief.

9.6.2 Registering/Extracting Cutting Conditions

This function is used to register new cutting conditions and to extract them. The following items will be
shown
・ In the case of ROBOCUT α-0iA/α-1iA or later
Related matters will be shown on the "AI cutting condition setting" window at the same time.
・ ROBOCUT α-0iA/ α-1iA and previous models
in "cutting condition register/confirm" window by pushing "register/confirm" button.
(1) Registering cutting conditions
This function is used to save cutting condition data to a database.
Perform the following steps.
1 Set the number of cuts.
2 Set the cutting condition data in the table.
3 Data other than the condition number (S code) and offset number (D code) may be left
undefined.
4 Click the [Register] button. A dialog box appears.
5 Set data such as surface roughness.
6 Click the [OK] button.
The cutting conditions for cutting-off are also registered.

(2) Extracting cutting conditions

This function is used to retrieve cutting condition data from a database according to a specified
cutting condition number.
Perform the following steps.
1 Set the number of cuts.
2 Click the [Extract] button. A dialog window appears.
3 Set a condition number (S code) for each cutting cycle (such as No. 1, 2, and so on).
4 If there is any cutting for which no cutting condition data need be extracted, leave the
corresponding check box unchecked.
5 Click the [OK] button.
The cutting conditions for cutting-off are also extracted.

9.6.3 No Offset
No offset can be specified for open figure cutting
Offset amount is reset to zero if this button is pressed. NC program with wire radius offset zero can be
made.

- 86 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION

9.7 CUTTING TYPES

This function is used to select a cutting sequence pattern, such as roughing, finishing, or cutting, and to
specify whether to perform reverse cut.
• [Cutting Type] (Standard)
A previously specified menu appears. It corresponds to either [Closed-Area cutting] or [Open-Area
cutting].
• [Cutting Type] (basic)
You can select the cutting type and cut-off method separately. Combinations of these enable cutting
that is not available in the standard patterns. Though the machining sequence is not taken into
consideration when cutting two or more figures, you can select the machining sequence using the
machining sequence editing function.
For die with relief figures, this type cannot be used.
• Adjustment at the escape position
This is a function to reduce the excess cutting of Die, by adjusting the escape motion.
Select [Adjustment by line] and set the distance along the figure into Parameter 1, and set the
distance normal to the figure into Parameter 2. Then the escape motion of straight line will take
place before reaching to the escape position.
For die with relief figures, this function is applied only to the land portion.
• Rapid approach when finishing
Approach of finishing will be rapid motion in case die cutting, if the slug in already removed.
• Table top Z coordinate
Set the Z coordinates of the table top in the world coordinate system. This setting determines the
position that the workpiece for the figure created by machining figure creation is placed at in terms
of the table's height. Enter the Z coordinate value taking the relationship between the machining
figure and the height of the table into consideration. (Note 1)

• [Reverse cut]
It is possible to specify whether to perform forward and reverse machining sequences alternately.
The waiting time during reverse cutting can be automatically adjusted according to the board
thickness. To adjust the waiting time, set thickness A, thickness B, and the waiting time for each
thickness.
• [Cutting the Wire Before Moving Between Machining Figures]
It is possible to specify whether to cut the wire before movement between machining figures during
open-area machining of multiple figures.
• [Arc Approximation by line segments]
It is possible to specify the tolerance for minute linear approximation-based blocks created for 4-axis
independent figure machining.

- 87 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

9.7.1 Cutting Types

Cutting type - closed-area machining
One figure
• Punch(Rough & Finish, Cut-off)
• Punch(Rough only, Cut-off)
• Die(Rough, Cut-off from st. pt., Finish)
• Die(Rough, Cut-off, Finish)
• Die with relief (Cut-off from start point)
• Die with relief (Temporary stop and cut-off)

Plural figures
• Punch(Rough & Finish all parts, then Cut-off all parts)
• Punch(Rough & Finish & Cut-off each part, before moving to next part)
• Punch(Rough all parts, 1st skim all parts, 2nd skim all parts, and so on, Cut-off each part)
• Punch(Rough all parts, Finish & Cut-off each part)
• Punch(Rough all parts, perform all skim at each part, Cut-off each part)
• Punch(Rough only, Cut-off each part, before moving to the next part)
• Die(Rough all parts, Cut-off all slugs, perform all skim at each part)
• Die(Rough & Cut-off all slugs, perform all skim at each part)
• Die(Rough & Cut-off all slugs, 1st skim all parts, 2nd skim all parts, and so on)
• Die(Rough & Cut-off & Finish each part, before moving to the next part)
• Die & Punch (Fig. with hole : Rough in, cut-off, rough out, finish in and out)
• Die & Punch (Fig. with hole : Rough in, cut-off from St. Pt., rough out, finish in and out)
• Die & Punch (Fig. with hole : Cut only once, Rough and cut-off in, rough and cut-off out)
• Die with relief (Rough all parts, Cut-off all slugs, perform all skim at each part)
• Die with relief (Rough & Cut-off all parts, perform all skim each part before moving to the next
part)
• Die with relief (Rough & Cut-off, Finish each part, before moving to the next part)

Cutting type - open-area machining

One figure
• Open(Rough, Cut-off[approaching from opposite direction], Finish)
• Open(Rough, Cut-off, Finish)

Plural figures
• Open(Rough all parts, Cut-off all parts[from the opposite direction], then perform all skim)
• Open(Rough & Cut-off all parts, perform all skim each part, before moving to next part)
• Open(Rough & Cut-off all parts, 1st skim all parts, 2nd skim all parts, and so on)
• Open(Rough & Cut-off & Finish each part, before moving to next part)

The following sections explain these cutting types, using the following conditions as an example.
Number of cuts: 3 (one rough cut and two finishing cuts)
Number of figures: Two (A and B) (Note1)

NOTE
1 Plural machining figures

Following examples of each cutting type shows the case when "Cut off finish" or "2nd glue tab amount",
etc. is not used.

- 88 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION

(1) Punch cutting

(a) One figure punch (Rough & Finish, Cut-off)

Rough cut to Finish cut continuously then cut off at last.

1 Roughing
2 Finishing (first cut)
3 Finishing (second cut)
4 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off)
5 Cutting-off
6 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
7 Escape
8 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
9 Return to the start point
** Note2) (See the end of this item)

(b) One figure punch (Rough only, Cut-off)

Cut contour once, then cut off. Cut off motion is succeeding to the contouring.

1 Contouring
2 Temporary stop (preparing for cutting-off) (*)
3 Cutting-off
4 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
5 Escape
6 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
7 Return to the start point

* Note1)
** Note2)
Note6)

- 89 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(c) Punch (Rough & Finish all parts, then Cut-off all parts)
Cut from rough to finish for each figure, then cut off all parts at last.

1 Roughing of figure A
2 Finishing (first cut) for figure A
3 Finishing (second cut) for figure A
4 Roughing of figure B
5 Finishing (first cut) for figure B
6 Finishing (second cut) for figure B
7 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off)
8 Cutting-off of figure A
9 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
10 Escape
11 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
12 Cutting-off of figure B
13 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
14 Escape
15 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
16 Return to the start point of figure A

** Note2)

(d) Punch (Rough & Finish & Cut-off each part, before moving to next part)
Cut from rough to cut off for each part.

1 Roughing of figure A
2 Finishing (first cycle) of figure A
3 Finishing (second cycle) of figure A
4 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off)
5 Cutting-off of figure A
6 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
7 Escape
8 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
9 Roughing of figure B
10 Finishing (first cycle) of figure B
11 Finishing (second cycle) of figure B
- 90 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION
12 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off)
13 Cutting-off of figure B
14 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
15 Escape
16 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
17 Return to the start point of figure A

** Note 2)

(e) Punch (Rough all parts, 1st skim all parts, 2nd skim all parts, and so on,
Cut-off each part)
Cut all parts by the same condition, then cut off all parts at last.

1 Roughing of figure A
2 Roughing of figure B
3 Finishing of figure A (first cut)
4 Finishing of figure B (first cut)
5 Finishing of figure A (second cut)
6 Finishing of figure B (second cut)
7 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off)
8 Cutting-off of figure A
9 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
10 Escape
11 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
12 Cutting-off of figure B
13 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
14 Escape
15 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
16 Return to the start point of figure A

** Note2)

- 91 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(f) Punch (Rough all parts, Finish & Cut-off each part)
Rough cut for all parts, then finishes to cut off each part.

1 Roughing of figure A
2 Roughing of figure B
3 Finishing of figure A (first cut)
4 Finishing of figure A (second cut)
5 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off)
6 Cutting-off of figure A
7 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
8 Escape
9 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
10 Finishing of figure B (first cut)
11 Finishing of figure B (second cut)
12 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off)
13 Cutting-off of figure B
14 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
15 Escape
16 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
17 Return to the start point of figure A

** Note2)

(g) Punch (Rough all parts, perform all skim at each part, Cut-off each part)
Rough cut for all parts, then finishes each part and cut off all parts at last.

1 Roughing of figure A
2 Roughing of figure B
3 Finishing of figure A (first cut)
4 Finishing of figure A (second cut)
5 Finishing of figure B (first cut)
6 Finishing of figure B (second cut)
7 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off)
8 Cutting-off of figure A
9 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
10 Escape
- 92 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION
11 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
12 Cutting-off of figure B
13 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
14 Escape
15 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
16 Return to the start point of figure A

** Note2)

(h) Punch (Rough only, Cut-off each part, before moving to the next part)
Contour cut once, then cut off succeeding to the contouring.

1 Contouring of figure A
2 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
3 Cutting-off
4 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
5 Escape
6 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
7 Contouring of figure B
8 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
9 Cutting-off
10 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
11 Escape
12 Temporary stop (for taking out the punch) (**)
13 Return to the start point of figure A

* Note1)
** Note2)
Note6)

- 93 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(2) Die cutting

(a) One figure Die (Rough, Cut-off from st. pt., Finish)
Rough cut leaving glue tab amount, then separately cut off. Finish later.

1 Roughing
2 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off)
3 Cutting-off
4 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
5 Escape
6 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
7 Finishing (first cut)
8 Finishing (second cut)
9 Return to the start point
** Note3)

(b) One figure Die (Rough, Cut-off, Finish)

Rough and cut off. Cut off motion is succeeding to the rough. Finish later.

1 Roughing
2 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
3 Cutting-off
4 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
5 Escape
6 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
7 Finishing (first cut)
8 Finishing (second cut)
9 Return to the start point

* Note1)
** Note3)
Note6)

- 94 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION

(c) Die (Rough all parts, Cut-off all slugs, perform all skim at each part)
Rough cut for all parts, cut off all parts then finishes each part.

1 Roughing of figure A
2 Roughing of figure B
3 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off)
4 Cutting-off of figure A
5 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
6 Escape
7 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
8 Roughing of figure B
9 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
10 Escape
11 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
12 Finishing of figure A (first cut)
13 Finishing of figure A (second cut)
14 Finishing of figure B (first cut)
15 Finishing of figure B (second cut)
16 Return to the start point of figure A

** Note3)

(d) Die (Rough & Cut-off all slugs, perform all skim at each part)
Rough cut for all parts, then finishes each part.

1 Roughing of figure A
2 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
3 Cutting-off of figure A
4 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
5 Escape
6 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
7 Roughing of figure B
8 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
9 Cutting-off of figure B
10 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
- 95 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

11 Escape
12 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
13 Finishing of figure A (first cut)
14 Finishing of figure A (second cut)
15 Finishing of figure B (first cut)
16 Finishing of figure B (second cut)
17 Return to the start point of figure A

* Note1)
** Note3)
Note6)

(e) Die (Rough & Cut-off all slugs, 1st skim all parts, 2nd skim all parts, and so
on)
Cut each part by the same condition.

1 Roughing of figure A
2 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
3 Cutting-off of figure A
4 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
5 Escape
6 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
7 Roughing of figure B
8 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
9 Cutting-off of figure B
10 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
11 Escape
12 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
13 Finishing of figure A (first cut)
14 Finishing of figure B (first cut)
15 Finishing of figure A (second cut)
16 Finishing of figure B (second cut)
17 Return to the start point of figure A

* Note1)
** Note3)
Note6)

- 96 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION

(f) Die (Rough & Cut-off & Finish each part, before moving to the next part)
Cut each part from rough to finish.

1 Roughing of figure A
2 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
3 Cutting-off of figure A
4 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
5 Escape
6 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
7 Finishing of figure A (first cut)
8 Finishing of figure A (second cut)
9 Roughing of figure B
10 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
11 Cutting-off of figure B
12 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
13 Escape
14 Temporary stop (for taking out the slug) (**)
15 Finishing of figure B (first cut)
16 Finishing of figure B (second cut)
17 Return to the start point of figure A

* Note1)
** Note3)
Note6)

(3) Die & Punch (Figure with hole) cutting

(a) Die & Punch (Fig. with hole : Rough in, cut-off, rough out, finish in and out)
Rough and cut off each inside, then rough outside. Finish inside and outside, then cut off outside.

1,2 Rough inside of figure A Temp. stop (Preparing for cut-off) (*)
3,4 Cutting-off of fig. A Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
5,6 Escape Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
- 97 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

7,8 Rough inside of figure B Temp. stop (Preparing for cut-off) (*)
9,10 Cutting-off of figure B Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
11,12 Escape Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
13 Rough outside of figure A
14 Rough outside of figure B
15,16 Skim 2 times inside of figure A
17,18 Skim 2 times inside of figure B
19,20 Skim 2 times outside of figure A
21,22 Skim 2 times outside of figure B
23 for A, B outside Temp. stop (Preparing for cut-off)
24,25 Cut-off outside of A Temp. stop(Remove the work) (**)
26,27 Escape Temp. stop(Remove the work) (**)
28,29 Cut-off outside of B Temp. stop(Remove the work) (**)
30,31 Escape Temp. stop(Remove the work) (**)
32 Return to the start point of figure A(inside)

* Note1)
** Note4)
Note6)

- 98 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION

(b) Die & Punch (Fig. with hole : Rough in, cut-off from St. Pt., rough out, finish in
and out)
Rough cut each inside, then cut them off from start point. Rough cut outside. Then finish inside and
outside. At last, cut off outside part.

1 Rough inside of figure A

2 Rough inside of figure B
3 for A, B inside Temp. stop (Preparing for cut-off)
4,5 Cutting-off of fig. A Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
6,7 Escape Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
8,9 Cutting-off of fig. B Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
10,11 Escape Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
12 Rough outside of figure A
13 Rough outside of figure B
14,15 Skim 2 times inside of figure A
16,17 Skim 2 times inside of figure B
18,19 Skim 2 times outside of figure A
20,21 Skim 2 times outside of figure B
22 for A, B outside Temp. stop (Preparing for cut-off)
23,24 Cut-off outside of A Temp. stop(Remove the work) (**)
25,26 Escape Temp. stop(Remove the work) (**)
27,28 Cut-off outside of B Temp. stop(Remove the work) (**)
29,30 Escape Temp. stop(Remove the work) (**)
31 Return to the start point of figure A(inside)

** Note4)

- 99 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(c) Die & Punch (Fig. with hole : Cut only once, Rough and cut-off in, rough and
cut-off out)
Single pass & cut-off each inside shape, single pass & cut-off each outside shape.

1,2 Contour inside of figure A Temp. stop (Preparing for cut-off) (*)
3,4 Cutting-off inside of fig. A Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
5,6 Escape Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
7,8 Contour inside of figure B Temp. stop (Preparing for cut-off) (*)
9,10 Cutting-off inside of figure B Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
11,12 Escape Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
13,14 Contour outside of figure A Temp. stop (Preparing for cut-off) (*)
15,16 Cutting-off outside of fig. A Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
17,18 Escape Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
19,20 Contour outside of figure B Temp. stop (Preparing for cut-off) (*)
21,22 Cutting-off outside of figure B Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
23,24 Escape Temp. stop(Remove the slug) (**)
25 Return to the start point of figure A(inside)

* Note1)
** Note4)
Note6)

(4) Die with relief

(a) Die with relief (Cut-off from the start point)
Basically rough, cut off from start point then skim.
When the cutting order is "Alternate(from relief)", rough and cut off at the same portion then skim
alternately.

Example 1) Cutting order is “Relief -> Land”. 3 times skimming (Rough, and 2 times finish)
(1) (2) (3) (4)

(5) (6) (7) (8)

1 Relief portion Rough

2 Relief portion Cut off from start point
- 100 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION
3 Relief portion Skim (1st)
4 Relief portion Skim (2nd)
5 Land portion Rough(*7)
6 Land portion Cut off from start point
7 Land portion Skim (1st)
8 Land portion Skim (2nd)

Example 2) Cutting order is "Alternately(from relief)" 3 times skimming (Rough, and 2 times finish)
(3) (4) (6) (8)

(1) (2) (5) (7)

1 Relief portion Rough

2 Relief portion Cut off from start point
3 Land portion Rough(*7)
4 Land portion Cut off from start point
5 Relief portion Skim (1st)
6 Land portion Skim (1st)
7 Relief portion Skim (2nd)
8 Land portion Skim (2nd)

(b) Die with relief (Temporary stop and cut-off)

Basically rough temporarily stop then cut off and skim.
When the cutting order is "Alternate(from relief)", cut alternately for rough and skim.

Example 1) Cutting order is "Relief -> Land". 3 times skimming (Rough, and 2 times finish)
(4) (5) (6)

(1) (2) (3)

1 Relief portion Temporary stop and Cut off
2 Relief portion Skim (1st)
3 Relief portion Skim (2nd)
4 Land portion Temporary stop and Cut off
5 Land portion Skim (1st)
6 Land portion Skim (2nd)

Example 2) Cutting order is "Alternately (from relief)" 3 times skimming (Rough, and 2 times
finish)

- 101 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(2) (4) (6)

(1) (3) (5)

1 Relief portion Temporary stop and Cut off

2 Land portion Temporary stop and Cut off
3 Relief portion Skim (1st)
4 Land portion Skim (1st)
5 Relief portion Skim (2nd)
6 Land portion Skim (2nd)

(c) Die with relief (Rough all parts, Cut-off all slugs, perform all skim at each part)

Example 1) Cutting order is "Relief -> Land". 3 times skimming (Rough, and 2 times finish)
(9) (11) (13) (14) (10)(12)(15)(16)

(1) (3) (5) (6) (2) (4) (7) (8)

1 Relief portion Rough Part A

2 Relief portion Rough Part B
3 Relief portion Cut off from start point Part A
4 Relief portion Cut off from start point Part B
5,6 Relief portion Skim 2 times Part A
7,8 Relief portion Skim 2 times Part B
9 Land portion Rough(*) Part A
10 Land portion Rough(*) Part B
11 Land portion Cut off from start point Part A
12 Land portion Cut off from start point Part B
13,14Land portion Skim 2 times Part A
15,16Land portion Skim 2 times Part B

* Note7)
Example 2) Cutting order is "Alternately (from relief)" 3 times skimming (Rough, and 2 times
finish)
(5) (7) (10) (12) (6) (8) (14) (16)

(1) (3) (9) (11) (2) (4) (13) (15)

- 102 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION
1 Relief portion Rough Part A
2 Relief portion Rough Part B
3 Relief portion Cut off from start point Part A
4 Relief portion Cut off from start point Part B
5 Land portion Rough(*) Part A
6 Land portion Rough(*) Part B
7 Land portion Cut off from start point Part A
8 Land portion Cut off from start point Part B
9 Relief portion Skim (1st) Part A
10 Land portion Skim (1st) Part A
11 Relief portion Skim (2nd) Part A
12 Land portion Skim (2nd) Part A
13 Relief portion Skim (1st) Part B
14 Land portion Skim (1st) Part B
15 Relief portion Skim (2nd) Part B
16 Land portion Skim (2nd) Part B

* Note7)

(d) Die with relief (Rough & Cut-off all parts, perform all skim each part before
moving to the next part)

Example 1) Cutting order is "Relief -> Land". 3 times skimming (Rough, and 2 times finish)
(7) (9) (10) (8) (11) (12)

(1) (3) (4) (2) (5) (6)

1 Relief portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part A

2 Relief portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part B
3,4 Relief portion Skim 2 times Part A
5,6 Relief portion Skim 2 times Part B
7 Land portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part A
8 Land portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part B
9,10 Land portion Skim 2 times Part A
11,12Land portion Skim 2 times Part B

Example 2) Cutting order is "Alternately (from relief)" 3 times skimming (Rough, and 2 times
finish)
(3) (6) (8) (4) (10) (12)

(1) (5) (7) (2) (9) (11)

1 Relief portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part A

- 103 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

2 Relief portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part B

3 Land portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part A
4 Land portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part B
5 Relief portion Skim (1st) Part A
6 Land portion Skim (1st) Part A
7 Relief portion Skim (2nd) Part A
8 Land portion Skim (2nd) Part A
9 Relief portion Skim (1st) Part B
10 Land portion Skim (1st) Part B
11 Relief portion Skim (2nd) Part B
12 Land portion Skim (2nd) Part B

(e) Die with relief (Rough & Cut-off, Finish each part, before moving to the next
part)

Example 1) Cutting order is "Relief -> Land". 3 times skimming (Rough, and 2 times finish)
(4) (5) (6) (10) (11) (12)

(1) (2) (3) (7) (8) (9)

1 Relief portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part A

2,3 Relief portion Skim 2 times Part A
4 Land portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part A
5,6 Land portion Skim 2 times Part A
7 Relief portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part B
8,9 Relief portion Skim 2 times Part B
10 Land portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part B
11,12Land portion Skim 2 times Part B

Example 2) Cutting order is "Alternately (from relief)" 3 times skimming (Rough, and 2 times
finish)
(2) (4) (6) (8) (10) (12)

(1) (3) (5) (7) (9) (11)

1 Relief portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part A

2 Land portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part A
3 Relief portion Skim (1st) Part A
4 Land portion Skim (1st) Part A
5 Relief portion Skim (2nd) Part A
6 Land portion Skim (2nd) Part A
7 Relief portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part B
8 Land portion Temporary stop and Cut off Part B
- 104 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION
9 Relief portion Skim (1st) Part B
10 Land portion Skim (1st) Part B
11 Relief portion Skim (2nd) Part B
12 Land portion Skim (2nd) Part B

(5) Open-area cutting

(a) One figure Open (Rough, Cut-off[approaching from opposite direction],
Finish)
Rough cut leaving glue tab amount, then separately cut off. Finish later.

1 Roughing
2 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off)
3 Cutting-off
4 Temporary stop (for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
5 Escape
6 Temporary stop (for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
7 Finishing (first cut)
8 Finishing (second cut)
9 Return to the start point

** Note5)

(b) One figure Open (Rough, Cut-off, Finish)

Rough and cut off. Cut off motion is succeeding to the rough. Finish later.

1 Roughing
2 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
3 Cutting-off
4 Temporary stop(for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
5 Escape
6 Temporary stop(for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
7 Finishing (first cut)
8 Finishing (second cut)
9 Return to the start point

* Note1)
** Note5)

- 105 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(c) Open (Rough all parts, Cut-off all parts[from the opposite direction], then
perform all skim)
Rough cut all parts, cut-off all parts [approaching from the opposite direction], then perform all skim at
each part, before moving to next part.

1 Roughing of figure A
2 Roughing of figure B
3 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off)
4 Cutting-off of figure A
5 Temporary stop(for removing the work-piece that has been cut off)(**)
6 Escape
7 Temporary stop(for removing the work-piece that has been cut off)(**)
8 Roughing of figure B
9 Temporary stop(for removing the work-piece that has been cut off(**)
10 Escape
11 Temporary stop(for removing the work-piece that has been cut off(**)
12 Finishing of figure A (first cut)
13 Finishing of figure A (second cut)
14 Finishing of figure B (first cut)
15 Finishing of figure B (second cut)
16 Return to the start point of figure A

** Note5)

(d) Open (Rough & Cut-off all parts, perform all skim each part, before moving to
next part)
Rough & cut-off all parts, perform all skim each part.

1 Roughing of figure A
2 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
3 Cutting-off of figure A
4 Temporary stop(for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
5 Escape
6 Temporary stop(for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
7 Roughing of figure B
8 Temporary stop(for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
9 Cutting-off of figure B
10 Temporary stop(for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
11 Escape
12 Temporary stop (for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
13 Finishing of figure A (first cut)
14 Finishing of figure A (second cut)
15 Finishing of figure B (first cut)
- 106 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION
16 Finishing of figure B (second cut)
17 Return to the start point of figure A

* Note1)
** Note5)

(e) Open(Rough & Cut-off all parts, 1st skim all parts, 2nd skim all parts, and so
on)
Cut each part by the same condition.

1 Roughing of figure A
2 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
3 Cutting-off of figure A
4 Temporary stop(for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
5 Escape
6 Temporary stop(for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
7 Roughing of figure B
8 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
9 Cutting-off of figure B
10 Temporary stop (for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
11 Escape
12 Temporary stop (for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
13 Finishing of figure A (first cut)
14 Finishing of figure B (first cut)
15 Finishing of figure A (second cut)
16 Finishing of figure B (second cut)
17 Return to the start point of figure A

* Note1)
** Note5)

(f) Open(Rough & Cut-off & Finish each part, before moving to next part)
Cut each part from rough to finish.

1 Roughing of figure A
2 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
3 Cutting-off of figure A
4 Temporary stop(for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
5 Escape
6 Temporary stop(for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
7 Finishing of figure A (first cut)
8 Finishing of figure A (second cut)
- 107 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

9 Roughing of figure B
10 Temporary stop (for preparing for cutting-off) (*)
11 Cutting-off of figure B
12 Temporary stop (for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
13 Escape
14 Temporary stop (for removing the work-piece that has been cut off) (**)
15 Finishing of figure B (first cut)
16 Finishing of figure B (second cut)
17 Return to the start point of figure A

* Note1)
** Note5)

NOTE
1 The temporary-stop M code for preparing for cutting-off is not output if the glue
tab amount is 0.
2 In case that the punch is clamped before cut off, the punch can be removed after
escaping at temporary stop. But if it is impossible to clamp, the punch is
removed at the temporary stop just after the cut off. In the default settings,
temporary stop M code will be output on both cases for safety purposes. This
can be changed by NC machine setting.
3 In case that the slug is clamped before cut off, the slug can be removed after
escaping at temporary stop. But if it is impossible to clamp, the slug is removed
at the temporary stop just after the cut off. In the default settings, temporary
stop M code will be output on both cases for safety purposes. This can be
changed by NC machine setting.
4 In case that the slug or work is clamped before cut off, the slug or work can be
removed after escaping at temporary stop. But if it is impossible to clamp, the
slug is removed at the temporary stop just after the cut off. In the default
settings, temporary stop M code will be output on both cases for safety
purposes. This can be changed by NC machine setting.
5 In case that the work-piece is clamped before cut off, the work-piece can be
removed after escaping at temporary stop. But if it is impossible to clamp, the
work-piece is removed at the temporary stop just after the cut off. In the default
settings, temporary stop M code will be output on both cases for safety
purposes. This can be changed by NC machine setting.
6 With cutting types in which cutting-off is continued, the M code is always output
after cutting-off immediately after cutting off regardless of the NC machine type
setting when the glue tab amount and overlap amount are both zero.
7 During roughing of a portion to be cut later, stop operation before escaping to cut
a wire or cut a wire with AWF. This is because the slug can drop after
escaping.
When AWF is not used, pause operation after escaping.
In addition, to prevent the slug from dropping, you can also select in-feed cutting
instead of cut-off.

- 108 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION

9.7.2 Cutting Type (basic)

You can select the cutting type and cut-off method separately. Combinations of these enable cutting that
is not available in the standard patterns. Though the machining sequence is not taken into consideration
when cutting two or more figures, you can select the machining sequence using the machining sequence
editing function.
• Cutting type
Punch
Die
Open-area
• Cut-off method
Continued cutting-off (after roughing)
Separate cutting-off (after roughing)
Separate cutting-off (after finishing)

NOTE
1 The temporary-stop M code for cutting-off preparation is not output when the
glue tab amount is zero.
2 When clamping the punch, core, and workpiece before cutting-off, normally a
temporary stop is made and the workpiece is retrieved after retraction. If these
cannot be clamped, make a temporary stop immediately after cutting-off, and
retrieve the workpiece. In the default setting, a temporary-stop M code is
output in either case for safety purposes. However, this can be changed by the
NC machine settings.
3 With cutting types in which cutting-off is continued, the M code is always output
after cutting-off immediately after cutting off regardless of the NC machine type
setting when the glue tab amount and overlap amount are both zero.
4 For die with relief figures, this type (basic) cannot be used.

9.8 EDITING MACHINING DEFINITIONS

This function allows you to add and select machining types under new conditions that differ from
currently defined machining types, and delete already defined machining types.
When correcting an already defined machining type, you can also select which machining type is to be
corrected.
[Add]
Adds a new machining definition.
New machining definitions can also be added by selecting "Add new machining definition" at the
bottom line of the machining definition screen instead of pressing the [Add] button.
[Delete All]
Deletes all machining definitions.
[Delete]
Deletes the currently selected machining definition.
[Restore]
Restores deleted machining definitions.
[Display]
Detailed: Displays the machining type name, cut-off method, machining count and figure name.
Outline: Displays only the machining type name.

- 109 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

NOTE
To correct an already defined machining definition, select the machining
definition to correct, and press the [OK] button.
Even if the machining conditions are the same, closed-area machining cannot be
mixed with open-area machining while a machining definition is being defined.
Define each of these machining definition separately. The same applies when
defining two or more machining definition to one figure.

9.9 MACHINING ORDER EDITING FUNCTION

When machining two or more figures, you can change the machining sequence in machining process
units. Note, however, that the machining sequence in a single figure cannot be changed.
You can also select machining or non-machining, for example, to skip the 1st machining process and only
perform machining from the 2nd process onwards.
[Move]
Moves the selected machining type from the "currently cutting order" to the "new cutting order."
You can select where to move the machining type to by moving the mouse or arrow keys to the
desired item in the "new cutting order" list.
If a contradiction in the machining order occurs as a result of the move, for example, finishing is
performed before roughing, an error occurs.
[Undo]
Undoes an edit.
[Redo]
Redoes an undone edit.
[Restore All]
Restores all edits.
[Select All]
Selects all machining types in the "current machining order."
[Determine]
Moves all machining types in the "current cutting order" to "new cutting order." If a contradiction
occurs as a result of this move, the order is automatically adjusted to an order that can be machined.
[Re-edit]
Moves the machining type in the "new cutting order" to the "current cutting order."
[Cut/No cut]
Selects whether or not to machine the part selected in the "current cutting order."
Cutting types for which non-machining is specified are prefixed by an asterisk "*".
[Flicker machining figure]
Selected machining figure will be flickering on the drawing window.
[Resize height of both lists]
When this window is resized, the sizes of both "Current cutting order" and "New cutting order" lists
will be changed.

NOTE
1 You can also move by double-clicking "cutting" (one) in the "current cutting
order."
2 For die with relief cutting, when cutting is skipped because no cutting allowance
is provided on a certain occasion, cutting is not performed on the occasion.

- 110 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 9.MACHINING DEFINITION

9.10 OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR PRACTICAL

APPLICATIONS

9.10.1 Creating NC Data for an Unlisted Machine

To create NC data for a wire-cut electric discharge machine not listed under [Machine Type Selection],
give machining instruction as described below. This procedure places restrictions on some of the
functions that can be used with PC FAPT CUT i, but can create at least wire movement commands.
• Select [Others] from [Machine Type Selection] using the icon of the side menu.
• Change the condition number (S) and offset number (D) under [Cutting Condition Set] using the
icon of the side menu, as required. An AI cutting condition set function is not available.

NOTE
If machining is specified as described above, NC data related to the cutting
conditions and offsets includes only the corresponding numbers. The cutting
conditions and offset data for these numbers must be specified from the
machine side. See Chapter 11 for details. Before using NC data prepared in this
way, check that no required data is missing. If anything is missing, edit the NC
data manually. For an explanation of editing NC data manually, see Appendix A
at the end of this manual.

9.10.2 If No Work Material is Available

[Work Material] is used to select a ROBOCUT cutting condition offered by PC FAPT CUT i as part of
cutting condition setting. If the work-piece material does not correspond to any of the standard settings,
create NC data by specifying machining as described below.

NOTE
This description applies only when [Others] is selected from [Machine Type
Selection].

(1) If a similar material is available

• Select a work-piece material similar to that to be machined from [Work Material], specified
using the icon of the side menu. Also specify [Wire Diameter] and [Nozzle Gap].
• Select the desired condition from [Cutting Condition Setting], using the icon of the side
menu.

NOTE
If machining is specified in this way, the NC data will contain cutting conditions
and offset amounts. When machining is performed using this NC data, if it is
impossible to obtain optimal cutting conditions and adjust for them even on the
machine side, edit the NC data manually or re-prepare the NC data by giving the
machining instruction again by means of the following procedure. See Appendix
A for an explanation of editing NC data manually.

- 111 -
9.MACHINING DEFINITION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(2) If there is no work material that can be processed under the desired
cutting conditions
• Select an appropriate material from [Work Material] using the icon of the side menu. (Select a
material as close to the desired one as possible. This will be used later.) Likewise, set [Wire
Diameter] and [Nozzle Gap].
• Change the condition number (S) and offset number (D) of [Cutting Condition Set], using the icon
of the side menu, as required. A ROBOCUT cutting condition offered by PC FAPT CUT i
cannot be used.

NOTE
If machining is defined as described above, NC data related to cutting conditions
and offsets will include only the corresponding numbers. The cutting conditions
and offset data for these numbers must be specified on the machine side. See
Chapter 11 for details.

9.10.3 Machining Work-pieces of Different Thickness and Materials

(1) Machining under different cutting conditions
• Generally, machining work-pieces of different materials and thickness requires different cutting
conditions. If a wire cut start point is specified for multiple machining figures, PC FAPT CUT i
applies the same cutting conditions to each figure.
• To use different cutting conditions, save the program after the NC data has been prepared, and
give machining instruction as separate programs.

(2) Machining under the same cutting conditions

• If a wire cut start point is specified for multiple machining figures of different thickness, this is
indicated by a message when the cutting conditions are specified.
• The cutting condition AI set function selects a cutting condition by referencing one of the
thickness. A dialog window displays the thickness of one of the machining figures. The user
should change the displayed thickness as desired before selecting a cutting condition.

9.10.4 Producing Two or more Identical Figures

To produce two or more identical figures continuously, select the [Edit => Copy] command from the
menu bar. The following two modes are supported.
• Copy a machining figure before giving machining instruction.
• Copy a machining figure after giving machining instruction.
In the first mode, it is necessary to specify a wire cut start point for each of the copied figures. In the
second mode, the wire cut start point is also copied, so it is unnecessary to set a wire cut start point.

- 112 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 10.NC DATA PREPARATION

10 NC DATA PREPARATION
10.1 PREPARING NC DATA

Click the icon “NC data preparation” on the side menus of the Machining instruction. Then, the
NC data preparation display window appears.

After setting a program number, program name, and output file name, click the NC data preparation start
button . Then, NC data preparation starts. Once NC data preparation has been completed, click the
execution list display button.
Clicking the NC data preparation button causes the above NC data preparation screen to appear. On this
screen, operation and setting related to NC data preparation can be performed.
• Program No.
Specify an O number for the NC data.
• Program Name
Specify a program name (comment) for the NC data.
Any lowercase alphabetic letters are converted to uppercase.
An attempt to specify a code not available on ROBOCUT results in an error.
• Output File Name
Set the name of the file to which NC data will be output. The directory specified by “Setting =>
Environment” is used. When a directory has been specified in the Output File Name field, that
directory is used.
The output file name can also be set using the "Output file name reference" button .
: Output file name reference button
Clicking this button causes the file select screen to appear. Using this screen, a search can be made
for an NC data output file or such a file can be specified.
: Execution list display button
Clicking this button causes an execution list to appear. This allows the user to edit, print, and
transfer NC data. (Note 1)
Estimated machining time display button.(Note 1,2)
Allows you to view the estimated time of processing with created NC data, as well as the
machining length and wire cut start point information. It also allows you to print them.
(Note 1,2)
: NC data preparation start button
This button is used to start NC data preparation.
: NC data preparation pause button
Clicking this button pauses NC data preparation. To continue the preparation processing, click this
button again or NC data preparation step execution button.
: NC data preparation step execution button
Each time this button is clicked, one step of the NC data preparation processing is executed. Note,
however, that each click of this button does not necessarily correspond to the output of one block of
data.

- 113 -
10.NC DATA PREPARATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

: NC data preparation stop button

Clicking this button terminates NC data preparation.
: NC data preparation setting screen display button
Clicking this button causes the screen for setting the data required for NC data preparation to appear.
For details, see the description of the NC data preparation setting screen.
: NC data preparation end button
Clicking this button terminates NC data preparation.
: Speed adjustment button
Adjusts NC data creation speed.

: Data transfer button

Transfers NC data.

NOTE
1 The execution list and estimated machining time may be previous ones if the
"Start" button has not been pressed to create NC data.
The commands in the "NC data" menu of the execution list vary depending on the
"Protocol type" setting.
• When the protocol type is Ethernet
Selecting the "Output - ROBOCUT" command starts the program manager to
allow program transfer to the ROBOCUT through the Ethernet.
Selecting the "Output - other devices" command starts the file transfer tool to
allow program transfer to external devices through RS-232C.
• When the protocol type is RS-232C
Selecting the "Output NC data created last" command allows output of the NC
data created last to the ROBOCUT and external devices by using the file
transfer tool.
Selecting the "NC data output by specifying multiple files" command allows
output of multiple NC data files to the ROBOCUT and external devices by using
the file transfer tool.
NC data can be transferred not only from the "NC data" menu of the execution
list but also from the floppy disk icon in the right corner of the NC data
preparation dialog window.
2 The actually required machining time may differ from the estimate, because the
machining speed and other parameters may be adjusted depending on the
actual situation. A large difference may arise in some cases. The machining
time estimate should, therefore, only be used for reference purposes.

- 114 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 10.NC DATA PREPARATION

10.2 SETTING THE NC DATA OUTPUT FORMAT

While PC FAPT CUT i is displaying the window used for NC data creation (see the previous section),
pressing the "NC data output format" button causes the following dialog window to appear.

This window contains the following items.

(1) Comment
Specify character string to output at the beginning of NC data.
• Character string to be output within the parentheses is set.
• Maximum 127 characters can be set. Line feed is taken as two characters.
• To output Date & time of NC data preparation, change "Not output" to "Output". Output format
can be set too.
(2) Insertion of NC command
NC command can be output At the beginning and At the End of NC program.
• Specify M codes, G codes, etc., directly for outputing NC command.
• Maximum 63 characters can be set respectively before and after NC program. Line feed is
taken as two characters.
• To output before and after each cut, specify it by "Cutting order editing" window.
(3) "NC data output format" button
The format of the NC data to be output can be changed in detail as required. Usually, no change is
needed. The major items that can be set are:
- 115 -
10.NC DATA PREPARATION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

• Rapid traverse speed (used to calculate the machining time)

• Program number address
• Output format of the program start/end section
• Others
(4) Output mode
This item enables the specification of whether the move commands, prepared as NC data, are output
in absolute or incremental mode.
(5) Subprogram output
This item enables the specification of whether NC data is output as a combination of a main program
and subprograms, or as a single main program.
(6) Sequence number output
This item enables the specification of whether the sequence number is to be output and, if so, the
output format to be used.

NOTE
The sequence number is not to be output in the subprogram.

(7) Nozzle
This item enables the specification of the type and Z heights of a nozzle.
This setting is used to display a nozzle with the animation drawing function.
The animation drawing function can be used to display the operations of a wire and nozzle.
For details on the setting method, see "Parameter setting for preparing NC data" in "Chapter 17,
"Setting."
(8) Offset interference check
When an interference check is performed and when interference occurs, NC data excluding
interfering entities is created to prevent the wire from being caught in the workpiece by the wire
diameter offset.
• Performed
Specify whether to make an offset interference check.
If interference occurs, a warning is issued.
• Excluding interfering entities
Specify whether to create NC data that excludes interfering entities when the above check
detects interference.
When NC data is created with interfering entities excluded, a warning message indicating the
exclusion is displayed.

NOTE
1 The value specified in the machining condition settings is used as the offset
amount to perform the interference check. For correct checking, a correct
offset amount must be set. If no offset amount is set, an error occurs.
2 The interference check is made for the figure. Approach and escape
operations are not included.
3 Interference may or may not occur depending on the offset amount, so the same
subprogram cannot sometimes be output even for the same figure. Therefore,
when the interfering entities are removed, the same subprogram is not output
even for the same figure. Even when output of the same subprogram is partly
enabled for the same figure depending on the number of times, output of the
same subprogram is not performed.
4 If the exclusion of interfering entities causes the wire path to be divided or part of
the wire path to disappear:A warning is issued when only the check is made.An
error occurs when NC data is created.

- 116 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 10.NC DATA PREPARATION

NOTE
5 If the position to approach or the end position of open-area machining is
excluded by the interference check:A warning is issued when only the check is
made.An error occurs when NC data is created.
6 The interference check for a taper figure is performed only on the programmed
surface.
7 When the top and bottom planes of a 4-axis independent figure are parallel to
the X-Y plane, the interference check is performed for the top and bottom
planes.

10.3 OUTPUTTING NC DATA

File transfer tool will be stared by selecting the "NC data => Output of NC data last created" command
from the menu bar in the Execution list display window.
NC data can be transferred to Floppy disk or other units by this tool.
Another method is available for NC data transfer: Use of the floppy disk icon (data transfer
button) located at the right corner of the conversational window for NC data creation.

10.4 PRINTING NC DATA

To print NC data, select the "File => Print" command from the menu bar in the execution list display
window.

10.5 PRINTING MACHINING TIME ESTIMATES

To print machining time estimates, select the "File => Print" command from the menu bar in the
machining time estimate display window.

- 117 -
11.ITEMS TO BE SET
ON THE MACHINE FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

11 ITEMS TO BE SET ON THE MACHINE

PC FAPT CUT i prepares NC data assuming that it is used once all necessary preparations have been
made on the machine side. This chapter describes the settings that must be made on the machine side
prior to operations based on the NC data can be started.
Note that the settings to be made vary with the machining instruction given by PC FAPT CUT i.

CAUTION
The operation of the machine requires preparation in addition to that described in
this manual, including the preparation of the machine itself. Such preparation
falls outside the scope of this manual. This manual describes only those settings
required for the NC data prepared by PC FAPT CUT i. The user should refer to
the corresponding machine user's guides for an explanation of those other
settings and preparations that must be made on the machine side before starting
to use the machine. The user must always operate the machine with great care.

11.1 MOUNTING THE WORKPIECE ON THE TABLE

An accurate taper cannot be produced unless the distance between the programmed plane and the table
top is accurately specified. When performing taper cutting, adjust the height of the work-piece so that
the height of the programmed plane relative to the table top satisfies the expression given below. PC
FAPT CUT i prepares NC data on the program plane.
For details on the program plane and workpiece thickness setting, refer to Appendix B.

Program plane height relative to the table top =

(Program plane Z coordinate) - (table top Z
coordinate)

• Program plane Z coordinate

This is the Z coordinate of the program plane, set when the machining figure is created.
• Table top Z coordinate
This is the Z coordinate of the table top, set during machining instruction.

- 118 -
 11.ITEMS TO BE SET
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i ON THE MACHINE

11.2 CUTTING CONDITIONS

If AI cutting condition setting is used and the detail data of the condition are set and G10 output on the
“Setting of Setup information” is ON, a cutting condition set command is output as NC data.
Otherwise a cutting condition set command based on G10 is not output as NC data. In this case, cutting
conditions must be specified on the machine side.
The NC data includes a cutting condition number (S code), so a cutting condition corresponding to that
number must be specified. The output cutting condition number can be confirmed by the Cutting
Condition Setting.

NOTE
With the standard setting, the cutting conditions used in the first cut (roughing)
are also used for cutting-off.

11.3 OFFSET AMOUNTS

Note that the way in which offsets are handled differs considerably between roughing or finishing and
cutting-off.

(1) Offset amount for cutting-off

If the offset amount is set and G10 output on the “Setting of Setup information” is ON, a
G10-based offset data set command is output as NC data. Otherwise a G10-based offset set
command is not output as NC data, in much the same way as the cutting conditions. It must be set
on the machine side.
With the standard settings, if an offset data set command is output as NC data, the offset number (D
code) for cutting-off is 0. The offset data used for the first cut is also used for cutting-off.

(2) Offset amounts for the other cutting (roughing and finishing)
If the offset amount is set and G10 output on the “Setting of Setup information” is ON, a
G10-offset data set command is output as NC data. Otherwise a G10-based offset set command is
not output as NC data, in much the same way as the cutting conditions. This must be set on the
machine side.
The NC data includes an offset number (D code), so that an offset amount corresponding to that
offset number must be specified. The output offset number can be confirmed by the Cutting
Condition Setting.

11.4 AI CORNER CONTROL

If [AI Corner Control] at [Function Selection] for machining instruction is set to [Use], AI corner control
must also be specified on the machine side.

11.5 AUTOMATIC WIRE FEED (AWF) MECHANISM

If [Auto Wire Feed] at [Function Selection] for machining instruction is set to [Use], an AWF control
command is output as NC data. If the AWF mechanism is disabled on the machine side, however, it
does not work.

- 119 -
11.ITEMS TO BE SET
ON THE MACHINE FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

11.6 OPTIONAL SKIP

NC data may contain the following AWF control commands.
M50: Wire cut by the AWF feature
M60: Wire feed by the AWF feature
If it is necessary to confirm the wire path without cutting a workpiece, however, the AWF feature must be
disabled. So, PC FAPT CUT outputs optional skip commands for each command block to allow the
AWF commands to be enabled and disabled. To disable an AWF operation, turn on the corresponding
optional skip before running the machine. Conversely, to enable an AWF operation, turn off the
corresponding optional skip command.

11.7 OPTIONAL STOP

NC data may contain an optional stop M code (M01) to temporarily stop the machine for preparations of
cutting-off to be made.
The optional stop can be switched between on and off, but it should be set to on before starting actual
machining.
The off mode of the optional stop command should be used only when the wire path is to be confirmed
without performing cutting work piece. Before starting actual machining, however, check the NC data
carefully.

11.8 MACHINING START POINT

PC FAPT CUT i prepares NC data on the assumption that the wire is initially positioned to the machining
start point manually. Always position the wire to the specified machining start position before starting the
machine.

11.9 OTHERS
As mentioned at the beginning of this chapter, actual operation of the machine and other work require
preparation in addition to that described in this manual. Refer to the corresponding machine manuals for
an explanation of those preparations not covered by this manual.
As described in the "Preface", the system software may be upgraded to satisfy users' demands for
improvements to PC FAPT CUT i, before the manual is revised. In such a case, the Readme file delivered
on the system disk provides related information. Always familiarize yourself with this information before
starting to use the machine.

- 120 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 12.PLOTTING

12 PLOTTING
This chapter explains how drawings, such as part figures and tool paths, are output to the plotter.

12.1 PLOTTER SETTING

It is necessary to set up the plotter before it can be used to output drawings.

(1) Plotter set menu selection

Select [File => Plotter Setting] from the menu bar
(2) Origin setting
After loading the plotter with paper, specify the origin of the plotter by selecting the bottom left
corner or center of the paper. The location of the origin varies with individual plotters. Refer to the
applicable manual of the plotter being used.
(3) Compensation setting
The true origin of the plotter may not coincide with the bottom left corner or center of the paper
mounted using [Origin Set]. This deviation must be set as the compensation.

(4) Pen setting

All pens to be loaded on the plotter must be registered by specifying their speed. The units used for
the pen speed vary with the model of the plotter. Refer to the manual provided with the plotter
being used.
(5) Least command increment setting
It is necessary to specify the distance the plotter actually moves with a travel amount of 1. If the
least command increment of the plotter is 0.025 mm, and the figure dimensions are in units of mm,
0.025 must be selected.
(6) Setting whether to enable the drawing range restriction function
If the plotter supports a command (IW command) for setting a drawing area, selecting its check box
causes drawings to be output within a selected drawing range.
(7) Arc output setting
It is possible to specify whether to use the arc command of the plotter or PC FAPT-based linear
approximation to draw arcs on the plotter. With some plotters, drawings based on linear
approximation are of higher quality than those produced with the plotter arc command.
(8) Termination of setting
Clicking the [OK] button completes setting.

- 121 -
12.PLOTTING FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

12.2 PROCEDURES
Select “File => Plot Out” from the menu bar.

(1) Selecting a form size

Select a form size from the displayed list, or type in the form size data. When the form size data is
typed in, the entered data can be registered in the list by clicking the Addition button. To delete
any unnecessary data from the list, select the data from the list and click the Remove button. Form
size data must be entered according to the following format.
Form standard name Form size name Width*Height -dx / dy Unit
The form standard name, form size name, and units can be specified using any characters other than
an asterisk "*." The form size must be specified in the same units as the figure(s) to be output. dx
represents the horizontal margin. dy represents the vertical margin.

(2) Specifying Rotation

Place a check on Rotate Axis to rotate the drawing direction through 90 degrees.

(3) Setting the scale factor

When auto scale is selected, the figure(s) within the plotting range are plotted in the drawable area of
the form, the maximum scale factor being applied. When free scale is selected, type in a scale
factor.
(4) Setting a line pattern length
Enter the lengths of the line patterns, using the same units as those used to specify the form size.

- 122 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 12.PLOTTING

(5) Setting form division

When No division is selected, the figure in the plotting range is plotted using the entire form.
When 2 Divisions is selected, the figure in the plotting range is plotted within the specified division
of the two form divisions.
When 4 Divisions is selected, the figure in the plotting range is plotted within the specified division
of the four form divisions.

(6) Specifying the plotting range

Click the Last Position button to output a plot in the same range as the previous plotting range (for
example, when repeating the output of the most recently plotted figure). Click the Plotting Range
button to specify a different plotting range. Specify a plotting range within the drawing window by
means of dragging.

(7) Position offset

When a new plotting range is specified, the plotting position is initially specified as follows:
When the origin of the plotter is at the lower left corner of the form, the lower left position of the
drawing area corresponds to the lower left position of the plotting area.
When the origin of the plotter is at the center of the form, the center of the drawing area corresponds
to the center of the plotting area.
Press the Position Offset button to adjust the plotting position. In the drawing window, the plotting
range is indicated by a dotted line, while the form position is indicated by a broken line. Drag the
form position to adjust its position.

- 123 -
12.PLOTTING FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(8) Plot out

Clicking OK causes the File Transmission Tool window to appear. For details of the related
procedures, see the chapter on file transmission. The file transmission tools can transform data into
files or output data to the plotter.

- 124 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

13 CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

13.1 CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
The following subsections provide a general description of CAD data input/output.

13.1.1 CAD Data

Usually, a CAD/CAM system cannot read the internal data of a dissimilar system directly, nor write data
to such a system.

PC FAPT CUT i

To overcome this problem, several CAD data formats have been placed in the public domain. (Data in
such a CAD data format is referred to as CAD data in this manual.)
Data can be transferred between dissimilar systems, therefore, by converting that data to CAD data.
Typical CAD data formats include IGES and DXF.

PC FAPT CUT i

13.1.2 Handling of CAD Data by This System

PC FAPT CUT i can input and output general CAD data.

Input of CAD data

PC FAPT CUT i

data created using another CAD system can thus be loaded into this system.
This data can be handled in the same way as figure entities created using PC FAPT CUT i, and be used
for the creation of part figures and others.
Drawing data created using another CAD system can be utilized as is, eliminating the need to create
figure entities and thus reducing the lead time.

- 125 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Output of CAD data

PC FAPT CUT i

Figure entities created using PC FAPT CUT i can be output as data for use in another CAD system.
Parts figures, tool paths, and so on, can also be output as figure entities.

NOTE
In CAD data input/output, data may not be converted completely. Any entities
that cannot be converted perfectly are converted to the closest approximation.

13.1.3 Handling CAD Data Efficiently

When data created using another CAD system is to be loaded into PC FAPT CUT i, note the following to
ensure the optimum efficiency of the subsequent tasks.

(1) Creating data in another CAD system

(a) Save entities into separate layers according to their purpose.
By saving figure entities in one layer and other entities (such as dimension lines, drawing
frames, and comments) into other layers, that data to be used for machining can be extracted
into PC FAPT CUT i more easily.
(b) Delete hatching.
Hatching requires a very large number of entities, adversely affecting the speed of entity search,
redrawing, etc.
Delete as much hatching as possible.
(c) Output high-precision CAD data.
Low-precision CAD data produces coordinate value errors when converted.
To create data having the best precision possible, output CAD data using as many digits (as
high a precision) as possible.

(2) Operating procedure after CAD data has been loaded into the system
(a) Extract only data that is required for machining by deleting all other entities.
PC FAPT CUT i supports layers and groups.
There are several methods of deleting unnecessary entities from the converted data, such as the
deletion of entities from one layer at a time, from one group at a time, and deleting one entity at
a time.
(b) For low-precision CAD data
Problems may occur due to errors that arise when using converted data.
When entity gap errors occur, any problems may be handled by changing the allowable entity
gap tolerance.
If this does not solve the current problems, or if it gives rise to other problems, entities must be
corrected or redefined.
See also the next item.
(c) When circles/arcs become ovals/oval arcs by DXF conversion:
• When DXF conversion applies a matrix to circles/arcs and these become ovals/oval arcs,
DXF conversion is not performed.
- 126 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

• When a matrix is applied to circles/arcs in polylines, parts other than oval/oval arc are
converted. However, they become incomplete polylines, and subsequent operation is not
assured. If parts other than oval/oval arc are used, cancel the polyline by Disassemble
Polyline/ Polygon before use.

13.1.4 Precision of CAD Data

If the data created on another CAD system is converted to “polyline/polygon” in PC FAPT CUT i trace
mode (Note1) or if a machining profile is created on the basis of CAD data, an error may occur or correct
results may not be obtained. This occurs if the CAD data has a precision error not permitted by PC
FAPT CUT i.
The following is the reason why an attempt to convert CAD data to “polyline/polygon” in trace mode
may result in an error.
PC FAPT CUT i performs figure processing by considering the calculation error (permissible error) width
to some extent. Depending on the figure or dimensions, the expected calculation error width may be
slightly exceeded, resulting in a failure to obtain the desired results.
If this permissible error is increased more than necessary, high-precision processing becomes impossible.
As standard, therefore, judgment is made with an error of 0.0001 millimeter.
Figures created on PC FAPT CUT i can be judged with this permissible error without any problems. If
the precision of the CAD data is not sufficient, judgment may fail.
If this occurs, take the following measures:
You can connect entities by selecting them during machining profile creation and, therefore, you need not
connect them in advance in trace mode.
If, however, it is clear that adjacent entities intersect or overlap, modify the entities in advance so that
they can be connected, by extending/shortening the entities, cutting them, or taking other appropriate
operation.
During machining profile creation, the user-settable permissible error is used for connection judgment.
You can change the permissible error through the appropriate setup (Note2).
The standard setting is 0.01.
(This value is greater than the permissible error in trace mode.)
Note, however, that increasing this value too much may cause problems to arise.
* During machining profile creation, set the “Re-connect” mode to “Yes” before selecting a machining
profile.

NOTE
1 Trace mode is effective to creating a contour figure by tracing a rough sketch.
2 You can set the permissible error in "continuity tolerance, machining figure
creation" of "polyline/polygon" in the window displayed by selecting [Parameter
Setting] in the [Setting] menu on the menu bar then [Figure Operation].

- 127 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

13.2 DXF FILE INPUT/OUTPUT

The following subsections explain DXF file input/output.
See next section “Conversion specification for DXF file input/output” for the entities covered by this
software.

13.2.1 Overview of DXF

DXF(Drawing Interchange Format) is a data format used for drawing data conversion.
Usually, the extension ".dxf" is appended to a DXF file name.
Data in a DXF file consists of the following sections:

a) HEADER section
Contains general information relating to the drawing.

b) CLASSES section
PC FAPT CUT i doesn’t refer this section.

c) TABLES section
Contains the contents of each of the tables listed below:
• Line type table (LTYPE)
• Drawing layer table (LAYER)
• Character style table (STYLE)
• View table (VIEW)
• User coordinate system table (UCS)
• Viewport setting table (VPORT)
• Dimension style table (DIMSTYLE)
• Application identification table (APPID)
• Block record (BLOCK_RECORD)

d) BLOCKS section
Contains the data constituting each block of the drawing.

e) ENTITIES section
Contains drawing data, including instructions to reference block definitions.

f) OBJECTS section
PC FAPT CUT i doesn’t refer this section.

g) END OF FILE

- 128 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

13.2.2 DXF File Input

The following illustrates the flow of the DXF file input procedure.

Normal operation of this system

Start of DXF file input

DXF-Input menu

Cancel
DXF file selection

Cancel Setting
Selection of either input or setting Conversion method
End Setting

Cancel Input (specification of new

Input processing input/additional input)

End of input (input result display)

1) Start of DXF file input

Select “File => Exchange CAD data => DXF-Input” from the menu.

2) DXF file selection

Select the DXF file to be input.
Clicking “Cancel” cancels the input procedure and returns the PC FAPT CUT i to normal operation.

3) Selection of either input or setting

Specify whether to start input or set the conversion method.
• “Input” button
Starts input.
• “Cancel” button
Cancels inputting and returns the PC FAPT CUT i to normal operation.
• “Setting...” button
Displays the window used to set the conversion method.
Using this window, set the conversion method to be used for input.
• “Help” button
Displays help messages relating to input.

- 129 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

4) Setting the conversion method

When the Setting... button is clicked in 3, the window used to set the conversion method appears.
For details of the items to be set, see the next subsection.

5) Input processing
During input processing, a gauge indicating the progress of the processing is displayed.
To cancel the processing, click the Cancel button. This returns the PC FAPT CUT i to normal
operation.

6) Display of input results

When input processing terminates normally, the number of entities converted, number of layers, the
time required for the conversion, and other information are displayed.

13.2.3 Setting the Input Conversion Method

The conversion method applied to input can be set.
The following explains the items that can be set.

1 New input/Additional input

Specify whether the figure database should be initialized before starting input of the DXF file.
New input: Initializes the figure database before reading the file.
This is equivalent to inputting the DXF file after selecting “File => New” from the menu.
Additional input: Does not initialize the figure database before reading the file.
The figures defined in the DXF file are read and added to the current figure database.

[New input]
DXF

DXF input

PC FAPT CUT i New PC FAPT CUT i PC FAPT CUT i

[Additional input]
DXF

DXF input

PC FAPT CUT i New PC FAPT CUT i PC FAPT CUT i

- 130 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
2 Setting a group name
A name can be assigned to a group of settings for conversion methods 4 through 7, as explained
below.
Conversion method
setting group 2

Conversion method
setting group 1

Default conversion method

setting group
Heavy-line entity conversion method 0
Layer conversion method 0
Line type conversion method 0
Color conversion method 0

A group of settings for a previously used conversion method can be easily reused by assigning a name to
the group.
It is convenient if the names assigned to the conversion method setting groups reflect the system that
outputs the DXF files to be converted, or the intended use of the data to be converted.

3 Heavy-line entity (TRACE) conversion method

The conversion method applied to heavy-line entities defined in the DXF file can be specified.
Because heavy-line entities are not supported by PC FAPT CUT i, they are converted by means of
either of the following methods:

[Center line]
Converts heavy lines to center lines.

DXF PC FAPT CUT i

(The figure indicated by the broken line is for explanation purposes only. It is not included in the
actual data.)

[Outline]
Converts heavy lines to polygons representing outlines.
DXF PC FAPT CUT i

- 131 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

4 Layer
The conversion method applied to the layers in which entities exist can be specified.

[Multiple layers to one layer ]

[Layer no. ]
[Return to start layer ]
[Layers to layer ]
[Start layer no. ] [Remain at last layer ]
• [Multiple layers to one layer]
Makes entities defined in different layers of the DXF file correspond to one layer in PC FAPT CUT
i.

DXF PC FAPT CUT i

Layer 3
Layer 2 Layer No.
Layer 1

• [Layer no.]
Specifies the number of the layer where the converted entities will be placed.

• [Layers to layer]
Makes the entities defined in different layers of the DXF file correspond to different layers in PC
FAPT CUT i.

DXF PC FAPT CUT i

Layer 3 Layer 3
Layer 2 Layer 2
Layer 1 Layer 1

Start layer

• [Start layer no.]

Specifies the number of the first of the series of layers in which the converted entities will be placed.
When Layers to layer is selected, either of the following can be specified as the method to be applied
once the last layer has been used.

• [Return to start layer]

When the last layer number of this system is reached, subsequent layers are made to correspond to
the layers of PC FAPT CUT i starting from the start layer again.
DXF PC FAPT CUT i
Layer 4

Layer 3 Last layer

Layer 2 Layer 2

Layer 1 Layer 1
Start layer

- 132 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

• [Remain at last layer]

When the last layer number of this system is reached, all remaining layers are made to correspond to
the last layer.

DXF PC FAPT CUT i

Layer 4

Layer 3 Last Layer

Layer 2 Layer 2

Layer 1 Layer 1

Start Layer

5 Line type
Specifies the line type of PC FAPT CUT i to which each line type specified in the DXF file should
be converted.
A line type can be specified for each of the main 25 line types that can be specified in a DXF file, as
well as for other line types.

6 Color
Specifies the color number of PC FAPT CUT i to which each color number specified in the DXF file
should be converted.
A color number can be specified for each of color numbers 1 through 255 that can be specified in a
DXF file.

7 Curve approximation tolerance

Ellipse and Spline Entities are converted to the “Polyline/Polygon” of PC FAPT CUT i.
DXF curve will be represented by plural line segments and arcs.
Tolerance for this approximation has to be set. If the tolerance is smaller, the number of division
will be more and smother curve will be get.
DXF curve will be converted into the series of arcs in the following case
DXF curve will be converted into the series of arcs when
• the curve is on a plane ( including tilted plane)
• the number of entities will be less than the approximation by line segments.
If the setting below is changed the curve will be approximated always by line segments.
Change the setting in the INI file (as standard “pcfaptcu.ini”) in the install folder.
DXF_approximatedByArc =1
↓
DXF_approximatedByArc =0

- 133 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

13.2.4 DXF File Output

The following illustrates the flow of the DXF file output procedure.

Normal operation of this system

Start of DXF file output

DXF file output menu

Cancel
Specify the name

Cancel Conv.
Selection of either output or Conversion method
setting setting
End
Output(specification of comment,
specification of output coordinate system)

Cancel
Output processing

End (display of result)

1) Start of DXF file output

From the menu, select “File => Exchange CAD data => DXF-Output”.

2) Output file name specification

Specify the name of the DXF file to be output.
Clicking the Cancel cancels the output procedure and returns the system to normal operation.

3) Selection of either output or setting

Select either the start of output or setting of the conversion method.
• “Output” button
Starts output.
• “Cancel” button
Cancels outputting and returns PC FAPT CUT i to normal operation.
• “Setting...” button
Displays the window used to set the conversion method.
In this window, set the conversion method to be applied to output.
• “Help” button
Displays help messages related to output.

- 134 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
4) Setting of the conversion method
When the Setting... button is clicked in 3, the window used to set the conversion method appears.
For details of the items to be set, see the next subsection.

5) Output processing
During output processing, a gauge indicating the progress of the output processing is displayed.
To cancel the processing, click the Cancel button. This returns this system to normal operation.

6) Display of conversion results

When the output processing terminates normally, the number of entities converted, the number of
layers, the time required for the conversion, and other information are displayed.

13.2.5 Setting the Output Conversion Method

The conversion method applied to output can be set. The following explains the items that can be set.

1 Comment
A comment can be added to the DXF file.
Enter the creator's name, company and position, and a comment if required.
A comment, if specified, has no effect on the DXF figure data.

2 Output coordinate system

The coordinate system used for the entities to be output to the DXF file can be selected.
• [World coordinates]
The coordinate values registered in the figure database are output directly as three-dimensional
data to the figure entity DXF file.
• [Coordinates of current window]
The figure entities are output to the DXF file as coordinate values in the coordinate system
displayed on the screen when output starts.
As a result, the figure entities are output to the DXF file as planar entities.

World coordinates

Y
X World coordinate

Coordinate of current window

Screen

- 135 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

3 Setting a group name

A name can be assigned to a group of settings for conversion methods 4 through 7, as explained
below.
Conversion method
setting group 2

Conversion method
setting group 1

Default conversion method

setting group

Method of line approximation for

ellipse 0
Layer conversion method 0
Line type conversion method 0
Color conversion method 0

A group of settings for a previously used conversion method can be easily reused by assigning a
name to the group.
It is convenient if the names assigned to the conversion method setting groups reflect the system to
which the converted DXF files are transferred, or the intended use of the data to be converted.

4 Line approximation for ellipse

When Coordinate of current window is selected as the coordinate system used to output figure
entities, circle and arc entities, viewed slantwise, are output to the DXF file as ellipses and parts of
ellipses.
PC FAPT CUT i approximates ellipses with fine line segments prior to outputting them.
• [Tolerance of line approximation for ellipse]
The allowable tolerance when an ellipse is approximated with fine line segments is referred to as the
line segment approximation tolerance. The ellipse is divided into fine line segments, such that the
distances between the ellipse and the line segments do not exceed this tolerance.

Tolerance

Line segment approximation

5 Output layer designation

Specifies whether entities existing in each layer should be output to the DXF file.
The following two layers can be designated.
• [Drawing layer]
Layer in which the figure entities created with the figure creation exist
• [Wire path layer]
Layer in which the tool paths drawn with NC Data Preparation exist
For each layer, one of the following output methods can be specified:
• [Output all]
The entities existing in the specified layer are output irrespective of whether the layer is visible
or invisible.
- 136 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

• [Not output]
The entities existing in the specified layer are not output, irrespective of whether the layer is
visible or invisible.
• [Visible entities only]
Whether entities are to be output is determined according to the current state of their layer.
That is, those entities existing in a layer are output provided the layer is visible. They are not
output if the layer is invisible.

6 Line type
Specifies the line type that can be specified in the DXF file to which each line type specified in PC
FAPT CUT i should be converted.
Each of the seven line types supported by PC FAPT CUT i can be converted to any of the main 25
line types that can be defined in a DXF file.

7 Color
Specifies the color number that can be specified in the DXF file, to which each of the 16 color types
used by PC FAPT CUT i is to be converted.
Each of the colors used by PC FAPT CUT i can be converted to any of color numbers 1 through 255
that can be defined in a DXF file.

13.3 DXF CONVERSION SPECIFICATIONS FOR DXF FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

13.3.1 DXF Input Conversion Specifications

The conversion specifications for DXF file input are explained on a section-by-section basis.

1) HEADER section
PC FAPT CUT i does not refer this section.

2) CLASSES section
PC FAPT CUT i does not refer this section.

3) TABLES section
DXF Description Handling by
Table entry PC FAPT CUT i
LTYPE Line type Ignored
LAYER Drawing layer Referred during
conversion
STYLE Character style Ignored
VIEW View Ignored
UCS User coordinate system Ignored
VPORT Viewport Ignored
DIMSTYLE Dimension style Ignored
APPID Application identification Ignored
BLOCK_RECORD Block record Ignored

If the "LAYER" table entry cannot be found (or if the TABLES section does not exist), layer
information cannot be obtained and, therefore, converted entities are allocated to one layer; Layers
to layer is ignored if specified for the input conversion method.

- 137 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

4) BLOCKS section
When the blocks written in the ENTITIES section are to be converted, they are converted using the
data in the BLOCKS section.
DXF Description Handling by
Table entry PC FAPT CUT i
BLOCK Block Converts by developing the
ENDBLK End of block entities in a block by block
insertion command

5) ENTITIES section
Figure data appears in the ENTITIES and BLOCKS sections.
In both of these sections, figure data is represented in the same way.
The following table lists the correspondence between the figure data before conversion and that after
conversion.
Entity type Description Representation in
PC FAPT CUT i
LINE Line segment Line segment entity
POINT Point Point entity
CIRCLE Circle Circle entity
ARC Arc Arc entity
TRACE Heavy line Polygon representing the outline; or
center line
SOLID Painted figure Polygon representing the outline
TEXT Character Not supported.
SHAPE User-defined character Not supported.
INSERT Block insert Inserted by developing the block
ATTDEF Character attribute definition Not supported.
ATTRIB Character attribute Not supported.
POLYLINE Polyline Polyline/polygon
VERTEX Polyline vertex --------------
Details Straight line Straight-line entity in polyline/polygon
Arc Arc entity in polyline/polygon
Fit curve Not supported.
Spline curve Approximation with polyline/polygon
Three-dimensional polygon Not supported.
mesh
SEQND End of polyline Polyline/polygon
3DFACE Three-dimensional face Polygon representing the
outline
VIEWPORT Viewport Not supported.
DIMENSION Dimension figure Not supported.
ELLIPSE Ellipse Polyline/Polygon
SPLINE Spline Approximated by line or arc.
LWPOLYLINE Optimized polyline Polyline/Polygon
Other Not supported.

6) OBJECT section
PC FAPT CUT i does not refer this section.

- 138 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

13.3.2 DXF Output Conversion Specifications

The conversion specifications for DXF file output are explained on a section-by-section basis.

1) HEADER section
Group code Description Entry in PC FAPT CUT i
$ACADVER Version Fixed to "AC1009," indicating GX-5, as the
version of the AutoCAD
drawing database
$CLAYER Drawing layer Number of the currently effective
number drawing layer
$ELEVATION Drawing plane height The current drawing plane height is output.
Fixed to 0 if the output coordinate system is
Coordinate of current window.
$UCSORG Drawing coordinate system origin The origin of the current drawing coordinate
system is output.
Fixed to "0, 0, 0" if the output coordinate
system is Coordinate of current window.
$UCSXDIR X axis of the The direction of the X axis of the current
drawing drawing coordinate system is output.
coordinate system Fixed to "1, 0, 0" if the output coordinate
system is Coordinate of current window.
$UCSYDIR Y axis of the The direction of the Y axis of the current
drawing coordinate system drawing coordinate system is output.
Fixed to "0, 1, 0" if the output coordinate
system is Coordinate of current window.
999 Comment Output system name "PCFAPT" and any
comment specified by the user in the setting
window are output.

2) TABLES section
Information relating to the current layers is output.
For the drawing layers, the numbers of the layers currently being used (a layer number being
generated for each layer name) and the display status of the layers (visible or invisible) are output.
No information is output for those layers for which output is not specified.
Other table entries (LTYPE, STYLE, VIEW, VPORT, and DIMSTYLE) are not output.
3) BLOCKS section
Groups and machining figures, as well as any entities which they contain, are output, together with
hierarchical structures.
Groups are output in the format that uses the syntax of the BLOCK and INSERT of DXF.
The group IDs used internally by this system are used for BLOCK names. If any group names
exist, they are output as comments.
Machining figures are output as normal group entities, machining information being removed before
the figures are output.
The entities and attributes that constitute groups and machining figures are the same as those
supported by the ENTITIES section.
4) ENTITIES section
Figure data appears in the ENTITIES and BLOCKS sections.
In both of these sections, figure data is represented in the same way.
The following table lists the correspondence between the figure data before conversion and that after
conversion.
Entity in Entity type Description
This system
Point POINT Point
Line segment LINE Line segment
- 139 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Entity in Entity type Description

This system
Circle CIRCLE Circle (if the normal vector of the circle is not parallel to
the Z axis of the world coordinate system, the projection
direction (210, 220, 230) is also output.)
If Coordinate of current window is selected and the
normal vector is not parallel to the Z axis of the coordinate
system, the circle is approximated with fine line
segments.
Arc ARC Arc (if the normal vector of the arc is not parallel to the Z
axis of the world coordinate system, the projection
direction (210, 220, 230) is also output.)
If Coordinate of current window is selected and the
normal vector is not horizontal to the Z axis of the
coordinate system, the arc is approximated with fine line
segments.
Group entity, Blank figure, BLOCK INSERT Block definition and block call
Parts figure
Polyline/polygon
Details All constituent POLYLINE 3D polyline and the definitions of its vertexes
entities are line VERTEX
segments.
All constituent POLYLINE 2D polyline and the definitions of its
entities are on the VERTEX vertexes
same plane.
Other than the BLOCK INSERT Block definition and block call
above
Fitting curve POLYLINE 2D polyline and the definitions of its
VERTEX vertexes

Each of the following entities are output with their attributes appended:
• Line type
• Color
• Property layer

13.4 IGES FILE INPUT/OUTPUT

The following subsections explain IGES file input/output.
See next section “Conversion specification for IGES file input/output” for the entities covered by this
software.

NOTE
This software covers the ASCII format files having 80 characters in one record
which follows the IGES(Initial Graphics Exchange Specification) of ANSI.

13.4.1 Overview of IGES

IGES is a data format used for drawing data conversion.
Usually, the extension ".igs" is appended to a IGES file name.
Data in a IGES file consists of the following sections:

a) Start section
Contains comments.

- 140 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
b) Global section
Environment where IGES file is made is described.
c) Directory Entry section
Type, attributes, etc., of entities are described.

d) Parameter data section

Definition data of each entities are described.

e) Terminate section
Number of each records above is described.

13.4.2 IGES File Input

The following illustrates the flow of the IGES file input procedure.

Normal operation of this system

Start of IGES file input

IGES-Input menu

Cancel
IGES file selection

Cancel Setting
Selection of either input or Conversion
setting method setting
End

Cancel
Input processing Input (specification of new
input/additional input)

End of input
(input result display)

1) Start of IGES file input

Select “File => Exchange CAD data => IGES-Input” from the menu.

2) IGES file selection

Select the IGES file to be input.
Clicking “Cancel” cancels the input procedure and returns the PC FAPT CUT i to normal operation.

3) Selection of either input or setting

Specify whether to start input or set the conversion method.
“Input” button
- 141 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Starts input.
“Cancel” button
Cancels inputting and returns the PC FAPT CUT i to normal operation.
“Setting...” button
Displays the window used to set the conversion method.
Using this window, set the conversion method to be used for input.
“Help” button
Displays help messages relating to input.

4) Setting the conversion method

When the Setting... button is clicked in 3, the window used to set the conversion method appears.
For details of the items to be set, see the next subsection.

5) Input processing
During input processing, a gauge indicating the progress of the processing is displayed.
To cancel the processing, click the Cancel button. This returns the PC FAPT CUT i to normal
operation.

6) Display of input results

When input processing terminates normally, the number of entities converted, number of layers, the
time required for the conversion, and other information are displayed.

13.4.3 Setting the Input Conversion Method

The conversion method applied to input can be set.
The following explains the items that can be set.

1 New input/Additional input

Specify whether the figure database should be initialized before starting input of the IGES file.
New input: Initializes the figure database before reading the file.
This is equivalent to inputting the IGES file after selecting “File => New” from the
menu.
Additional input: Does not initialize the figure database before reading the file.
The figures defined in the IGES file are read and added to the current figure
database.

• [New input]
IGES

IGES input

PC FAPT CUT i PC FAPT CUT i PC FAPT CUT i

New

- 142 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

• [Additional input]
IGES

IGES input

PC FAPT CUT i PC FAPT CUT i PC FAPT CUT i

2 Setting a group name

A name can be assigned to a group of settings for conversion methods, as explained below.
Conversion method
setting group 2

Conversion method
setting group 1

Default conversion method

setting group

Heavy-line entity conversion method 0

Layer conversion method 0
Line type conversion method 0
Color conversion method

A group of settings for a previously used conversion method can be easily reused by assigning a name to
the group.
It is convenient if the names assigned to the conversion method setting groups reflect the system that
outputs the IGES files to be converted, or the intended use of the data to be converted.

3 Layer
The conversion method applied to the layers in which entities exist can be specified.
• [Multiple layers to one layer]
Makes entities defined in different layers of the IGES file correspond to one layer in PC FAPT
CUT i.

DXF PC FAPT CUT i

Layer 3
Layer 2 Layer No.
Layer 1

• [Layer no.]
Specifies the number of the layer where the converted entities will be placed.
• [Layers to layer]
Makes the entities defined in different layers of the IGES file correspond to different layers in
PC FAPT CUT i.

- 143 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

DXF PC FAPT CUT i

Layer 3 Layer 3
Layer 2 Layer 2

Layer 1 Layer 1

Start layer

4 Line type
Specifies the line type of PC FAPT CUT i to which each line type specified in the IGES file should
be converted.
A line type can be specified for each of the main 25 line types that can be specified in a IGES file, as
well as for other line types.

5 Color
Specifies the color number of PC FAPT CUT i to which each color number specified in the IGES
file should be converted.
A color number can be specified for each of color numbers 9 through 255 in addition to 0 through 8
that can be specified in a IGES file.
Here the number 0 means that the sender didn’t specify the color.

6 Curve approximation tolerance

Ellipse and Spline entities are converted to the “Polyline/Polygon” of PC FAPT CUT i.
IGES curve will be represented by plural line segments and arcs.
Tolerance for this approximation has to be set. If the tolerance is smaller, the number of division
will be more and smother curve will be get.
IGES curve will be converted into the series of arcs in the following case
IGES curve will be converted into the series of arcs when
• the curve is on a plane ( including tilted plane)
• the number of entities will be less than the approximation by line segments.
If the setting below is changed the curve will be approximated always by line segments.
Change the setting in the INI file (as standard “pcfaptcu.ini”) in the install folder.
IGES_approximatedByArc =1
↓
IGES_approximatedByArc =0
7 Convert dimension entities
Whether Annotation Entities of IGES, for example, Dimension entities, Notes will be converted or
not is set.

8 Specifying the scale factor for drawings and applying coordinate conversion
In IGES, figures are generally defined in the world coordinate system. If these figures are output to
a drawing, they are usually multiplied by the scale factor. In IGES, a coordinate conversion matrix
for this purpose is defined.
Specify whether to convert the figure by applying this matrix.
If the converted figure is not balanced with the size of the frame of the drawing, try turning this
setting on.
If this setting is turned on, the figure is multiplied by the scale factor for drawings and converted
into a figure of a size different from the actual one. This is not suitable to the purpose of NC data
creation.

9 Convert the entities composing surface

Convert dependent entities composing the surface if the dependent entities are the supported entity
type like, Line/Arc/Spline/etc.

- 144 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

NOTE
1 Surface itself is not converted.
2 Surface or entities to be covered
118 Ruled Surface Entity
122 Tabulated Cylinder Entity
141 Boundary Entity
142 Curve on parametric surf Entity
143 Bounded surface Entity
144 Trimmed(parametric) surf Entity

Surfaces below are excluded(non-support type)

114 Parametric Spline Surface Entity
120 Surface of Revolution Entity
128 Rational B-spline Surface Entity
140 Offset Surface Entity
190 Plane Surface Entity
192 Right Circular Cylindrical Surface Entity
194 Right Circular Conical Surface Entity
196 Spherical Surface Entity
198 Toroidal Surface Entity
etc.,

10 Convert as much as possible even if the dependent entity of non-support type

Convert dependent entities composing the non-support surface type if the dependent entities are the
supported entity type like, Line/Arc/Spline/etc.

NOTE
Attributes of the original surface(non-support type) is not inherited as the
conversion is executed without considering the information of the original
surface.
For example, if the Transferring was designated to the original surface, it might
be ignored or wrong entities might be converted, etc. As the correct conversion
is not guaranteed, please check the result carefully by all means.

- 145 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

13.4.4 IGES File Output

The following illustrates the flow of the IGES file output procedure.

Normal operation of this system

Start of IGES file output

IGES file output menu

Cancel
Specify the name

Cancel Conv.
Selection of either output or Conversion method
setting setting
End
output(specification of comment,
specification of output coordinate system)

Cancel
Output processing

End (display of result)

1) Start of IGES file output

From the menu, select “File => Exchange CAD data => IGES-Output”.

2) Output file name specification

Specify the name of the IGES file to be output.
Clicking the Cancel cancels the output procedure and returns the system to normal operation.

3) Selection of either output or setting

Select either the start of output or setting of the conversion method.
• “Output” button
Starts output.
• “Cancel” button
Cancels outputting and returns PC FAPT CUT i to normal operation.
• “Setting...” button
Displays the window used to set the conversion method.
In this window, set the conversion method to be applied to output.
• “Help” button
Displays help messages related to output.

- 146 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
4) Setting of the conversion method
When the Setting... button is clicked in 3, the window used to set the conversion method appears.
For details of the items to be set, see the next subsection.

5) Output processing
During output processing, a gauge indicating the progress of the output processing is displayed.
To cancel the processing, click the Cancel button. This returns this system to normal operation.

6) Display of conversion results

When the output processing terminates normally, the number of entities converted, the number of
layers, the time required for the conversion, and other information are displayed.

NOTE
Circles and arcs are processed as different entities in PC FAPT CUT i.
Number of circles and arcs are separately displayed though those are not
discriminated by IGES.

13.4.5 Setting the Output Conversion Method

The conversion method applied to output can be set. The following explains the items that can be set.

1 Comment
A comment can be added to the IGES file.
Enter the creator's name, company and position, and a comment if required.
A comment, if specified, has no effect on the IGES figure data.

2 Output coordinate system

The coordinate system used for the entities to be output to the IGES file can be selected.
• [World coordinates]
The coordinate values registered in the figure database are output directly as three-dimensional
data to the figure entity IGES file.
• [Coordinates of current window]
The figure entities are output to the IGES file as coordinate values in the coordinate system
displayed on the screen when output starts.
As a result, the figure entities are output to the IGES file as planar entities.

World coordinates

Y
X World coordinate

Coordinate of current window

Screen

- 147 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

3 Setting a group name

Conversion method
setting group 2

Conversion method
setting group 1

Default conversion method

setting group

Method of line approximation

for ellipse 0
Layer conversion method 0
Line type conversion method 0
Color conversion method 0

A name can be assigned to a group of settings for conversion methods, as explained below.
A group of settings for a previously used conversion method can be easily reused by assigning a name to
the group.
It is convenient if the names assigned to the conversion method setting groups reflect the system to which
the converted IGES files are transferred, or the intended use of the data to be converted.

4 Line approximation for ellipse

When Coordinate of current window is selected as the coordinate system used to output figure
entities, circle and arc entities, viewed slantwise, are output to the IGES file as ellipses and parts of
ellipses.
PC FAPT CUT i approximates ellipses with fine line segments prior to outputting them.
• Tolerance of line approximation for ellipse
The allowable tolerance when an ellipse is approximated with fine line segments is referred to
as the line segment approximation tolerance. The ellipse is divided into fine line segments,
such that the distances between the ellipse and the line segments do not exceed this tolerance.

Tolerance

Line segment approximation

5 Output layer designation

Specifies whether entities existing in each layer should be output to the IGES file.
The following three layers can be designated.
• [Drawing layer]
Layer in which the figure entities created with the figure creation exist
• [Wire path layer]
Layer in which the tool paths drawn with NC Data Preparation exist
For each layer, one of the following output methods can be specified:
• [Output all]
The entities existing in the specified layer are output irrespective of whether the layer is visible
or invisible.
• [Not output]
The entities existing in the specified layer are not output, irrespective of whether the layer is
visible or invisible.

- 148 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

• [Visible entities only]

Whether entities are to be output is determined according to the current state of their layer.
That is, those entities existing in a layer are output provided the layer is visible. They are not
output if the layer is invisible.

6 Line type
Specifies the line type that can be specified in the IGES file to which each line type specified in PC
FAPT CUT i should be converted.
Each of the seven line types supported by PC FAPT CUT i can be converted to any of the main 25
line types that can be defined in a IGES file.

7 Color
Specifies the color number that can be specified in the IGES file, to which each of the 16 color types
used by PC FAPT CUT i is to be converted.
Each of the colors used by PC FAPT CUT i can be converted to any of color numbers 1 through 255
that can be defined in a IGES file.
Color number 0 of IGES cannot be used.
Color number 9 through 255 can be accepted when the receiver has expanding the color number.

13.5 CONVERSION SPECIFICATION FOR IGES FILE

INPUT/OUTPUT

13.5.1 IGES Input Conversion Specifications

The conversion specifications for IGES file input are explained on a section-by-section basis.

1) Start section
PC FAPT CUT i refers this section, but there is no meaning for conversion.
An error will occur if the format does not follow the IGES.
2) Global section
PC FAPT CUT i refers this section, but there is no meaning for conversion.
An error will occur if the format does not follow the IGES.
3) Directory Entry section and Parameter Data section
PC FAPT CUT i refers these sections and converts entities.

a) Items in Directory Entry section

1st record
Representation in
No. Descriptions
PC FAPT CUT i
1 Entity Type Number Referring
2 Parameter Data Referring
3 Version Number / Structure Ignored
4 Line Font Pattern Ignored
5 Level Converted as layer
6 View Ignored
7 Transformation Matrix Referring
8 Label Display Associativity Ignored
Referring only
9 Status Number
independent/dependent
10 Sequence Number Referring

- 149 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

2nd record
Representation in
No. Descriptions
PC FAPT CUT i
11 Entity Type Number Referring
12 Line Weight Number Ignored
13 Color Number Referring
14 Parameter Line Count Ignored
15 Form Number Referring
16 Reserved
17 Reserved
18 Entity Label Ignored
19 Entity Subscript Number Ignored
20 Sequence Number Referring

b) Geometric Entities
Entity Representation in
Entity Type
Type No. PC FAPT CUT i
Converted to circle/arc.
100 Circular Arc Converted to circle if the arc with
angle of 360.
Converted to Polyline/Polygon when
102 Composite Curve it consists of line segments and
arcs.
Only in case Ellipse/Ellipse arc,
converted to Polyline/Polygon
104 Conic Arc
approximating by fine line segments
and fine arcs.
Sequential points : Converted to
each point
106 Copious Data
Sequential line segments/Polygon :
Converted to Polyline/Polygon
108 Plane Not supported.
110 Line Converted to line.
Converted to Polyline/Polygon by
112 Parametric Spline Curve approximated to fine line segments
and fine arcs.
114 Parametric Spline Surface Not supported.
116 Point Converted to point.
118 Ruled Surface Not supported.
120 Surface of Revolution Not supported.
122 Tabulated Cylinder Not supported.
Entities are converted
124 Transformation Matrix
on coordinates.
125 Flash Not supported.
Converted to Polyline/Polygon by
Rational B-Spline Cure
126 approximated to fine line segments
Polynominal type
and fine arcs.
Converted to Polyline/Polygon by
Rational B-Spline Cure
126 approximated to fine line segments
Rational type
and fine arcs.
128 Rational B-Spline Surface Not supported.
130 Offset Curve Not supported.
140 Offset Surface Not supported.
142 Curve on a Parametric Surface Not supported.
144 Trimmed Parametric Surface Not supported.

- 150 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

NOTE
It is not possible to convert surface, but it is possible to convert the entities
composing the surface. See 13.4.3 Setting the input conversion method

c) Annotation Entities
Entity Representation in
Entity Type
Type No. PC FAPT CUT i
106
Copious Data Center line Supported.
(From20,21)
106
Section Not supported.
(From31,38)
106
Witness Line Supported.
(From40)
202 Angular Dimension Supported.
204 Curve Dimension Not supported.
206 Diameter Dimension Supported.
208 Flag Note Not supported.
210 General Label Supported.
212 General Note Supported.
213 New General Note Not supported.
The figure of the arrowhead can only
214 Leader(Arrow)
be a triangle with an open bottom.
216 Linear Dimension Supported.
218 Ordinate Dimension Not supported.
220 Point Dimension Not supported.
222 Radius Dimension Supported.
228 General Symbol Not supported.
230 Sectioned Area Not supported.

NOTE
To convert dimensional entities, you must change the setup first. See the
explanation of the setup of the input conversion method.

d) Structure Entities
Entity Representation in
Entity Type
Type No. PC FAPT CUT i
308 Subfigure Definition Supporting the followings
Converts the developed entities to
402 Associativity Instance
exact figures
Converts the developed entities to
408 Singular Subfigure Instance
exact figures
Converts the developed entities to
408 Singular Subfigure Instance
exact figures
e) OTHERS
PC FAPT CUT i does not support.

4) Terminate section
PC FAPT CUT i refers the number of records on each section at the Terminate section.

- 151 -
13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

13.5.2 IGES Output Conversion Specifications

The conversion specifications for IGES file output are explained on a section-by-section basis.

1) Start section
PC FAPT CUT i outputs the comment made by the user.

2) Global section
Representation in
No. Descriptions
PC FAPT CUT i
1 Parameter delimiter character Default (,)
2 Record delimiter character Default (;)
Outputs the file name without an
3 Product identification from sending system
extension.
4 File name Outputs the file name with a path.
FANUC PC FAPT CUT i Edition
5 Native system ID.
xx.x
6 IGES version number Omitted
7 Number of binary bits for Integer representation Omitted
Maximum power of ten representable in a Single-precision
8 Omitted
floating point number on the sending system
Number of significant digits in a Single-precision floating point
9 Omitted
number on the sending system
Maximum power of ten representable in a Double-precision
10 Omitted
floating point number on the sending system
Number of significant digits in a Double-precision floating point
11 Omitted
number on the sending system
12 Product identification for the receiving system Same as the Sender’s model ID
13 Model space scale 1.
Units flag
14
1: Inch, 2: mm Outputs the same unit as the MTF
Units name files.
15
1: 4HINCH, 2: 2HMM
16 Maximum number of line weight gradations 1.
17 Width of Maximum Line weight in units 1.
Date and time of exchange file generation
18 Date of the IGES file will be output.
15HYYYYMMDD.HHMMSS
19 Minimum user-intended resolution 0.0001
20 Maximum coordinate value of the model 400 inch or 10000 mm.
21 Name of author Outputs as it is
22 Author’s organization Outputs as it is
23 IGES version 5
24 Standard 0
25 Date the model was created or last modify Omitted
26 Application protocol Omitted

- 152 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 13.CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT
3) Directory Entry section and Parameter Data section
The conversion specifications for IGES file output are explained on a “PC FAPT CUT i entity”
basis.
Entity on PC FAPT IGES
CUT i Entity number Contents
Point 116 Point
Plural points 106 Copious data
(format umber 2)
Line 110 Line
Circle/Arc 100 Circle
• Transformation Matrix (entity number 124) will be also
output when the normal vector of Circle/Arc is not
parallel to the Z axis of the world coordinate.
• Linear path (entity number 106, format 11) will be
output approximating by fine line segments, if it is
output by “Coordinate displayed on a window” and
normal vector is not parallel to that coordinate Z axis.
Polyline/Polygon 102 Composite curve
Curve fitting 102 Composite curve
Group entity Output by developing to the entities above.
Machining figure

The following attributes will be output together with the entities above.
• Line type
• Color
• Layer (“Level” in case IGES)

4) Terminate section
PC FAPT CUT i outputs the number of records on each section.

- 153 -
14.FILE TRANSFER FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

14 FILE TRANSFER
14.1 FUNCTION OUTLINE
The file transfer function outputs drawing data to a plotter and transmits NC data to an external device. It
is also used to delete or rename files.

14.1.1 Application Software

Two types of application software are provided for file transmission. They are the File Transmission Tool
and the File Transmission Manager.
The File Transmission Tool is used to determine the file to be transmitted, the device to which that file is
to be transmitted, and how the transmission is to be executed. These settings are made via a dialog
window and registered in the File Transmission Manager schedule as a transmission job.
The File Transmission Manager executes registered jobs sequentially according to the schedule. Other
applications can be executed while a file is being transmitted.

14.1.2 Devices to Which Data can be Transmitted

Data can be transmitted to the following devices via the RS-232C serial port:
• Plotter
Plotter manufactured by FANUC or any HP-GL compatible product (Note 1)
• Paper tape reader/punch
FANUC PPR etc.
• NC unit
NC unit manufactured by FANUC or any unit using an equivalent protocol
• External memory unit
FANUC Handy File or PROGRAM FILE Mate
• Personal computer and peripherals
Those conforming to the protocols described later

NOTE
Plotters that use the HP-GL2 commands cannot be used.

14.1.3 Data Format That can be Transmitted

Data to be transmitted to the plotter must conform to HP-GL format. Data that can be transmitted to an
external device is text-format data, such as NC data, in ASCII, ISO, or EIA code.

14.1.4 Transmission Protocols

Protocols for serial communication, free run, and start-stop synchronization are supported. Flow control
can be achieved by using Xon/Xoff or hardware.

14.1.5 File Operation Functions

The following operations can be performed on those files stored on the personal computer (both on the
hard disk and floppy disks) and on those files stored in an external memory unit manufactured by
FANUC (Handy File or PROGRAM FILE Mate):

- 154 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 14.FILE TRANSFER

• Displaying a file list

• Deleting or renaming files, designating read-only files, and designating read/write permitted files
• Operation by specifying the names and numbers of files stored on an external memory unit

14.2 ACTIVATING THE FILE TRANSMISSION TOOL

14.2.1 Activation Using the PC FAPT CUT i Output Function

Executing the plot out function or NC data output function of PC FAPT CUT i automatically activates the
File Transmission Tool. In this case, however, the data files that can be output are limited to those
related to the figures and NC data created by PC FAPT CUT i. Also, the file operations described in
Section 14.1.5 cannot be applied.
The following shows an example of the plot out operation:

1 From the menu, select “File => Plot Out”.

2 Specify the range of data to be plotted out and other required settings. Then, click “OK”.

3 The File Transmission Tool is automatically activated.

The defaults for the file to be transmitted, the device to which the file is to be transmitted, and how
the transmission is to be executed have already been set.

14.2.2 Activating Only the File Transmission Tool

Double-click the File Transmission Tool icon in the PC FAPT CUT i group window of the Program
Manager. Any data file and device can be specified. Also, the file operations described in Section
14.1.5 can be performed.
File Transmission Tool icon:

- 155 -
14.FILE TRANSFER FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

14.2.3 Activating the File Transmission Manager

The File Transmission Manager is usually activated automatically by activating the File Transmission
Tool. Once activated, keep it minimized to an icon until it is to be used.

14.3 FILE TRANSMISSION TOOL SCREEN

14.3.1 Menus
The following menus are available:
(1) File menu
This menu is used to send and receive data files and to terminate the File Transmission Tool.
(2) Device Select menu
This menu is used to select the device to which the file is to be transmitted, to register external
devices, to specify transmission conditions, and to cancel device registration.
(3) Options menu
This menu is used to specify the following:
Whether transmission results are to be checked and whether an alarm is to be issued to warn of file
overwrite (when a FANUC external memory unit is being used)
Whether a TV check is to be performed when outputting NC data to a file
Whether the contents of the specified transmission operation are to be checked and modified before
transmission
(4) Help menu
This menu is used to obtain information about how to use the File Transmission Tool, and also to
display its version.

14.3.2 File Specification Areas

The file specification areas display information relating to the device and files. These areas are used to
specify the files to be transmitted or manipulated.
A list of files can be specified. File names may be specified by using wild cards.
For an explanation of the basic file specification procedure, refer to the Windows documentation.
- 156 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 14.FILE TRANSFER

• File specification area 1

This area is used to specify files stored on the personal computer.
• File specification area 2
This area displays information related to the selected device. If the selected device supports file
operations, the files to be manipulated can be specified in this area.

14.3.3 Buttons
The following buttons are displayed:
• Send button
Starts the sending of data to the selected device.
• Receive button
Starts the reception of data from the selected device.

NOTE
The display of this button may be suppressed, depending on the device being
used.

• Delete button
Used to delete a file.
• Clear button
Deletes all the files currently displayed in the list. In the case of the Handy File, the floppy disk is
initialized.
• Rename button
Used to rename a file.
• Read-only button
Used to change the file attribute to read-only.
• Read/write button
Used to change the file attribute to read/write enabled.
• Refresh button
Displays the latest list data in the file specification areas.

14.3.4 Operation Guide

Provides operation guidance.

14.4 OPERATING PROCEDURE

14.4.1 Selecting the Device and Setting the Transmission

Conditions
First, select the device to which data is to be transmitted and set the transmission conditions.
When using the currently selected device and conditions, this step can be skipped.
For details of how to specify the transmission conditions, see section 14.6.

- 157 -
14.FILE TRANSFER FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

14.4.2 Specifying Files

Specify the files to be transmitted.
If the sending device supports the specification of either the source or destination file, specify the source
file.
Multiple files can be specified. Select multiple files from the list or specify a wild card in the file name.
(This step can be skipped when PC FAPT CUT i has already specified the files to be transmitted.)

14.4.3 Selecting a Command

Click desired command button, such as Send, Receive, or Delete.
(This step can be skipped when PC FAPT CUT i has already output the files.)

14.4.4 Changing the Contents of the Transmission Operation

The contents of the transmission operation are displayed as shown below. The contents of the display
can be changed as required.

- 158 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 14.FILE TRANSFER

(a) Discontinuing processing

To discontinue the transmission or manipulation of a file or files:
1 Select the file or files from the list.
2 Click the Discontinuance button.
(b) Move
To change the order in which the files will be transmitted:
1 From the list, select the file to be moved.
2 Click the Move Before or Move After button.
3 Select the file before or after which the file selected in step 1 will be placed.
(c) Specify File Name
This is used to specify either a destination file name, or the new file name when renaming a file.
The destination file name is usually the same as that of the source file. (Note that the destination
file name may be modified because of limitations imposed on the file name length or on the
characters that can be used.) To specify a file name:
1 Select a file from the list.
2 Click the “Specify File Name” button.
3 Enter a new file name.
4 Click “OK”.
(d) Destination Directory
This is used to specify a destination directory. All listed files are transmitted to the specified
directory. To specify a destination directory:
1 Click the “Destination Directory” button.
2 Enter the name of the destination directory.
3 Click “OK”.

14.4.5 Starting Transmission

Click “OK”.

14.4.6 Checking the Transmission Status

When transmitting files to an internal device, the transmission status can be checked by referring to the
displayed list.
When the error check option has been specified, the results of transmission are automatically displayed
and error messages are output in the event of any errors occurring.
When transmitting files to an external device, the File Transmission Manager window displays the
registered transmission jobs and their status. Check whether the jobs are registered in the list. Also,
the job execution results can be checked.
- 159 -
14.FILE TRANSFER FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

The following shows an example of the File Transmission Manager screen displaying the transmission
status:

Displayed items:
(a) Device names
(b) File names
(c) Amount of data transmitted
(d) Send or receive
(e) Transmission status
• Before transmission: Blank
• After transmission has started: Start
• While data is being sent: Expected end time
• While data is being received: Average receiving speed
• When transmission has ended: Complete
After checking the transmission status, click the Stop button.

14.4.7 Ending the Transmission Operation

1 A message appears asking whether the same files are to be transmitted to another device. Click the
Yes or No button.

2 Select “File => Exit” from the File Transmission Tool menu.
(This step can be skipped when the File Transmission Tool has been automatically activated by PC
FAPT CUT i. In this case, the File Transmission Tool automatically terminates.)
3 While the File Transmission Manager is performing file transmission, select “Manager =>
Minimize”. The File Transmission Manager window is minimized to an icon, but file transmission
continues.
Once all files have been transmitted, select “Manager => Exit”.
- 160 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 14.FILE TRANSFER

14.5 OUTLINE OF PROCESSING FOR EACH FUNCTION

14.5.1 Send
1 Select the device to which data is to be sent.
2 Specify the source file in file specification area 1.
3 Click the Send button.
4 If files can be specified for the device to which data is to be sent, specify the destination file name.
When transmitting data to an internal device, a specific drive and directory can be specified so that
all files will be transferred to that directory.
5 Change the file transmission order or discontinue the transmission if necessary.
6 Click “OK” to start transmission.
7 Check the transmission status by referring to the list displayed by the File Transmission Manager.
8 Terminate the operation from the Manager menu.

14.5.2 Receive
1 Select the device from which data is to be received.
2 If files can be specified for the device from which data is to be received, specify the name of the file
from which data is to be received. Otherwise, specify the name of the file in which the received
data will be stored.
3 Click the Receive button.
4 When a file from which data will be received has been specified, specify the name of the file in
which the received data will be stored. A specific drive and directory can be specified so that all
files will be received to that directory.
5 Change the file transmission order or discontinue transmission if necessary.
6 Click “OK” to start transmission.
7 Check the transmission status by referring to the list displayed by the File Transmission Manager.
8 Terminate the operation from the Manager menu.

14.5.3 Delete
1 When the file to be deleted is stored on an external device, specify that device. When it is stored
on an internal device, this step can be skipped.
2 Select the file to be deleted in the file specification area.
3 Click the Delete button.
4 Cancel the deletion if necessary.
5 Click “OK” to start deletion.
6 Check the deletion results by referring to the list displayed by the File Transmission Manager.
7 Terminate the operation from the Manager menu.

14.5.4 Clear
1 When the files to be deleted are stored on an external device, specify that device. When they are
stored on an internal device, this step can be skipped.
2 Click the Clear button.
3 Click “OK” to start deletion.
4 Check the deletion results by referring to the list displayed by the File Transmission Manager.
5 Terminate the operation from the Manager menu.

- 161 -
14.FILE TRANSFER FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

14.5.5 Rename
1 When the file to be renamed is stored on an external device, specify that device. When it is stored
on an internal device, this step can be skipped.
2 Select the file to be renamed in the file specification area.
3 Click the Rename button.
4 Enter a new file name.
5 Cancel renaming of the file if necessary.
6 Click “OK” to start renaming.
7 Check the results by referring to the list displayed by the File Transmission Manager.
8 Terminate the operation from the Manager menu.

14.5.6 Read-Only and Read/Write

1 When a file whose attribute is to be changed is stored on an external device, specify that device.
When it is stored on an internal device, this step can be skipped.
2 Select the file whose attribute is to be changed in the file specification area.
3 Click the Read-Only or Read/Write button.
4 Cancel file attribute change if necessary.
5 Click “OK” to change the file attribute.
6 Check the results by referring to the list displayed by the File Transmission Manager (this is possible
only for files stored on an external device).
7 Terminate the operation from the Manager menu.

14.5.7 Refresh
Clicking the Refresh button displays the latest data in the file specification areas.

14.6 SETTING TRANSMISSION CONDITIONS

14.6.1 Setting Procedure

This procedure is necessary whenever a device is used for the first time. Create and install a setting file
for the device. Then, register the device in the list of regularly used devices.

(1) Creating a setting file for a new device

1 Select the Device Select menu.
2 Select “File, Plotter, or Other Device” from the menu. When File is selected, the following
steps can be skipped.

- 162 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 14.FILE TRANSFER
3 Click the Add button.

4 Install one of the standard device files.

Select a device from the List of Devices, then click the Install button.

5 Select an equivalent device from the installed device list, then click the Setting button.
6 Set the communication condition.
For details, see Section 14.6.4.
7 Set the transmission control.
For details, see Section 14.6.5.
8 Set the reception control.
For details, see Section 14.6.6. (When devices is Plotter, this step can be skipped).
9 Save the settings.
Return to the Setting screen, then click the Save As button. Enter a new name, then click
“OK”.

- 163 -
14.FILE TRANSFER FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

10 Install the setting file.

Select the file from the List of Devices, then click the Install button (this operation is the same as that
performed in step 4).
11 From the list, select the device to be added, then click “OK”.

12 From the device list, select the device to be used, then click the Close button.

(2) Changing the device to be used

1 Select the Device Select menu.
2 Select Plotter or Other Device from the menu, according to the device type.
3 From the device list, select the device to be used. Then, click the Close button.
(3) Changing the communication condition
1 Select the Device Select menu.
2 Select Plotter or Other Device from the menu, according to the device type.
3 Select the device from the list, then click the setting button.
4 Change the communication condition.
5 Click “OK”.
6 From the device list, select the device to be used. Then, click the Close button.
(4) Deleting a device from the list
1 Select the Device Select menu.
2 Select Plotter or Other Device from the menu, according to the device type.
3 Select the device from the list, then click the Remove button.
4 From the device list, select the device to be used. Then, click the Close button.

- 164 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 14.FILE TRANSFER

14.6.2 Specifying the Device and Plotter

Install the setting file for the device, then select the device from the list.

• Setting button
Used to set the communication conditions, transmission control, and reception control.
• Install button
Used to install the device file selected from the List of Devices. The installed device name,
connected port name, and setting file name are displayed in the Installed Device list.
• Remove button
Used to delete devices from the Installed Device list.
• List of Devices
This list contains the setting files that can be installed. Select the device to be installed from
this list.
• Installed Device list
This list contains the installed device names. Select the device to be added to the list of
devices to be used.

14.6.3 Standard Setting Files

The following setting files are provided as standard:
(a) plotter.cmm
For the plotter
(b) robocut.cmm
For the FANUC ROBOCUT series
(c) fanuc_io.cmm
For FANUC external memory units (Handy File and PROGRAM FILE Mate)
(d) ppr.cmm
For the paper tape reader/punch (FANUC PPR etc.)
(e) pcaux.cmm
For the personal computer

14.6.4 Setting The Communication Conditions

• Unit Name
Specify the name of the device to be connected. A device name can consist of up to 16
alphanumeric characters.

- 165 -
14.FILE TRANSFER FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

• File can be specified

Check this item if a FANUC external memory unit (Handy File or PROGRAM FILE Mate) is to be
used.
• Port
Specify the name of the port through which connection is to be made.
• Data Length
Specify the number of bits contained in a one-character data packet.
• Stop bit
Specify a space between characters.
• Parity
Specify a bit that is attached to each data packet to enable the detection of transmission errors.
• Baud Rate
Specify the transmission speed at which data will be sent to the connected device.
• Flow Control for Receiving
Specify the method of flow control to be used for data reception. This control temporarily
suspends data transmission from the connected device if the receive buffer becomes full.
• Flow Control for Transmitting
Specify the method of flow control to be used for data transmission. This control monitors the
connected device to determine whether it is capable of receiving data and, if necessary, temporarily
suspends data transmission to the device.
• Xon
Specify the code used to request the transmission of data. This code is either a hexadecimal code
("0x" plus two digits) or a decimal code (Numerals only).
• Xoff
Specify the code used to suspend the transmission of data. This code is either a hexadecimal code
("0x" plus two digits) or a decimal code (Numerals only).
• Load
Specify this item to load communication conditions from a previously saved file.
• Save As
Specify this item to save the currently specified communication conditions to a file.
• Transmission Control
Specify this item to switch to the page on which the conditions for data transmission can be set.
• Reception Control
Specify this item to switch to the page on which the conditions for data reception can be set.

14.6.5 Setting the Transmission Control Conditions

• Data Code
A character code system can be selected.
• EOB Code
It is possible to set an end code for a data block (line) to be transmitted. If the data code is an
arbitrary character, it must be specified using a hexadecimal code ("0x" and two digits), a decimal
code (numerals only), or character ("character").
• TV Check
A space code for a TV check can be inserted into a data block.
• Feed
If a file directed to paper tape contains a feed mark, a feed command is output. The feed mark can be
attached when PC FAPT CUT i creates NC data.
• EOF
If the file to be transmitted has a file end code (EOF), it is output.
• Transfer interval
An area used to temporarily store transfer data is called a buffer. It is possible to specify the interval
at which PC FAPT sends transfer data to the Windows transmission buffer. Usually, this value can
be left as is. If data transfer fails even at lower baud rates, either increase the transfer interval or
- 166 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 14.FILE TRANSFER
reduce the buffer size, described below. Increasing the transfer interval amounts to reducing the
transfer speed.
• Buffer size
It is possible to specify the size of the transmission buffer mentioned above. Usually, this value can
be left as is. If data transfer fails even at lower baud rates, either reduce the buffer size or increase
the transfer interval, described above. Reducing the buffer size amounts to reducing the transfer
speed.
• Timeout
Specify the maximum period that is allowed to elapse while the connected device is receiving halt
status.
• Preprocessing Data
Set the commands to be used before data transmission. A command consists of a combination of a
hexadecimal code ("0x" plus two digits), a decimal code (consisting only of digits), and a character
string (consisting only of characters), each delimited by a comma (,).
• Postprocessing Data
Set the commands to be used after data transmission. A command consists of a combination of a
hexadecimal code ("0x" plus two digits), a decimal code (consisting only of digits), and a character
string (consisting only of characters), each delimited by a comma (,).
• Reception Control
Switch to the page on which the conditions for data reception can be set.
• Communication Condition
Switch to the page for saving communication conditions to a file.

14.6.6 Setting Reception Control Conditions

• Data Code
Select the character code.
• Starting Code
Specify Effective as the Starting Code when data is not to be written to the file. Specify Write to
enable writing of the starting code to the file. This code consists of a combination of a hexadecimal
code ("0x" plus two digits), a decimal code (consisting only of numerals), and a character string
(consisting only of characters), each delimited by a comma (,).
• Ending Code
Specify Effective as the Ending Code when data reception is to be stopped upon the reception of the
ending code. Otherwise, data reception is not stopped until a timeout occurs. Specify Write to
enable writing of the ending code to the fill. This code consists of a combination of a hexadecimal
code ("0x" plus two digits), a decimal code (consisting only of numerals), and a character string
(consisting only of characters), each delimited by a comma (,).
• EOB Code
Specify the code indicating the end of a transmitted data block (line).
When specified with a word, this code is either a hexadecimal code ("0x" plus two digits), a decimal
code (consisting only of numerals), or a character string (consisting only of characters).
• TV Check
Specify this item to detect TV check errors.
• Timeout
Specify the maximum period that is allowed to elapse while waiting to receive data.
• Preprocessing Data
Set the commands to be used before data reception. A command consists of a combination of a
hexadecimal code ("0x" plus two digits), a decimal code (consisting only of numerals), and a
character string (consisting only of characters), each delimited by a comma (,).
• Postprocessing Data
Set the commands to be used after data reception. A command consists of a combination of a
hexadecimal code ("0x" plus two digits), a decimal code (consisting only of numerals), and a
character string (consisting only of characters), each delimited by a comma (,).
- 167 -
14.FILE TRANSFER FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

• Transmission Control
Switch to the page on which the conditions for data transmission can be set.
• Communication Condition
Switch to the page for saving communication conditions to a file.

14.7 TRANSMISSION SCHEDULE MANAGEMENT

The File Transmission Manager supports functions for changing the transmission sequence specified in
the schedule for discontinuing data transmission.

14.7.1 Contents of The Screen

• Manager menu
Used to terminate the File Transmission Manager.
• Setup menu
Used to create a transmission condition setting file.
• Port box
Used to select the port for which a transmission schedule is to be displayed.
• On Error check box
Used to specify whether the next job is to be executed or whether transmission is to be temporarily
suspended upon the occurrence of a transmission error.
• Status list
Displays the transmission schedule in which registered jobs are listed in the specified sequence,
along with their current status. To change the schedule, change the positions of the pertinent jobs
in this list.
• Pause button
Used to temporarily suspend the execution of a job. Data transmission can also be suspended.
• Resume button
Used to resume the execution of a job that was previously suspended using the Pause button.
• Delete button
Discontinuance a specified job from the schedule.
• Up button
Raises the position of the specified job in the scheduled sequence.
• Down button
Lowers the position of the specified job in the scheduled sequence.

- 168 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 14.FILE TRANSFER

14.7.2 Changing the Schedule

• Suspending transmission
Clicking the Pause button temporarily suspends transmission.
• Resuming transmission
Clicking the Resume button resumes the transmission that was previously suspended.
• Specifying the job to be changed
Select a job from the status list.

• Discontinuing transmission
To discontinue transmission, select the associated job then click the Delete button.
• Changing the scheduled sequence
To change the job execution sequence specified in the schedule:
1 Select the job for which the schedule is to be changed.
2 To raise the job's position in the sequence, click Up.
To lower the job's position in the sequence, click Down.

14.7.3 Exiting the File Transmission Manager

To exit the File Transmission Manager, first select the Manager menu, then select either of the following:
• Minimize
Selecting Minimize allows another application to be executed while continuing transmission
according to the current schedule. The File Transmission Manager is reduced to an icon.
• Exit (Discontinuance of the job)
Selecting Exit cancels the current schedule and forcibly terminates transmission.

14.8 EXAMPLE TRANSMISSION PROCEDURES

14.8.1 Transmission to and from the CNC

(a) Reception using the FANUC on-line cable
1 Set the CNC transmission conditions. The specified conditions must be the same as those
specified for the paper tape reader (PPR).
2 Select the transmission device and transmission conditions by using the File Transmission
Tool.
3 Start the transmission (reception) of data by using the File Transmission Tool.
- 169 -
14.FILE TRANSFER FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

4 Refer to the Status List to verify that transmission has started.

5 Start transmission (punching) within the specified time
(one minute) by using the CNC.
6 Check the transmission results in the Status List.

(b) Transmission using the FANUC on-line cable

1 Set the CNC transmission conditions. The specified conditions must be the same as those
specified for the paper tape reader (PPR).
2 Select the transmission device and transmission conditions by using the File Transmission
Tool.
3 Start the transmission (reading) of data by using the CNC.
4 Start transmission by using the File Transmission Tool.
5 Check the transmission results in the Status List.

(c) Transmission or reception using the cross cable

1 Set the CNC transmission conditions. The specified conditions must be the same as those
specified for the paper tape reader (PPR).
2 Select the transmission device and transmission conditions by using the File Transmission
Tool.
3 Start the transmission or reception of data by using the File Transmission Tool.
4 Check the Status List to verify that transmission or reception has started.
5 Start transmission within the specified time (one minute) by using the CNC.
6 Check the transmission results in the Status List.

NOTE
DNC operation cannot be performed during transfer with the CNC. Moreover,
there are limitations in case transfer operation via a cross cable, i.e., it must be
operated within the specified “time-over” time. A FANUC on-line cable, rather
than a cross cable, is recommended to be used for transfer.

- 170 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 15.DIMENSION MEASUREMENT

15 DIMENSION MEASUREMENT
15.1 DIMENSION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION
This function measures coordinates and distances related to figures. It can make measurements about
the following figures:
• Created figures
• Wire path

15.2 MEASURABLE DIMENSIONAL VALUES

The dimension measurement function can measure the dimensional values listed below. The
measurements can be displayed as required.
Coordinates
• Entity start/end point
• Intersection of two entities (neighborhood to the intersection is selected)
• Intersection of two entities (two entities are selected)
• Midpoint of an entity
• Center of a circle/arc
• Existing point
• Four points on a circumference
• Grid point
• Mouse pointer position
Distances
• Distance between two points (that is measured using the coordinates mentioned above)
• Distance between a point and entity
• Radius of a circle/arc
Angles
• Angle formed by two lines
Note
• Allows you to display comments and other information in the window display.

NOTE
1 The entities must previously be defined.
2 Measurement results are saved in a part file.
3 Depending on the type of measurement, some items permit only
two-dimensional measurement, while others permit three-dimensional
measurement as well. For details, see the explanation of each item.
4 Conduct measurement by specifying the XY plane as the figure creation plane.
On a plane other than the XY plane, measurement may not be conducted
properly.

- 171 -
15.DIMENSION MEASUREMENT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

15.3 ACTIVATING DIMENSION MEASUREMENT

To start dimension measurement, select [Auxiliary => Measure] from the menu bar. Detailed
descriptions of functions appear. Select the desired function from the submenu.

• Coordinate Values : Measures the coordinates explained in the previous section.

• Between Two Points : Measures the distance between two points.
• Distance of Point and Entity : Measures the shortest distance between a point and a line segment
or arc.
• Circle/Arc Radius : Measures the radius of a circle/arc.
• Angle of Two Line : Measure the angle formed two lines
• Notes : Allows you to display comments in the window display.
• Measured Information : Displays measured dimensions.

15.4 MEASURING COORDINATES

When [Auxiliary => Measure => Coordinate Values] is selected from the menu bar, the prompt area
changes as follows:

First select which coordinate type to measure.

Mouse pointer position

Grid display

Existing point
Center of a circle/arc

Midpoint of an entity

Intersection of two entities (two

entities are selected)

Intersection of two entities

(neighborhood to the intersection is
selected)
Entity start/end point

- 172 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 15.DIMENSION MEASUREMENT
Then select the displaying position of the result. Displaying position mode is automatically switched to
Mouse pointer mode.

Coordinates can be measured continuously. To obtain coordinates of the same type as before, pick
entities continuously. To obtain coordinates of different types, first select a type, then pick an entity.

NOTE
You can measure X and Y coordinates. You cannot measure Z coordinates.

15.5 DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO POINTS

When [Auxiliary => Measure => Distance between Two Points] is selected from the menu bar, the
prompt area changes as follows:

In the same way as in coordinate measurement, select a point type and pick the position to start
measurement. Then, you are asked to specify the measurement end position. Pick the end position.
Then, select the position at which measurement results are to be displayed. The mouse pointer mode is
automatically enabled for display position specification.

If the start and end positions differ in type, select the type of end position after picking the start position.
You can measure distances in succession.
You can specify a measurement type.
Select one from the following combo-box.

- 173 -
15.DIMENSION MEASUREMENT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

• 3D : Allows you to measure three-dimensional distances including all of the X, Y,

and Z components. It does not display dimension lines, but displays the
measurement results in another window on the right bottom of the screen.
When you specify this option, select 3D as the dimension specification at the left
corner of the position specification panel.
• 2D (Horizontal) : Measures the horizontal distance (in the horizontal direction in the drawing).
• 2D (Vertical) : Measures the vertical distance (in the vertical direction in the drawing).
• 2D (Parallel) : Measures the distance of the line parallel to the line joining two specified points
in the drawing.

15.6 DISTANCE BETWEEN POINT AND ENTITY

When [Auxiliary => Measure => Distance of Point and Entity] is selected from the menu bar, the prompt
area changes as follows:

Similarly to coordinate measurement, select the desired point type, then pick the point where
measurement is to start. The prompt area changes as follows:

Pick the entity whose distance from the previously picked point you want to determine.

You can measure distances in succession.

- 174 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 15.DIMENSION MEASUREMENT

Note for measuring the shortest distance

The distances measured are determined according to the relationships between the point and entity as
shown below:

• If the entity is a line segment:

It is impossible to measure
this distance.

• If the entity is an arc:

You can specify a measurement type.

Select one from the following combo-box.

• 2D: Measures and displays the length of the line resulting from projecting the line segment joining a
point and an entity on the drawing.
• 3D: Displays the three-dimensional distance of the line segment joining a point and an entity
without projecting it, on another window on the left bottom screen.

15.7 CIRCLE/ARC RADIUS

When [Auxiliary => Measure => Radius of Circle/Arc] is selected from the menu bar, the prompt area
changes as follows:

Select the measuring Circle/Arc. Then select the displaying position of the result. Displaying position
mode is automatically switched to Mouse pointer mode.

- 175 -
15.DIMENSION MEASUREMENT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

You can measure radii in succession.

[Obtaining a circle radius] [Obtaining an arc radius:

The arc center and the
point picked are connected.]

NOTE
If you measure a circle or arc not parallel to the figure creation plane, the
measurement results are displayed in another window on the left bottom of the
screen. If the figure creation plane is not the XY plane, it cannot be measured
properly.

15.8 ANGLES FORMED BY TWO LINES

When [Auxiliary => Measure => Angle of Two Lines] is selected from the menu bar, the prompt area
changes as follows:

Select two measuring lines. Then select the displaying position of the result. Displaying position
mode is automatically switched to Mouse pointer mode.

- 176 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 15.DIMENSION MEASUREMENT

The angle is drawn, starting at the position at which the first entity was picked.
You can measure angles in succession.
It is possible to select the type of an angle to be measured.
To switch between angle types, select the desired one from the following combo box.

NOTE
Depending on the font type, the superscript letter "o" representing degrees may
not be displayed properly.

15.9 NOTE
Comments, etc., can be shown on the drawing Window.
Select the displaying position. Selected position depends on the position designation mode.

Then key in the contents of notes and its angle.

If other fonts than the default one is required, please change it by [Modify].
- 177 -
15.DIMENSION MEASUREMENT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

15.10 DISPLAYING MEASUREMENTS

When [Auxiliary => Measure => Display Measured Information] is selected from the menu bar, the
prompt area changes as follows:

When an entity for which dimension measurement is finished is picked, the information about a figure
that contains the picked entity is displayed.

[If a coordinate entity is picked]

[If a distance entity is picked]

[If a radius entity is picked]

[If an angle entity is picked]

- 178 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 15.DIMENSION MEASUREMENT

15.11 SWITCH OVER OF THE ON/OFF OF MEASURED

INFORMATION
An entity holding the measured information will be made by measuring operation. If the information
display is not required, select [View => Measured Information]

Display is ON when the check mark appears at the left of “Measured Information” By the operation
above, the ON/OFF status toggles.
It turns to ON by itself when the measurement is performed.

15.12 SETTING
From the menu, select Auxiliary, Measure, and Setting in this order.
Enter settings related to dimension characters and lines.

[Drafting mode]
Mode is changed for displaying the size of dimension entities, considering dimension entities will be print
out or not.
When this mode is ON, it is considered that the dimension entities will be print out and the size of them
will be determined.
[Dimension character]
• Font name
Specify the Font name. Style, size cannot be set.
Character size.
Vertical text offset
• Distance between Characters and dimension lines. See figure below.
• Decimal places.
[Dimension lines]
• Arrow height.
Arrow width.
Extend past dimensions.
- 179 -
15.DIMENSION MEASUREMENT FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Offset from origin.

Extend past projections.

[Drawing attribute]
Color, Line type and Line width are set.
[Scale]
Same scale as the printing scale to be set. If it is not correct, the size of arrows and characters won't
be printed out properly. This setting is valid when [Drafting mode] is ON.
[Update]
Apply the current setting to the measured entities.

NOTE
These settings are not applied if you select 3D for "Between two points" and
"Distance of point and entity" and if, in "Circle/Arc Radius," the circle/arc is not
on a plane parallel to the figure creation plane.

15.13 FROM THE MENU, SELECT AUXILIARY, MEASURE, AND

MODIFY IN THIS ORDER.
From the menu, select Auxiliary, Measure, and Modify in this order.
Modify dimension characters and lines.

[Character]
Enables the modification of characters.
For details on the other items, see Setting.

NOTE
Any modifications to these items are not applied if you select 3D for *50 and *51
and if, in *52, the circle/arc is not on a plane parallel to the figure creation plane.

15.14 DRAWING MODE

From the menu, select Auxiliary, Measure, and Drawing Mode in this order.
Specify whether the size printed on a sheet is used as a the size of a dimension character and line or the
size displayed on the screen is used as it.

When drawing mode is turned on, the following items are enabled.

- 180 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 15.DIMENSION MEASUREMENT
[Character]
Enables the modification of characters.
For details on the other items, see Setting.

15.15 NOTES
The following notes apply if you select 3D for "Between two points" and "Distance of point and entity"
and if, in "Circle/Arc Radius," the circle/arc is not on a plane parallel to the figure creation plane.

1 The double-head arrow ↔ indicating a distance varies as the figure is enlarged/reduced.

2 The heads of the double-head arrow ↔ may become invisible depending on the display method
used.
3 The attributes (color and line type) of entities whose dimensions are to be measured are become
same as current attributes.

- 181 -
16.RENDERING FUNCTION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

16 RENDERING FUNCTION
The rendering function allows you to use graphic display to which hidden line removal and shading is
applied.
This function makes a machining figure easier to see and understand. During creation of NC data, it
adds reality to 3D animation display

16.1 HOW TO USE THE RENDERING FUNCTION

(1) Create the machining figure.
(2) Click [Rendering window] on the [View] menu.
A new window appears and the shaded machining figure will be shown by 3D.
(3) Various kinds of operations such as "View Direction", "Scaling", etc., are available on the [View]
menu of the new window.

NOTE
1 [Rendering window] on the [View] menu cannot be selected if the DirectX of the
proper edition is not installed or the machining figure is not made.
2 Punch and Die figures are not distinguished.
3 Wire and Nozzle motion will be shown on this window by 3D animation while
preparing NC data.
4 This window can be opened after NC data preparation has been started.

16.2 COMMANDS ON THE [VIEW] MENU

Command Description
View Direction Change the view direction of the figure.
Pan Move the position of the figure.
Zoom in/out Change the size of the figure.
Zoom Enlarges a specified rectangle by mouse to fill the window.
Auto scale Redraws the drawing window with automatic scaling to enable the entire figure to
be displayed.
Double Enlarges the drawing window display by a factor of 2.
Half Reduces the drawing window display by a factor of 2.
Auto-rotate/Pause Rotate the figure keeping the figure parallel to XY plane. Rotating operation goes
on by itself. Select this command again to stop the rotation.
Step Step the rotation mentioned above.
Reset and redraw Reset the rendering processing and redraw the window. The wire path drawn till
now will be erased.
Option Various kinds of settings like color, displaying methods, etc., are provided.

NOTE
The display of the current drawing window can be enlarged and reduced also by
using the scroll wheel of the mouse.

- 182 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 16.RENDERING FUNCTION

16.3 COMMAND DESCRIPTION

16.3.1 Change the View Direction of the Figure

(1) Click [View Direction] on the [View] menu.
(2) Drag the mouse toward the direction of rotation.
Rotation is performed keeping the figure parallel to the XY plane, by dragging the mouse in
Left/Right direction. Rotation is performed around the horizontal axis of the window, by dragging
the mouse in Up/Down direction.

NOTE
1 Arrow keys [Up], [Down], [Left], [Right] can be used instead of dragging by
mouse.
2 View Direction can be changed without selecting the menu, by pressing the
[Shift] key and [Ctrl] key simultaneously and operating the mouse or arrow keys.

16.3.2 Move the Position of the Figure

(1) Click [Pan] on the [View] menu.
(2) Drag the figure by the mouse to the required position.

NOTE
1 Arrow keys [Up], [Down], [Left], [Right] can be used instead of dragging by
mouse.
2 Displaying position can be changed without selecting the menu, by pressing the
[Shift] key and operating the mouse or arrow keys.

16.3.3 Change the Size of the Figure

(1) Click [Zoom in/out] on the [View] menu.
(2) Drag the mouse forward to reduce the size and backward to enlarge.
Operation imaging pushing or pulling the objects.

NOTE
1 Arrow keys [Up], [Down] can be used instead of dragging by mouse.
2 Size can be changed without selecting the menu, by pressing the [Ctrl] key and
operating the mouse or arrow keys.

16.3.4 Enlarges a Specified Rectangle by Mouse to Fill the Window

(1) Click [Zoom] on the [View] menu.
(2) Press the button of the mouse at a corner of the rectangle.
(3) Shift the mouse keep pressing the button (drag) to the diagonal position then release the button.

16.3.5 Display All Figures

(1) Click [Auto scale] on the [View] menu.

- 183 -
16.RENDERING FUNCTION FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

16.3.6 Enlarges the Drawing Window Display by a Factor of 2

(1) Click [Double] on the [View] menu.

16.3.7 Reduces the Drawing Window Display by a Factor of 2

(1) Click [Half] on the [View] menu.

16.3.8 Auto-rotate/Pause
(1) Click [Auto-rotate/Pause] on the [View] menu.
(2) The figure is keep on rotating. Select this command again to stop.

16.3.9 Step
(1) Click [Step] on the [View] menu.

16.3.10 Reset and Redraw

(1) Click [Reset and redraw] on the [View] menu.
NOTE
Reset the rendering processing and redraw the window. The wire path drawn
till now will be erased.

16.3.11 Option
(1) Click [Option] on the [View] menu.
(2) Set the required option on the dialog box for setting.

NOTE
Click [?] on the right-top corner of the dialog box then the click the item to see
the Help.
Following items can be set

Setting item
(a) General
• Background color
• Machining figure color
• Projection type
Perspective projection
Orthogonal projection
• Guidance message on status bar
(b) Cutting Animation
• Nozzle color and Semitransparent
• Wire color
• Additional drawing items
Wire path
Wire inclination angle
(c) Adapter and Accelerator
• Display adapter
• Enable/disable 3D Hardware Accelerator
- 184 -
 17.EXTRACT MACHINING
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i FIGURE FROM NC DATA

17 EXTRACT MACHINING FIGURE FROM NC

DATA
NC data is analyzed and machining figures are extracted .
Extracted figures are converted to the figure entities of PC FAPT CUT i.

17.1 OPERATION

17.1.1 Selection of NC Data

1) Click NC data select icon.
2) In [Look In], click the drive that contains the NC data file you want to select.
3) Double-click the folder that contains the NC data file you want to open.
4) Click the NC data file name, and then click [Open].
5) NC data is shown. Select the converting range if necessary.

NOTE
When the right NC data won't appear, select the type of the file from the list of
[Files of type].
If the main program and sub program are different files. Please select all related
files.

17.1.2 Specifying Converting Range

Click NC data display icon of Main window, if the content of NC data is not shown.

Specifying the portion not to be converted

1) Select the lines those are not to be converted.
2) Click [Don't Convert to figure] of [Edit] menu.
3) Minus (-) sign appears at the left of line numbers.

Canceling non converting range

1) Select the lines to be converted.
2) Click [Convert to figure] of [Edit] menu.

NOTE
The extracted figure's contour will be duplicated, if the NC data is made for
rough and skim cuts. To avoid this, please specify the proper converting range.
Non converting range is not converted but analyzing is done.
Converting range may contain non motion blocks.
The last operation can be canceled by [Undo] of [Edit] menu.

17.1.3 Execution of Extraction

1) Select how to input on Main window.
Select [New] to delete existing figures, select [Add] to retain existing figures.
2) Click Exec button.
3) Log information will appear after the conversion.
Check warnings or errors.
- 185 -
17.EXTRACT MACHINING
FIGURE FROM NC DATA FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

NOTE
Figures on the program plane will be extracted in case taper or different shape
patterns at top & bottom figure.

17.1.4 Display Log

Click NC data icon on the Main window.

NOTE
Log will appear automatically after execution by defalut setting.

17.2 SETTING

17.2.1 FANUC Format

Input unit
Set the least input increment of the original program.
Motion(Metric)
Initial value : 0.0001mm
Motion(Inch)
Initial value : 0.00001inch
Dwell
Not for extraction.
Not supported.
Angle(Taper angle)
Not for extraction.
Not supported.
Specifty without fail when the original program is not using decimal point.
Select proper value even when the decimal point is used, as this setting will be used to round the result of
intersection calculation , etc.

Initial value of G codes

When the modal G codes are not specified in the original progaram, the following G codes will be
assumed.
Group 01 : Motion
Select from G00/G01/G02/G03
Group 03 : Absolute/Incremental
Select from G90/G91
Group 06 : Inch/Metric
Select from G20/G21
Group 09 : Corner R
Select from G60/G61/G62/G63
Initial value of M15
Not for extraction.
Not supported.

- 186 -
 17.EXTRACT MACHINING
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i FIGURE FROM NC DATA

17.2.2 M Format
Input unit
Set the least input increment of the original program.
Motion(Metric)
Initial value : 0.0001mm
Motion(Inch)
Initial value : 0.00001inch
Dwell
Not for extraction.
Not supported.
Angle(Taper angle)
Not for extraction.
Not supported.
Specifty without fail when the original program is not using decimal point.
Select proper value even when the decimal point is used, as this setting will be used to round the result of
intersection calculation , etc.

Initial value of G codes

When the modal G codes are not specified in the original progaram, the following G codes will be
assumed.
Group A : Motion
Select from G00/G01/G02/G03
Group B : Corner mode
Select from G87/G88/G89
Group G : Inch/Metric
Select from G70/G71
Group H : Absolute/Incremental
Select from G90/G91

Others
Taper angle degree swithc
Not for extraction.
Not supported.
End point offset angle switch
Not for extraction.
Not supported.
Corner judgement angle
Not for extraction.
Not supported.

17.2.3 S Format
Input unit
Set the least input increment of the original program.
Motion(Metric)
Initial value : 0.0001mm
Motion(Inch)
Initial value : 0.00001inch
Dwell
Not for extraction.
Not supported.

- 187 -
17.EXTRACT MACHINING
FIGURE FROM NC DATA FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

Angle(Taper angle)
Not for extraction.
Not supported.

Specifty without fail when the original program is not using decimal point.
Select proper value even when the decimal point is used, as this setting will be used to round the result of
intersection calculation , etc.

Initial value of G codes

When the modal G codes are not specified in the original progaram, the following G codes will be
assumed.
Motion
Select from G00/G01/G02/G03
Inch/Metric
Select from G70/G71
Absolute/Incremental
Select from G90/G91
G74 pattern
Select from 0 to 7.

17.2.4 Se Format
Input unit
Set the least input increment of the original program.
Motion(Metric)
Initial value : 0.0001mm
Motion(Inch)
Initial value : 0.00001inch
Dwell
Not for extraction.
Not supported.
Angle(Taper angle)
Not for extraction.
Not supported.
Specifty without fail when the original program is not using decimal point.
Select proper value even when the decimal point is used, as this setting will be used to round the result of
intersection calculation , etc.

Initial value of G codes

When the modal G codes are not specified in the original progaram, the following G codes will be
assumed.
Group 0 : Motion
Select from G00/G01/G02/G03
Group 2 : Absolute/Incremental
Select from G90/G91
Group 3 : Corner mode
Select from G87/G88/G89

- 188 -
 17.EXTRACT MACHINING
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i FIGURE FROM NC DATA

17.2.5 Extracting Option

Extracting motion type

Motion of G00, Motion of G40/G41/G42

Extracted figure will be used to create the machining figure of PC FAPT CUT i, therefore the rapid
motion of G00 and approach motion of G40/G41/G42 are not necessary to be extracted usually.
Make this setting ON, for example, if the cutting path have to be checked.

Extract Start point of G41/G42 as Point entity

This can be set only when "Motion of G40/G41/G42" setting is OFF. By converting start point to
point entity, it can be used as the wire cut start point when giving machining instruction.

Other
Other motion of G01, G02, G03 are always converted.

17.2.6 Environment
Text editor
File path, starting parameters for text editor are set.
Example 1) Notepad of Windows
NOTEPAD.EXE %file%
Note) "%file%" is the file to be opened.
Example 2) Wordpad of Windows XP
"C:¥Program Files¥Windows NT¥Accessories¥wordpad.exe" %file%
"C:¥Program Files¥Windows NT¥Accessories¥wordpad.exe" %file%
Note) Normally, path to "EXE" is set.
Set the proper path. The above is an example.
Environment variable (characters in %) cannot be specified.
Example 3) Simple editor of PC FAPT CUT i
FPEDIT32.EXE /NC /L%line% %file%
Note) "%line%" is the line number to place the cursor at the beginning.

Display log after execution

By default setting, log is displayed after execution. If it is not necessary, make this setting OFF.

Data folders
Folder path to store data is set.
Folder path can be set for each NC data type.

- 189 -
18.SETTING FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

18 SETTING
Some standard PC FAPT CUT i operations and initial values in conversational windows can be
customized for the convenience of the operator. This chapter describes how to set the initial values in
dialog windows, and operating environments.

18.1 PARAMETER SETTING

18.1.1 Parameter Setting for View

Make the required settings for the view of coordinate systems and others.
From the menu, select “Setting => Parameter Setting => View Option”.
The Setting dialog window appears. Change the values as desired and click “OK”.
The following data items can be set:
(1) Drawing coordinate system
Specify whether to display the coordinate axes, origin mark, and drawing plane of the drawing
coordinate system, and set the display range.
(2) World coordinate system
Specify whether to display the coordinate axes and origin mark of the world coordinate system.
(3) Grid
Specify whether to display the grid and whether to turn off the display automatically, and set the
grid base point position, interval, and the number of mark spaces.
(4) Cursor coordinates
Specify whether to display cursor coordinates and when the display position is to be updated, and set
the coordinate system to be displayed.
(5) Background color
Set the background color of the drawing window. This is useful when the display is printed using
Print Screen.

18.1.2 Parameter Setting for Figure Operation

Make the required settings for figure operation.
From the menu, select “Setting => Parameter Setting => Figure Operation”.
The Setting conversational screen appears. Change the values as desired and click “OK”.
The following data items can be set:
(1) Figure Operating Area
Set the figure operating area with world coordinate values.
(2) Figure Calculating Range
Specify whether, when creating a new figure by referencing another figure, the effective range of the
referenced figure should be processed using the actual sizes of its entities or their extended sizes.
(3) Plural Possibilities of Figure Creation
Specify whether, when there are multiple figure creation possibilities, the system should
automatically select one according to the selected position of the referenced figure, or display all
possibilities so that the user can select one.
(4) Attributes for Plural Possibilities
Set the color and line type/width used to display multiple possibilities.
(5) Range of the Straight Line
Set the range of a line segment used when a straight line is created.
(6) Range of the Arc
Set the range of an arc used when an arc is created.

- 190 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 18.SETTING
(7) Assemble Polyline/polygon, by Trace Mode
Specify whether, when creating a polyline/polygon by tracing, the polyline/polygon should be
created at the same position as the referenced figure, or whether it should be projected onto the
drawing.
(8) Assembly Polyline /Polygon Creation, Machining Figure Creation
• Change of color for each figure
When performing Assemble Polyline/polygon, set the maximum permissible error used to
determine whether entities are continuous or not.
• Connection by entity correction
Even when entities are not crossed by extending these entities, they are corrected and
connected. Set the maximum correction amount used for the correction.
• Connection of partly overlapping entities
• Ignoring of overlapping entities
(9) Auto-redraw
Specify whether to perform automatic re-drawing [After Modifying], [After Moving], and [After
Deleting].
(10) Grouping of Plural Points
Specify whether multiple points should be created as a "group" or as individual points.
(11) Group Name
Specify whether, when creating multiple points as a group, the system should automatically assign a
"group name" to the points or prompt the user to assign one.
(12) Corner R/Chamfer (Object Entities)
Specify whether, when inserting a corner R/chamber entity between two entities, the two entities
should be extended or trimmed to the points where they meet the inserted entity, or be left as is.
(13) Corner R/Chamber (Corner Decision Angle)
Set the maximum angle for corners to be inserted when inserting corner Rs/chambers into
polylines/polygons as a batch.
(14) Offset (Interfering Entities)
Specify whether to remove an interfered element if interference occurs during offset.
(15) Offset (Extension of Entities)
Extension of entity is done or not is set when offset is performed.
Offset entity is extended if [Extension] is selected. Other corner interpolation mode will be applied if
the intersection is not found even after extending.
Corner cut will be applied if [Segment/Tolerance] or [Segment/Auto] is selected depends on the
result of the extension.
Moreover, the coefficient to obtain the length to the corner cut position when the corner cut is done
is set.
(16) Offset (Length to Corner Cut Position)
Set the factor used to determine the distance to the corner cut position when a corner is cut.
(17) Color of the figure made by tracing
It is set whether [Current attribute] or[Setting color] is used as the color of the figure made by
tracing.
(18) Color of broken entity
It is set whether [Current attribute] or[Setting color] is used as the color of the broken element.

18.1.3 Parameter Setting for Machining Figure Extracting from NC

Data
Select NC data type to be extracted.
From the menu, select “Setting =>Parameter setting=>Extract Machining Figure from NC data.
Dialog window appears. Select the NC data type and press OK.
The following item can be set.
• Type of NC data

- 191 -
18.SETTING FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

18.1.4 Parameter Settings Related to Machining Definition

The color of the drawings related to machining definition can be specified.
Select [Machining Instruction] from the [Set => Parameter Set] menu on the menu bar. A dialog box for
setting appears. In this dialog box, select the desired color, then click the [OK] button.
The following settings are supported.
(1) Approach and return
Specify the color of the approach paths for open- and closed-area machining and the color of the
return paths for open-area machining. Machining direction
(2) Specify the color of an arrow used to indicate the direction of open-area machining.
(3) Offset direction
Specify the color of an arrow used to indicate the offset direction of open-area machining.
(4) Extension
Specify the color of the line segments used to indicate extension paths for open-area machining.
(5) Type of surface roughness
Select Ry or Ra.
(6) Discharge gap
[Discharge gap] is used to calculate the cutting amount of Land portion automatically when the
cutting order of Die with relief figure is “Alternately(from relief)”.
(7) Corner compensation
Specify whether corner compensation is performed.
This function compensates excess or insufficient cutting caused at the corner by a bent wire. It is
recommended this function be used only when the cutting accuracy is insufficient.
This function is provided for the α-0iA/1iA and later models.
Compensation is performed if the radius of the corner is less than the specified value and if the
specified rotation angle is exceeded.

Enabling this setting allows the setting of the related items shown below.
• Cutting condition registration/confirmation window for setting the AI cutting conditions
Sets the amount of corner compensation.
• Cutting type window
Sets the maximum radius and minimum rotation angle to be compensated.

• Cutting instruction default value setting window (Other tab)

Sets the default values of the maximum radius and minimum rotation angle to be
compensated.
For details on setting these values, see help for operation settings of cutting instructions.
(8) User cutting condition
Specify whether registered cutting conditions are to be used.
If you want to select a cutting condition registered in the cutting condition registration window for
setting the AI cutting conditions, use this function.
Enabling this setting allows registered cutting condition data for setting the AI cutting conditions to
be used.
(9) Invisible machining figure is set to No cut
If "Invisible machining figure is set to No cut" is checked, "Cut or No cut" of Cutting order editing
window can be preset by "Show or not" of the Machining figure layer setting.
(10) Optional block skip
If "Optional block skip" is checked, optional block skip command output can be specified on
"Cutting order editing" window.
Default value of skip number can be set here.
(11) Insertion of NC command
If "Insertion of NC command" is checked, NC command can be output before and after each cut.
Default value of NC command can be set here.
Specify M codes, G codes, etc., directly for outputing NC command.

- 192 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 18.SETTING
Maximum 63 characters can be set respectively before and after each cut. Line feed is taken as two
characters.

18.1.5 Parameter Setting for Preparing NC Data

Set the colors and line types/widths for the tool paths used during NC data preparation.
From the menu, select “Setting => Parameter Setting => NC Data Preparation”.
The Setting conversational screen appears. Change the values as desired and click “OK”.
The following data items can be set:
(1) Color, Line type/Line Width
Specify the tool path (cutting feed, rapid traverse) and the color, line type, and line width of the wire
and nozzle.
(2) Execution list output item
Select which of the following items is to be output to the execution list:
• Line number
• NC data
• Absolute coordinate values
(3) Figure item
Wire diameter : Select whether or not to plot the wire path.
Wire/Nozzle : Specify whether to display the operation of the wire and nozzle.
(4) Wire inclination angle check
The inclination of the wire is monitored during NC data preparation, and if the limit is exceeded, a
warning message can be output to the execution list.
In addition, the maximum inclination angle of the wire can be checked using the machining
information list.
The standard setting enables this function.
To check and change settings, from the menu bar, select "Setting => Parameter Setting => NC Data
Preparation".

The following data items can be set:

[Warning display]
When you do not want to display warnings, uncheck this item.
[1st limit angle] and [2nd limit angle]
Set two limit angle steps. The 2nd limit angle must be greater than or equal to the 1st limit
angle. The maximum allowable value for each setting is 45.
If one step of checking is sufficient, set the same value in both items.
[Nozzle color at warning]
Set the nozzle color used when the warning state placed by the wire inclination angle check is
displayed in animated simulation.

NOTE
1 To enable animation of a line drawing, check the [Wire/Nozzle] setting of [Figure
item] in the same window as for this setting.
2 Animation in the rendering window is displayed regardless of this setting.
3 When the rendering window is displayed, animation of the line drawing is not
displayed.
4 Nozzle color in normal state in which no warning is issuedThe nozzle color used
for line drawing depends on the setting for each figure item that is located in the
upper part of the same window as for this setting.The nozzle color used for
rendering is set by [Option] in the rendering window.

- 193 -
18.SETTING FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

NOTE
5 Indication of results
• Indication of warning messages in the execution listIf a movement that
exceeds the set wire inclination limit angle appears, a warning message is
output to the execution list.The warning message is indicated immediately
before the movement that exceeds the limit angle.If movements result in the
same message successively, the message is displayed only immediately
before the first movement.
• Indication of maximum wire inclination angle in the machining information
listThe maximum inclination angle of the wire is indicated in the machining
information list. The unit is the degree.The maximum wire inclination angle
is indicated regardless of whether warning messages are displayed or not.

(5) Name of editor used for NC data editing

The Windows Notepad is set as the default setting. Change this setting when using other Editors.
(a) Leave at least one space after the Editor execution file name, and specify the text string
"%file%".
Example) Windows Notepad
Notepad %file%
(b) %file% is used as the parameter for selecting the file to be edited when the Editor is started up.
When using an Editor that has a parameter for selecting items other than files, refer to the
operating instructions for that Editor for details on the order in which the parameter is
specified.
(c) When the directory in which the Editor is set up is not specified in the command search path,
specify the command search path including that directory as follows:
Example)
C:\windows\notepad %file%
or
c:\windows\notepad.exe %file%
(6) NC data file extension
Specify the extension of the file to which to save the NC data that is created.
This setting is applied when you omit a file extension when specifying the file name when the NC
data is created.
(7) Taper output
Specify whether to manage the output of a taper command in a modal mode.
(8) NC data output
Select the protocol type used for NC data output.
• Ethernet
The program manager is used to transfer programs through the Ethernet.
• RS-232-C
The file transfer tool is used to transfer programs through RS-232-C.
When transferring the NC data to "α-0C/α-1C", "α-0B/α-1B", or "Others", select RS-232-C as
the protocol type.
When the program manager is not set up, RS-232C is set as the protocol type.
(9) Display of warnings
Specify whether to display warning messages in the following cases:
• Approaching to the corner portion or the end point of corner-R element.
• Escaping from the corner portion or the end point of corner-R element.
• Approaching from the opposite direction (In/Out) when cutting Punch/Die figure.

- 194 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 18.SETTING

18.1.6 Parameter Setting for Auto Saving

Set auto saving of a part file to ON or OFF, and also set the saving interval, etc.
From the menu, select “Setting => Parameter Setting => Auto Saving”.
The Setting dialog window appears. Change the values as desired and click “OK”.
The following data items can be set:
(1) Auto saving (ON or OFF)
Specify whether or not to automatically save the program to a part file.
In the default setting, auto saving is set to be performed. Do not cancel the auto saving setting except
when a system crash will not cause any problems.
(2) Auto saving interval
• Update interval
Select the file update interval in minutes.
• Postponed time
The save timing can be postponed if operations are frequently being performed when the file
update interval is reached. Specify the non-operation time for executing a save after no
operation is performed for a fixed time (in seconds).
(3) Prompt for auto saving (ON or OFF)
Specify whether or not to display a prompt when an auto save is performed.
(4) Save file name
Specify the part file for saving the program to.

18.2 STANDARD SETTINGS

18.2.1 Standard Settings Related to Involute Gears

Default values and values related to involute curve precision can be specified in the involute gear creation
dialog window.
Select "Involute Gear Creation" from the "Setting => Standard setting" menu of the menu bar. The
dialog window used for setting appears. In this window, specify the desired items then click the "OK"
button.
The following items are supported.
(1) Initial values of prompts in the dialog window
The meanings of the following items are the same as those in the involute gear figure creation dialog
window.
• Representation of the tooth size and input units for diametral pitch
• How to assign an addendum modification coefficient, and the addendum modification
coefficient used when "Direct" is specified
• Selecting an externally or internally toothed gear
• Pressure angle
• Top clearance coefficient
• Backlash amount
• Tip rounding/chamfering
• Root rounding/chamfering
• Rotation direction
• Selecting whole or partial gear
• Specifying a start point
• Specifying an end point
• Number of nodes on the involute curve

- 195 -
18.SETTING FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

(2) Number of nodes on the involute curve

To create an involute curve, eight nodes (typically) are obtained between the base and addendum
circles. Each interval is bridged smoothly with two arcs. The number of nodes affects the
precision of the involute curve. Change the number of nodes as required.

18.2.2 Standard Settings Related to Machining Profiles

The initial values displayed in the machining profile creation dialog window can be specified.
Select "Machining figure" from "Setting => Standard setting" on the menu bar. The dialog window used
for setting appears. Specify the desired items then click the "OK" button.
The following initial values can be specified.
(1) Dialog window default values
The meanings of the following items are the same as those in the machining profile creation dialog
window.
• Taper figure
• How to create multiple profiles
• Figure name
• Height (Z value)
When “Advanced setting” is selected, different setting items will be used. See chapter of
Machining figure creation.
(2) Three-dimensional drawing
Specify whether machining figures are to be drawn three-dimensionally. If three-dimensional
drawing is specified, it may take quite a long time to draw figures having many entities, such as
involute gears. So, either three- or two-dimensional drawing must be selected, whichever is
appropriate. Two-dimensional drawing may be used for a figure having more than around 1,000
entities, even when three-dimensional drawing is specified.
(3) Color
Specify the color to be used when creating machining figures. If "Current attribute" is specified,
machining profiles are created in a color specified elsewhere, in the same way as lines and circles.
If "Use set values" is selected, the color set here is used for creating machining profiles.
(4) Layer
Specify the layer to be used for creating a machining figures. If "Current attribute" is specified,
machining figures are created using a layer specified elsewhere, in the same way as lines and circles.
If "Use set values" is selected, the layer set here is used for creating machining figures.
(5) Taper offset
Specify how to indicate the tilting direction of a taper figure.
You can indicate the direction during creation of a figure or all the time. You can also specify
display color.

18.2.3 Standard Settings Related to Machining Instruction

The initial values displayed in the machining instruction dialog window can be specified.
Select "Machining instruction " from the "Setting => Standard setting" on the menu bar. The dialog
window used for setting appears. Specify the desired items then click the "OK" button.
The following items can be specified.
The meanings of these items are the same as those in the machining instruction dialog window.
(1) Machine specification
The meanings of these items are the same as those in the machining instruction dialog window.
• Machine name
(2) Functions used
The meanings of these items are the same as those in the machining instruction dialog window.
• AI corner control
• Automatic wire feed
• AWF Result monitoring
- 196 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 18.SETTING

• Retrace
• R command output of G02/G03 corner arc
• Work coordinate system setting
• AI cutting condition setting
• FANUC Standard cutting condition
(3) Machine setting
• Wire diameter
• Workpiece material
• Nozzle gap
• Program start point
(4) Work coordinate system setting
• Workcoordinate system number
• Workcoordinate system number of Program start point
(5) "G10" output
• Cutting condition (contouring/coreless)
• Offset (contouring/coreless)
• Offset (cutting-off)
• Offset number (cutting-off)
(6) Finishing allowance
• Clearance for each figure
• Entire finishing allowance
(7) Open area cutting
• Extend amount (Start/End)
• Approaching amount
• Retract amount
(8) Closed area cutting
• Cutting direction
• Approach position
• Pre-hole of coreless cutting
(9) Common for Open/Closed area cutting
• Glue tab amount
• Overlap amount
• Escape amount
(10) Coreless cutting
• Step over amount(Direct/Percentage of wire dia.)
• Cutting condition number
• Offset number
(11) Batch processing of full circle
• Max. diameter
• Min. diameter
(12) Table top
• Table top Z coordinate
(13) Arc approximation by line segments
• Tolerance(In/Out)
(14) AI corner control
This function is enabled if the AI corner control check box at [Function Selection] is selected (use).
AI corner control can be disabled for the last n cuts.
(15) Adjustment at the escape position
• Parameter 1
• Parameter 2

- 197 -
18.SETTING FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

18.2.4 Standard Settings Related to NC Data Preparation

The initial values displayed in the NC data preparation dialog window can be specified.
Select "NC Data Preparation" from the "Setting => Standard setting" on the menu bar. The dialog
window used for setting appears. Specify the desired items and click the "OK" button.
The following items can be specified.
The meanings of these items are the same as for those in the machining instruction dialog window.
(1) Output mode
• Absolute
• Incremental
(2) Subprogram output
• NC data is output using the main program and subprogram.
• All NC data is output by the main program.
(3) Sequence number output
• Output/Not output
Initial value
• Output at every “n” block
Incremental value
At intervals of “n” blocks
(4) Offset interference check
• Performed/Not performed
• Excluding interfering entities

18.3 RESTORING SETTINGS

You can restore settings to their defaults by a one-touch operation.

18.4 TOOL BAR SETTING

Those menu bar commands that will be used often should be assigned to the tool bar. Using the tool bar
can save the operator the trouble of selecting from the menu bar. Select "Tool bar setting" from the
"Setting" menu. The dialog window for setting appears. The tool bar can be set up in this window by
using the following procedure.

18.4.1 Storing The Tool Bar Definition File

The contents of the tool bar are saved in the tool bar definition file. Make a copy of this file to guard
against it being destroyed.
Normally, the tool bar definition file is registered with file name 'PC FAPTCU.TBT' in the same directory
as that in which PC FAPT CUT i is installed. Make copy of this file by using the File Manager, and
store it in a safe place.

18.4.2 Creating Icons

When registering a new function from the menu bar, if an icon for the function is not provided as standard,
create a suitable icon by using the Windows "Icon editor."

- 198 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 18.SETTING

18.4.3 Displaying the Tool Bar Setting screen

From the menu, select “Setting => Tool Bar Setting” to display the Tool Bar Setting window.
When displayed, the Tool Bar Setting screen displays the contents of the tool bar and, at the same time,
this system enters a special operating state:
• Selecting a function from the side menu results in an error (functions available from the side menu
cannot be registered in the tool bar.)
• Selecting a function on the menu bar then clicking the tool bar is always interpreted as the addition
of that function to the tool bar.
• The prompt area cannot be selected.

NOTE
If Drawing Window is selected by mistake, the Tool Bar Setting screen can be
made visible again by minimizing the drawing window.

18.4.4 Registering Menu Items

Register a menu item by means of the following procedure:
• On the Tool Bar Setting screen, select the number with which the selected menu function is to be
registered.

18.4.5 Deleting Buttons/Spaces

Delete a button by means of the following procedure:
• On the Tool Bar Setting screen, select the number of the button/space to be deleted. More than one
number can be selected at one time.
• Click the Delete button.
The selected button is deleted. The buttons subsequent to the deleted button are moved up, new
numbers being assigned to each.

18.4.6 Inserting Spaces

Insert a space by means of the following procedure:
• On the Tool Bar Setting screen, select the number of the position where a space is to be inserted.
• Click the Insert Space button.
A space is inserted at the position having the specified number. The menu items subsequent to that
position are assigned numbers equal to their previous numbers + 1.

18.4.7 Changing Icons

Change an icon by means of the following procedure:
• On the Tool Bar Setting screen, select the number of the button for which the icon is to be changed.
• Click the Change Icon button.
• A list of icons is displayed. Specify the file corresponding to the new icon to be registered.
Refer to the help feature for details of the procedure for selecting an icon. Icon files (files having a .ICO
extension) and bitmap files (files having a .BMP extension) can be used for this purpose. These files
can be created with the Windows "PaintBrush" application.

- 199 -
18.SETTING FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

18.4.8 Saving Settings/Returning to the Normal State

To save the new settings and return to the normal operating state, click the End button.
Clicking the End button causes the following processing to be performed:
• The new settings are saved to the tool bar definition file.
• The tool bar is redisplayed with the new settings.
• The Tool Bar Setting screen is cleared and the system returns to its normal operating state.

18.4.9 Discarding the Settings/Returning to the Normal State

To discard the new settings and return to the normal operating state, click the Cancel button.
Clicking the Cancel button causes the new settings to be discarded, the Tool Bar Setting screen to be
cleared, and the system to return to its normal operating state.

18.5 SETTING OPERATING ENVIRONMENTS

It is possible to specify a folder for holding the files processed by PC FAPT CUT. Select [Environment]
from the [Setting] menu on the menu bar. A dialog box for setting appears. Specify the desired folder in
the dialog window. After specifying the folder, click the [OK] button. The directory for the following
files can be specified.
• Part file
This is a file of programs (manipulation result data) created conversationally.
• NC data file
This is a file of prepared NC data.
• NC data creation log file
This is a file of the execution results of NC data preparation.
• DXF file
This is a file of DXF format, used for exchanging data with other CAD systems.
• IGES file
This is a file of IGES format, used for exchanging data with other CAD systems.
• NC machine file
This is a file of NC machine information items, such as NC data formats.
• Registered cutting condition file
This is a file containing user-specified cutting conditions.
• Standard cutting condition file
This is a file containing standard ROBOCUT cutting conditions.

18.6 SETTING FOR EXTERNAL APPLICATION

Following informations are set, to start external applicaion from PC FAPT CUT i.
From the menu, select “Setting =>Setting for external application.”
Dialog window appears,
・ Additional information to the Menu of PC FAPT CUT i
・ Starting up information of external applicaion
・ Watch file information
• Menu items
Selection of add new items to call the external application on [Auxiliary] menu or on [Exchange
CAD data] of [File] menu.
Item name to be shown on the menu is set in the list of the setting window.
Following operations are available by the icons right-top of the list.

- 200 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 18.SETTING
New : Insert new item
Delete : Delete selected item
Move upward : Move selected item upward
Move downward : Move selected item downward

NOTE
Key in [Enter] at last, after inputting the item name. Otherwise, the following
operations won't be taken.
Up to 10 items can be set for each [Auxiliary] menu and [Exchange CAD data]
sub-menu.
If '&' code is used for the item name, under line appears at the next character of
'&' code, and the item can be selected from keyboard.
If the menu item is moved in the list, display order on the menu also changes.

• Setting of starting application

Executable file
Input the "Target" of the Property of Short cut of the application to be used. If the start
paremeter is added to the "Target", input the information before the start paremeter. Start
parameter can set by the next item.
Environmental variable(characters between two '%') can not be set.
Start parameter
Set start parameter if necessary.
Working directory
Input the "Start in" of the Property of Short cut of the application to be used.
Environmental variable(characters between two '%') can not be set.

NOTE
The Property of Short cut of the application can be found as follows.
Click the right button of the mouse at the application item of the [Start] menu of
Windows
(If there is an icon on the desktop, you can click right button at that icon).
Select Property from the menu.

• Process after application start up

The process after application start up is selected from the followings.
・ No process (only start)
・ Wait until application is finished
・ Watch for the creation/modification of the following file
File to be watched is set when "Watch for the creation/modification of the following file" is selected.
・ File type is selected from, "IGES", "DXF", "Other"
When "IGES" or "DXF" is selected, if those files are created or modified, PC FAPT CUT i
automatically starts inptting of those files.
・ File path and name to be watche is set
Wild card can be used as a file name. Wild card cannot be used in the path.
・ Input file with no prompt or not is set
If this item is not checked, dialog window appears and various settings are available.

- 201 -
18.SETTING FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

NOTE
Application finish is also watched if "Watch for the creation/modification of the
following file" is selected.
When the file name is specified by wild card, and if more than one file is created
for modified, the last file is used.
The external application can be started by the operation of the menu of PC
FAPT CUT i.
The external application which is added to the menu can be placed at the Tool
bar.

- 202 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 19.NC MACHINE SETTING

19 NC MACHINE SETTING
With PC FAPT CUT i, it is possible to prepare NC data by creating figures and giving machining
instruction. The format of the NC data may vary depending on the machine type.
PC FAPT CUT i offers an NC machine file for managing the NC data format, so it supports NC data
formats for several machine models.
Editing the contents of the NC machine file for a specific model is referred to as "NC machine setting."
This chapter explains how to perform NC machine setting.

CAUTION
The NC data prepared by changing the machine settings using [NC Machine
Set] may be of other than the standard format. When using such NC data,
ensure that the commands in the NC data can control the machine safely.
Also, always observe the safety precautions stated at the beginning of this
manual.

19.1 NC MACHINE FILE

When NC data is prepared, an NC machine file is referenced to determine the NC data output format for
the NC machine.

19.2 NC MACHINE SPECIFICATION

The major setting items and the corresponding standard values are as follows: (See HELP or the actual
setting window for other items)

(1) Unit and other setting

• Unit system (Metric/Inch)......................................................................0 (Metric)
• Water control .........................................................................................0 (No)
(2) Program start point
• Returns to program start point before moving to other figure ...............0 (No)

- 203 -
19.NC MACHINE SETTING FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

• Output temporary stop code after the motion from program

start point when AWF is used................................................................1 (Output)
(3) Total number of digits
• Program number.....................................................................................4
• Subprogram number...............................................................................4
• Sequence number ...................................................................................4
(4) Address
The address is specified by enclosing it in a pair of double quotations.
• Address for program number output:....................................................."O"
(5) Settings related to motion commands
• Least input increment.............................................................................0.0001
• Total number of digits(specified using a hexadecimal digit).................B (meaning 11 digits)
• Number of decimal places......................................................................4
• Whether to output a decimal point (0 = no, 1 = yes) .............................1
(6) Rapid traverse rates
• Rapid traverse rate (X-axis) ...................................................................900 mm/min
• Rapid traverse rate (Y-axis) ...................................................................900 mm/min
(7) Taper cutting
• Work thickness (G92 address I) output .................................................0 (Not output)
• Taper cutting mode (M15) output..........................................................0 (Not output)
(8) Coordinate system
• Whether to always use single-coordinate system output
(0 = no, 1 = yes) .....................................................................................1
(9) Dwell time
• Time (seconds) to prepare for a return in reverse cutting ......................5
• Time (seconds) to prepare for settling from a condition change ...........2
(10) Escape motion after Die or Coreless cutting
• 0 : Cutting feed, 1 Rapid .....................................................................0
(11) G10 output mode (for offset amount)
• 0 : At the beginning, 1 : At each skim ................................................0
(12) Temporary stop output
• Temporary stop after cutting-off for each cutting type
(0 = no, 1 = yes) .....................................................................................1
(13) M codes
Each M code is specified by enclosing it in a pair of double quotations. If symbols such as one (/) for
an optional skip are to be output, they must also be enclosed in the pair of double quotations.
• Program end ..........................................................................................."M30"
• Temporary stop directly after cutting-off .............................................."M00"(Note)
• Wire cut ..............................................................................................."/M50"
• Wire feed ..............................................................................................."/M60"
• Others

NOTE
If the Glue tab amount is “0” , it is, output regardless of setting.

(14) Arbitrary character strings

Specify arbitrary character strings to be output as NC data. Up to 16 character strings can be
specified. They can be output by setting a function code in NC data format.
No character string is specified in the standard setting.
"" (double quotations) only

- 204 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 19.NC MACHINE SETTING

19.3 NC DATA FORMAT

Regarding the NC data output format, the following items can be specified.

(1) Leader and trailer

Specify the code to be output at the beginning and end of NC data. EOR and EOB are output by
default.
(2) Main program start and end sections
By default, a program number, program name, and EOB are output in the start section of the
program, and a program end (M30) and EOB are output in the end section.
(3) Subprogram start and end sections
By default, a program number and EOB are output in the start section of the subprogram, and a
subprogram end (M99) and EOB are output in the end section.
(4) Subprogram calling
Specify a subprogram calling format. By default, a subprogram call (M98), subprogram number,
and EOB are output.

19.4 NC MACHINE SETTING TOOL OPERATION

To enable the editing of an NC machine file, an NC machine setting tool is provided. The flow of NC
machine file editing using the NC machine setting tool is described below.

Click Machining Instruction icon

↓
Click Machine Type Select icon
↓
Select Machine Type
↓
Click NC data output format button
↓
Setting data
From the menu, select NC Machine Setting => NC Machine Spec.
From the menu, select NC Machine Setting => NC Data Format.
↓
Saving the NC machine file
From the menu, select From the menu, select
NC Machine File => Save. NC Machine File => Save As.
“Save As” can be used just for back-up purpose.
↓
Modifying a comment file including NC data
From the menu, select NC Machine File => Open.
Click the Edit Comment button.
↓
Ending NC machining setting
From the menu, select NC Machine File => Exit.

- 205 -
19.NC MACHINE SETTING FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

NOTE
• Enter a character string for a setting item enclosed in double quotation marks (").
The maximum number of characters is defined for character string input.
• Enter a numeric value for a setting item that is not enclosed in double quotation
marks ("). Allowable numeric values are integers and real numbers.
Restrictions are imposed on integer input for some setting items.
• If an NC machine file is to be saved with a name, the name may consist of up to
30 single-byte characters including the extension.

- 206 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 20.TROUBLESHOOTING

20 TROUBLESHOOTING
20.1 BEFORE TROUBLE OCCURS
Trouble may occur when you are preparing data. So, you should take the following measures to protect
the data from being lost because of any possible trouble.
• Automatic saving of data being prepared
Automatic saving of data being prepared is enabled by following the procedure below.
This automatic saving is enabled by default. The following procedure can be used when it is
necessary to change the file name and update interval.
1 From the menu, select “Setting => Parameter Setting => Auto Saving”.
2 Set to Saving.
3 Enter the update interval and extended time.
4 Enter the name of the file to be saved.
5 Click “OK”
• Executing the save command
Save the data using the save command at the end of each operation.
1 From the menu, select “File => Save”.
2 If the file is going to be saved for the first time, you will be prompted to specify the file name.
Enter the file name when requested. If the file has been saved at least once, the data will be
saved immediately after step 1.

20.2 IF TROUBLE OCCURS

This section describes what should be done to recover a normal operation quickly.
• Saving the current data
Try to save data by following the procedure below.
If it is impossible to execute the procedure, go to the next step.
1 Press the ALT--TAB keys several times to activate PC FAPT CUT i again.
2 Press the ESC key several times to make menus selectable.
3 From the menu, select “File => Save”.
• Restarting PC FAPT CUT i
1 Exit PC FAPT CUT i.
2 Terminate all applications (if running).
3 Terminate Windows.
4 Start Windows.
5 Start PC FAPT CUT i.
If it is impossible to exit PC FAPT CUT i or Windows, press the CTRL-ALT-DEL keys to
reset the system.
• Restoring data from a file saved previously
1 From the menu, select “File => Open”.
2 Enter the name of the file previously saved using the save command or automatic saving.

- 207 -
20.TROUBLESHOOTING FANUC PC FAPT CUT i B-85344EN/03

20.3 MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING SETUP

The setup of PC FAPT CUT i may be aborted, after which an error message is output. An error message
is output if the operator makes an error, or if the PC environment cannot support the setup of PC FAPT.
Error messages and the corresponding countermeasures are explained below.

Message (Explanation)
• One or more Visual Basic applications are running. Please close those
applications, then choose OK to continue.

Applications created using Visual Basic are running, disabling further processing to occur. If you know
which application is the cause of the failure, take measures as directed. If you do not, stop all applications
other than Program Manager.

• Could not make the installation path.

It is likely that the drive (for example, c:) specified in the path name does not exist, the target drive is
write-protected (for example, because it is CD-ROM), the specified directory (for example,
¥PCFAPTCU) already exists and is write-protected, or the hard disk has no free space.
Check on the above information using File Manager, and specify an appropriate path name.

• Drive <d>: has not enough disk space. Need <size> bytes or more.

The system files are saved on the drive indicated by the path name specified as a location for installation
and the Windows system drive. If this message appears, check for free disk space and erase unnecessary
files, using File Manager, then specify an appropriate path name.

• <filename> is just used by other applications(s), so not possible to be

installed to <pathname>.

One or more other applications are using the indicated file. So, the file cannot be replaced. Stop all
applications other than Program Manager, and perform setup again.

• <filename> was not able to be installed to <pathname>.

The probable causes are: The indicated file already exists, and is write-protected; the indicated file is not
supported by PC FAPT CUT or at least its current version (for example, an English file having the same
name has been installed for a different application); the hard disk specified by the path name has no free
space; and there is insufficient memory.
When you are going to re-install the software in the same directory as before, make sure that the existing
files are not write-protected, using File Manager or the like, or rename or erase the existing files if
possible. Also check the size of the free space of the hard disk. To check the free space of memory,
use, for example, the Help => About Program Manager menu of Program Manager. If other applications
are running, stop them.
If it is impossible to solve the problem by any method, it is likely that the system floppy disk is abnormal.
In this case, please contact the sales agency from which you purchased your PC FAPT CUT.

- 208 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC PC FAPT CUT i 20.TROUBLESHOOTING

• Source File <filename> is not found.

• Source File <filename> is empty.

The system floppy disk is abnormal.

Please contact the sales agency from which you purchased your PC FAPT CUT.

• Protector of the PC FAPT CUT i is not connected. Quit every process and
connect the protector after turn off the power.

Connect the correct protector as directed.

If the message appears when the protector is already connected, check for a loose connection, dirty or
broken pin. Also make sure that the printer cable is not broken and securely connected.

• An unexpected error occurred during transfer of keys.

Check the protector for loose or dirty connections, broken connector pints, and check the printed cable for
breakage or faulty connection. When using a printer cable not recommended by the manufacturer, the
problem is sometimes solved by replacing the printer cable with one recommended by the manufacturer.
When using a similar protector made by a different manufacturer, the problem is sometimes solved by
removing the protector, or reconnecting to the furthest connection away from the computer.
If neither of the above two remedies solves the problem, a probable cause if the protector itself. Contact
your sales agent.

- 209 -
APPENDIX
B-85344EN/03 APPENDIX A.NC DATA FORMAT

A NC DATA FORMAT
A.1 GENERAL FORMAT
This section describes the general format of the NC data created by PC FAPT CUT. The NC data in the
following example consists of a main program and subprograms.
Start section (leader)
[Start section]
The output format can be
changed.

Oxxxx( );

[Main program]

M30;

Oxxxx;
[Subprogram]

M99;

Oxxxx Repeated as many times

as the number of
M99;
subprograms

End section (trailer) [End section]

The output format can be
changed.

• NC data is output as a single file regardless of whether it consists of a single program or a

combination of a main program and subprograms.
• Subprograms are numbered sequentially by incrementing the program number of the main program
one by one.

- 213 -
A.NC DATA FORMAT APPENDIX B-85344EN/03

A.2 NC DATA FOR USING THE [AI SETTING (STANDARD

CUTTING CONDITION)] FUNCTION
If the cutting condition AI setting function is used, and a check mark is placed against "G10 output" in the
"Cutting condition regist/confirm" window, commands for setting cutting conditions and specifying offset
amounts are specified using: G10P___

Example of NC data output (for ROBOCUT 0-C/1-C) :

O1234;
G10P1X_Y_Z_U_V_W_I_J_K_A_C_E_L_; Cutting
G10P2X_Y_Z_U_V_W_I_J_K_A_C_E_L_; conditions
G10P3X_Y_Z_U_V_W_I_J_K_A_C_E_L_;
G10P4X_Y_Z_U_V_W_I_J_K_A_C_E_L_; Output when this
G90; Offsets
function is used
G10P0R_;
G10P1R_;
G10P2R_;
G10P3R_;
G10P4R_;
•
•

When this function is not used, NC data in the range indicated by the arrow is not output.

A.3 NC DATA FOR USING THE [AI CORNER CONTROL]

FUNCTION
When the AI corner control function is used, the following commands are output for the standard settings.
In case Series iD or later, G11J_ is output.
• Roughing
M37.......................Corner control ON/feed control ON
• Finishing
M38.......................Corner control OFF/feed control ON
• Cutting-off
M29.......................Corner control OFF/feed control OFF

NOTE
If reverse cut is to be used in punching, M27 and M28 are output for roughing and
finishing, respectively.
It is possible in machine instruction to specify in which cut (among the total number of
cuts) M29 is to be output. This is done by specifying the initial value using [Standard
Value Set] and [Machining Instruction] in the [Setting] menu.

HINT
It is possible to specify the code to be output as an AI corner control code. See Chapter
19 for details.

- 214 -
B-85344EN/03 APPENDIX A.NC DATA FORMAT

A.4 NC DATA FOR USING THE [AUTO WIRE FEED]

FUNCTION
(1) When the automatic wire feed function is used
When the auto wire feed function is used, if retrace is disabled, the following commands are created
at the end of each cut with the standard settings.
• Wire cut.............../M50;
This command is issued at the end of each cut, provided it is not the final machining stage for
the workpiece. If the AWF result monitoring function is being used, however, the command
is output even for the final machining stage.
• Wire connect............./M60;
This command is issued to connect the wire at the second or subsequent start point. When the
AWF result monitoring function is being used, however, the command is issued even at the
first machining start point.
(2) When the automatic wire feed function is not being used
When the auto wire feed function is not used, if retrace is disabled, the following command is
created at the end of each machining cycle with the standard settings.
• Temporary stop: M01;
This command is output to cut the wire at the end of non-final contouring and to connect the
wire at the second or a subsequent start point.

HINT
It is possible to specify the codes to be output as wire cut, wire connect, and
temporary stop codes. See Chapter 19 for details.

A.5 NC DATA FOR USING THE [AWF RESULT MONITORING]

FUNCTION
If the AWF result monitoring function is enabled, a hole number and machining cycle count command are
output before /M60 (wire connect). The following three situations may occur depending on the
machining type being used.
a) One machining start hole is used for the entire machining sequence and, upon the completion of this
sequence, another machining sequence is started from the next hole (the number of cuts is increased)
• The initial values (M61P0B0) for both the hole numbers and the number of cuts are output
before any machining sequence is started
• In the first cut, the hole number is output using an incremental command, M62P1.
• Each time the machining sequence progresses, the number of cuts is specified using an
incremental command, M62B1.
• The initial machining count [M61B0] is output before a shift to the next hole (machining
figure).
b) When all holes are machined in each cut (the hole number is incremented)
• The initial values (M61P0B0) for both the hole numbers and machining cycle counts are output
before the machining process is started.
• At the first hole (machining figure), the machining count is output using an incremental
command, M62B1.
• Each time a different hole (machining profile) is selected, the hole number is output using an
incremental command, M62P1.
• When returning to the first hole, the initial value(M61P0) is output.
c) When cases a) and b) are mixed
• The initial values (M61P0B0) for both the hole numbers and machining counts are output
before the machining process is started.
- 215 -
A.NC DATA FORMAT APPENDIX B-85344EN/03

• A hole number or machining count is not output if they are the same as the previous one.
• If the hole number and the number of cuts are incremented by one, an incremental command,
M62, is output. Otherwise, an absolute command, M61, is output.

NOTE
The following restriction applies to machining based on the NC data prepared
using this function. If there is more than one start hole for one figure as in, for
example, [Open-Figure Independent Cutting-off Type], machining based on each
start hole is monitored separately. In other words, if a machining failure occurs in
machining based on some start hole, machining based on the other start holes is
executed.

HINT
It is possible to specify the codes to be output as codes for specifying hole
numbers and the number of cuts. See Chapter 19 for details.

A.6 NC DATA FOR USING THE [RETRACE] FUNCTION

If the retrace function is enabled, the following commands are output at the end of contouring.
• If the AWF mechanism is unavailable: M70;
• If the AWF mechanism is available: M70; and G92;

NOTE
No retrace command is output for reverse cut or open-area machining.

HINT
It is possible to specify the code to be output as a retrace code. See Chapter
19 for details.

A.7 M CODE FOR A STOP IMMEDIATELY AFTER

CUTTING-OFF
In all machining types, such as punch, die, and open-figure machining, an M code is output for a stop
immediately after cutting-off in the standard settings. NC machine setting can specify the suppression of
this M code.
When both the glue-tab amount and the overlap amount are zero on a machining type where processing
continues with cut-off on a punch/die shape, be sure to output an M code after cut-off immediately after
cut-off is performed regardless of the NC machine setting.

HINT
It is possible to specify the code to be output as a stop code. See Chapter 19
for details.

- 216 -
B-85344EN/03 APPENDIX A.NC DATA FORMAT

A.8 M CODES FOR WIRE CUT AND STOP AFTER ESCAPE

PRECEDED BY CUTTING-OFF
The wire is cut and stopped after escape preceded by cutting-off.
•

•
Escape
/M50;
M00; (NOTE)
Such as for a movement to the next figure
•
•

HINT
It is possible to prevent "M00;" from being output. See Chapter 19 for details.

A.9 REVERSE CUT

(1) Subprogram output for reverse cut
If machining including reverse skimming is defined using a main and subprograms, separate
subprograms are used for forward and reverse cut.
(2) Dwell command during reverse cut
If reverse cut is used, a dwell command is output at a return position. The standard dwell time is 5
seconds. It can be changed by NC machine setting. If the specified dwell time is 0 or negative,
no dwell command is output. See Chapter 19 for details.
(3) Wire connect at the End of Machining
It is possible, in NC machine setting, to select whether to connect the wire at the end of machining.
The wire is not connected by standard setting. This setting can be changed, so that the wire is
connected at the end of machining if the wire is cut at the end of machining, provided the AWF
mechanism is available. See Chapter 19 for details.

- 217 -
B. SETTING THE PROGRAMMED PLANE &
WORKPIECE THICKNESS APPENDIX B-85344EN/03

B SETTING THE PROGRAMMED PLANE &

WORKPIECE THICKNESS
B.1 THE WORKPIECE BOTTOM SURFACE IS THE
PROGRAMMED PLANE.
G92X_Y_I10.0J0.0 ; will be output

PC FAPT CUT i i Series Drawing 1 : Taper i Series Machining Setting

Top surface height +10.0 Work thickness +10.0 Taper mode 1
Bottom surface height 0.0 Drawing cross-section 0.0 Program position 0.0
height
Programmed plane Z 0.0 Auxiliary drawing 0.0 Workpiece thickness +10.0
coordinates cross-section height

Drawing figure on table top

10

Programmed plane Table top

B.2 THE WORKPIECE TOP SURFACE IS THE PROGRAMMED

PLANE.
G92X_Y_I-10.0J10.0 ; will be output

PC FAPT CUT i i Series Drawing 1 : Taper i Series Machining Setting

Top surface height 0.0 Work thickness -10.0 Taper mode 1
Bottom surface height -10.0 Drawing cross-section 0.0 Program position +10.0
height
Programmed plane Z +10.0 Auxiliary drawing 0.0 Workpiece thickness -10.0
coordinates cross-section height

Drawing figure at 10mm from

the table top

Programmed plane

10

Table top

- 218 -
 B. SETTING THE PROGRAMMED PLANE &
B-85344EN/03 APPENDIX WORKPIECE THICKNESS

B.3 THE WORKPIECE BOTTOM SURFACE IS THE

PROGRAMMED PLANE (WORKPIECE IS RISING UP
FROM THE TABLE TOP).
G92X_Y_I8.0J2.0 ; will be output

PC FAPT CUT i i Series Drawing 1 : Taper i Series Machining Setting

Top surface height +8.0 Work thickness +8.0 Taper mode 1
Bottom surface height 0 Drawing cross-section 0.0 Program position +2.0
height
Programmed plane Z +2.0 Auxiliary drawing 0.0 Workpiece thickness +8.0
coordinates cross-section height

Drawing figure at height 2mm

height

8
Programmed plane
2
Table top

B.4 THE WORKPIECE TOP SURFACE IS THE PROGRAMMED

PLANE (WORKPIECE IS RISING UP FROM THE TABLE
TOP).
G92X_Y_I-8.0J10.0 ; will be output

PC FAPT CUT i i Series Drawing 1 : Taper i Series Machining Setting

Top surface height 0 Work thickness -10.0 Taper mode 1
Bottom surface height -8.0 Drawing cross-section 0.0 Program position +10.0
height
Programmed plane Z +10.0 Auxiliary drawing 0.0 Workpiece thickness -10.0
coordinates cross-section height

Drawing figure at height 10 mm

height

Programmed plane
8

2
Table top

NOTE
Set an appropriate value in [Table top Z coordinates] of [Machining Definition] –
[Cutting Types].
Otherwise, J__ of G92X__Y__I__J__: is not output.

- 219 -
C.OTHER APPENDIX B-85344EN/03

C OTHER
C.1 AWF RESULTS MONITOR
When a machining type where cutting-off is performed separately is selected in a six-cut operation, the
number of wire connections programmed by the M60 command sometimes becomes seven.
However, the number of times that ROBOCUT can monitor is six. So, in the default PC FAPT CUT i
setting, NC data that will output monitor commands for seven cutting operations cannot be created.
Before you create NC data, cancel selection of the "AWF Results Monitor" check in the function
selection.
If you change the PC FAPT CUT i setting, you can create NC data that will output monitor commands for
seven cutting operations. However, ROBOCUT will not monitor the 7th cutting operation. Use this
feature when monitoring only up to the 6th cutting operation is sufficient.

[Setup Method]
• Click the "Machine Information" button under "Machine Type Information."
• In the "NC Machine Setup" "NC Machine Specifications" window set "Maximum value of AWF
results monitor instruction B code" to "7" (default: 6).
• Select "Overwrite" in the "NC Machine File" menu.
• Select "End NC Machine Setup" in the "NC Machine File" menu.
• Click the "OK" button in the "Machine Type Information" window.

- 220 -
Ⅱ．FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP

1 SETUP
1.1 SETTING UP THE COMPUTER
Before setting up ROBOCUT-LINKi on the computer, set up Windows functions.
Not all functions need be set up.
Perform only the necessary setup according to the functions to use.

Unique IP address Windows Live Mail IIS setup

setting setup Firewall setup
Folder access
permission setting
change
Use NC program Not required Not required Not required
management only
Use mail function only Required Required Not required
Use operation monitor only Required Not required Required
Use NC program Required Required Not required
management and mail
function
Use NC program Required Not required Required
management and operation
monitor
Use mail function and Required Required Required
operation monitor
Use all functions Required Required Required
IIS: Internet Information Services

1.1.1 Required System

Using ROBOCUT-LINKi requires the creation of a network consisting of devices described below that is
capable of communication at all times.
This manual assumes that the computer is in a state in which it can communicate. If no network settings
are made, make communication settings.
For details of how to make settings, refer to the instruction manual supplied with the computer used.

• Main unit of the computer

‧ CPU: 32-bit (x86) or 64-bit (x64) processor at 1 GHz or higher
‧ Memory: 1GB RAM (32-bit) / 2GB RAM (64-bit)
‧ Hard disk: Disk area with a free space of 16GB (32-bit) or 20GB (64-bit) or more
‧ Graphic accelerator: DirectX®9 graphic processor incorporating a Windows® Display
Driver Model (WDDM) 1.0 or a better driver
‧ LAN: 10/100/1000Mbps

• Basic software
‧ OS: Windows® 7 (Home Premium, Professional, Ultimate)
Service Pack 1 (NOTE1)
Windows® 8 / Windows® 8 Pro
‧ Mail software: Windows Live Mail (NOTE2)
‧ Spreadsheet software: Microsoft® Excel (2007, 2010, 2013)（NOTE7）
- 223 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

‧ Web browser: Internet Explorer 8 (Windows® 7)

Internet Explorer 10 (Windows 8)
‧ Windows function addition: Internet Information Services (IIS) (NOTE3)
‧ Other: Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5

• Communication devices
‧ Ethernet cable: 10Base-T/100 Base-TX/1000 Base-T category 5 or higher
Twisted pair straight cable
‧ Repeater: Broadband router (NOTE4) (NOTE5)
Hub (NOTE6)
‧ Other: Internet line (NOTE4)

NOTE1
Install it in drive C of the computer.

NOTE2
It need not be set up if the mail function is not to be used.

NOTE3
It need not be set up if the operation monitor is not to be used.

NOTE4
It is not required if the mail function is not to be used or emails are not to be sent
via the Internet (the mail server in the local area network is to be used).

NOTE5
Prepare a broadband router that incorporates 1) a DHCP server function
(automatic IP address assignment) and 2) manual DHCP lease function
(function that assigns a unique IP address to a specified computer).
It is not required if the DHCP server on the local area network (LAN) is to be
used.
If using ROBOCUT-LINKi in a LAN without the functions 1) and 2), disable the
DHCP function of the ROBOCUT and set a unique IP address.
Set a unique IP address for the computer, too.

NOTE6
The hub to be connected to the ROBOCUT with a cable must be of
noise-resistant type (steel case, built-in battery).

NOTE7
It need not be set up if Cutting result viewer is not to be used.

- 224 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP

1.1.2 Confirming the Installation of Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5

NOTE
・ If Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5 is not installed on the computer used,
download it from the website of Microsoft Corporation.
・ When the OS on the computer is Windows® 7, Microsoft .NET Framework 3.5
is preinstalled.

(1) Click "Programs" in the Control Panel.

(2) Click "Turn Windows features on or off".

(3) Confirm that the ".NET Framework 3.5 (includes .NET 2.0 and 3.0)" check box is filled.

- 225 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

1.1.3 Setting a Unique IP Address

NOTE
If using the operation monitor and the mail function, assign a unique IP address
to the computer on which to set up ROBOCUT-LINKi.

[Method 1: Assign a unique IP address on the Windows Control Panel (without using the DHCP
function)]
(1) Click "Network and Internet" in the Control Panel.

(2) Click "Network and Sharing Center".

- 226 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP
(3) Click "Change adapter settings".

(4) Double-click the network to use.

(5) Click "Properties".

- 227 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(6) Position the cursor on "Internet Protocol Version 4 (TCP/IPv4)" and click the "Properties" button.

(7) Select "Use the following IP address:" and set "IP address", "Subnet mask", and "Default gateway".
Contact your network administrator for information about usable IP addresses and so on.

(8) Click the "OK" button.

[Method 2: Assign a unique IP address using the DHCP server function]

Using the DHCP server function incorporated into the broadband router, etc., assign a unique IP address
to the computer.
For details of how to make settings, refer to the manual supplied with the broadband router.
If using the DHCP server on the local area network, contact your network administrator.

Example: Using the DHCP server function of the broadband router, assign a unique IP address
192.168.11.2 to the computer (MAC address 00:00:00:00:00:00) on which to set up ROBOCUT-LINKi.
- 228 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP

Reference: Confirming the MAC address

(1) Click the "Details..." button.

(2) The alphanumeric character string displayed for "Physical Address" is the "MAC address".

- 229 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

1.1.4 Setting up Windows Live Mail

NOTE1
・It need not be set up if the mail function is not to be used.
・If Windows Live Mail is not installed in the computer used, download it from the
website of Microsoft Corporation.

For how to set up Windows Live Mail, refer to the document supplied from the Internet service provider.
Alternatively, contact your network administrator.

[Example of setting up Windows Live Mail 2011]

(1) Start Windows Live Mail.

(2) Click "Accounts" and then "Email".

(3) Set "Email address" and "Password".

Set "Display name for your sent messages", too.
When the settings are completed, click "Next".

(4) Select "Server type".

Set "Server address" and "Port" for the incoming server.
Set "Server address" and "Port" for the outgoing server.
Set "Logon user name".
When the settings are completed, click "Next".

- 230 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP

(5) Click "Finish".

- 231 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

NOTE2
Change the safety options of Windows Live Mail.

[For Windows Live Mail 2011]

(1) Click "File" => "Options" => "Safety options".

(2) Click the "Security" tab.

Remove the check next to "Warn me when other applications try to send mail as
me.".

- 232 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP

1.1.5 Setting up the Internet Information Services (IIS)

NOTE
・IIS need not be set up if the operation monitor need not be used.

(1) Click "Programs" in the Control Panel.

(2) Click "Turn Windows features on or off".

(3) Check "Web Management Tools" - "IIS Management Console", "World Wide Web Services", and
"World Wide Web Services" - "Application Development Features" - "ASP.NET" (or "ASP.NET
3.5" when the OS on the computer is Windows 8) in the Internet Information Services. (A check is
automatically placed next to several items.)

- 233 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(4) Confirm that the underlined items are checked.

(If any of them is not checked, check it.)
After confirmation, click "OK".

- 234 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP

[When the OS on the computer is Windows® 7]

- 235 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

[When the OS on the computer is Windows 8]

- 236 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP

1.1.6 Setting the Firewall

NOTE
・ The firewall need not be set if the operation monitor is not to be used.
・ It need not be set if the operation status is not to be monitored using a
computer, tablet PC, or smartphone connected in the local area network.

(1) Click "System and Security" in the Control Panel.

(2) Click "Windows Firewall".

- 237 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(3) Click "Advanced settings".

(4) Click "Inbound Rules".

- 238 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP
(5) Position the cursor on "World Wide Web Services (HTTP Traffic-In)" and click "Enable Rule".

NOTE
If you use a commercially available security software product, refer to the
manual supplied with the product.

1.1.7 Changing the Folder Access Permission Setting

NOTE
・ The folder access permission setting need not be changed if the operation
monitor is not to be used.
・ It need not be changed if the language of your Windows 7 is any of those
listed below. (The folder access permission setting is automatically
changed.):
English Japanese Chinese (simplified) Korean German Italian
Spanish Turkish Czech

(1) Execute the command prompt as the administrator.

(2) Enter "icacls C: \inetpub\wwwroot\hdcpy /grant "group-name":(F) /T", and press the Enter key.

Example 1) When the language of your Windows 7 is English or Japanese:

icacls C: \inetpub\wwwroot\hdcpy /grant "Authenticated Users":(F) /T

Example 2) When the language of your Windows 7 is French:

icacls C: \inetpub\wwwroot\hdcpy /grant "Utilisateurs authentifiés":(F) /T

Example 3) When the language of your Windows 7 is Portuguese:

icacls C: \inetpub\wwwroot\hdcpy /grant "Usuários autenticados":(F) /T

- 239 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

Example 4) When the language of your Windows 7 is Polish:

icacls C: \inetpub\wwwroot\hdcpy /grant
"Użytkownicy uwierzytelnieni":(F) /T

Example 5) When the language of your Windows 7 is Hungarian:

icacls C: \inetpub\wwwroot\hdcpy /grant "Hitelesített felhasznàlók":(F) /T

Example 6) When the language of your Windows 7 is Russian:

icacls C: \inetpub\wwwroot\hdcpy /grant
"Проwшедшие проверку":(F) /T

(3) Enter "exit", and press the Enter key.

The command prompt ends.

1.2 SETTING UP THE ROBOCUT

According to the network environment, set items on the Handy setting - Communication screen of the
ROBOCUT.

[ROBOCUT α-CiA Series models]

Almost all items are automatically set by the computer on which ROBOCUT-LINKi has been set up.

NOTE
ROBOCUT-LINKi is an optional function.
For ROBOCUTs that do not incorporate this optional function, these setting
items are not displayed.

Item Description
Name (ROBOCUT) Set a unique name for the ROBOCUT.
A name is automatically set from the computer.
Before shipment from the factory, "ROBOCUT" is set.
- 240 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP

Item Description
DHCP Select whether to use the DHCP function (function that automatically assigns an IP
address to the ROBOCUT).
If the local area network contains a DHCP server, a broadband router equipped with
a DHCP server function, etc., set "YES".
Otherwise, set "NO".
IP address (ROBOCUT) Set the IP address of the ROBOCUT.
If YES is set for "DHCP", an IP address is automatically set.
If NO is set for "DHCP", set a unique IP address.
(Example: 192.168.1.101)
Subnet mask Set the subnet mask of the local area network to which to connect the ROBOCUT.
If YES is set for "DHCP", the subnet mask is automatically set.
If NO is set for "DHCP", set an appropriate value, referring to the computer
previously connected to the local area network.
(Example: 255.255.255.0)
Router IP address Set the IP address of the router.
If no router is provided, no IP address need be set.
If YES is set for "DHCP", an IP address is automatically set.
Port number (TCP) Set the communication port number of the program manager.
Set "8193".
If YES is set for "DHCP", a number is automatically set.
Machine No. Set the management number of the ROBOCUT. (1 to 32)
It is automatically set from the computer.
IP address (Server PC) Set the IP address of the computer on which to set up ROBOCUT-LINKi.
It is automatically set from the computer.
Monitor function Select whether to use the operation monitor and the mail function.
It is automatically set from the computer.
If the operation monitor and the mail function are used, "YES" is set, and
if only the program manager is used, "NO" is set.
Port number Set the communication port number of the operation monitor, the mail function, etc.
It is automatically set from the computer.
The initial value is "9100".

NOTE
After making any changes to the settings, turn OFF the power and ON to make
the changes take effect.

[ROBOCUT α-iE and iD Series models]

Set each item manually.

NOTE
ROBOCUT α-iE and iD Series models use a function of the CUT MONITOR i
(conventional ROBOCUT communication network system) to connect
ROBOCUT-LINKi and the network.
For this reason, the following restrictions are imposed:
・None of the items on the Handy setting - Communication screen of the
ROBOCUT are automatically set.
Set all items manually.
・Set the ROBOCUT name on the CNC screen.
For this reason, "Enter (Automatic)" and "Enter (Manual)" with a name
specified cannot be performed on the ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting screen.
Only "Enter (Manual)" with an IP address specified is possible.
・The DHCP function is not supported.

- 241 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

Item Description
IP address (NC) Set the IP address of the ROBOCUT.
Set a unique IP address that is not the same as any of those of the computer,
devices, and other ROBOCUTs on the local area network.
(Example: 192.168.1.101)
Subnet mask Set the subnet mask of the local area network to which to connect the ROBOCUT.
Set an appropriate value, referring to the computer, etc.
(Example: 255.255.255.0)
Router IP address Set the IP address of the router.
If no router is provided, no IP address need be set.
Port number (TCP) Set the communication port number of the program manager.
Set "8193".
Machine No. Set the management number of the ROBOCUT. (1 to 24)
After registering the ROBOCUT with "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting", set the assigned
unique management number.
IP address (Server PC) Set the IP address of the computer on which to set up ROBOCUT-LINKi.
Monitor function Select whether to use the operation monitor and the mail function.
If using the operation monitor and the mail function, set "YES", and
if using only the program manager, set "NO".
Port number (CUT Set the communication port number of the operation monitor, the mail function, etc.
MONITOR) Set "9100".

- 242 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP

CAUTION
If connecting a ROBOCUT α-iE or iD Series model to a network where a DHCP
server or a broadband router attached with a DHCP server function is used (and
manually assigning a unique IP address to the ROBOCUT), set the IP address
for the ROBOCUT carefully.
Even if an IP address currently not used is set, the IP address may be set as a
new IP address if a computer is added to the network or the power of a
computer is turned OFF and ON.
If a newly used IP address and the IP address set for a ROBOCUT compete,
communication will not operate properly.
To avoid such a problem, confirm what IP addresses will not be automatically
assigned by the DHCP server or the DHCP function of the broadband router
before setting the IP addresses for ROBOCUTs.

Example:

With these settings, 192.168.11.66 and subsequent IP addresses will not be

automatically assigned.
Set the IP address 192.168.11.66 and subsequent ones for ROBOCUTs.

1.3 NETWORK CONNECTION

Connect ROBOCUTs, computer, and network devices together, referring to the examples below.

Example 1)
・Send emails via the Internet (mail function)
・Monitor the operating states of ROBOCUTs using a tablet PC or a smartphone (operation monitor)
[Tablet PC]

[HUB] ROBOCUT-LINK i
（NOTE2）

（NOTE1）
[ROBOCUT] [Broadband router] [Computer]

Example 2)
・Send emails using the mail server of the internal LAN (mail function)
・Monitor the operating states of ROBOCUTs using a computer (operation monitor)

- 243 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

[Mail server]
[DHCP server]

[HUB] [HUB] ROBOCUT-LINK i

（NOTE2）

[ROBOCUT] [Computer]

[Computer]

Example 3)
・Use NC program management only
・No DHCP server function

[HUB] ROBOCUT-LINK i
（NOTE2）

[ROBOCUT] [Computer]

NOTE1
Prepare a broadband router that incorporates 1) a DHCP server function
(automatic IP address assignment) and 2) manual DHCP lease function
(function that assigns a unique IP address to a specified computer).
It is not required if the DHCP server on the local area network (LAN) is to be
used.
If using ROBOCUT-LINKi in a LAN without the functions 1) and 2), disable the
DHCP function of the ROBOCUT and set a unique IP address.
Set a unique IP address for the computer, too.

NOTE2
The hub to be connected to the ROBOCUT with a cable must be of
noise-resistant type (steel case, built-in battery).

NOTE3
Install a computer at least 2 meters apart from the ROBOCUT.

NOTE4
For details of how to make a connection to a wireless LAN, refer to the manual
supplied with the computer, tablet PC, smartphone, etc.

- 244 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP

NOTE5
If both CUT MONITOR i (conventional ROBOCUT communication network
system) and ROBOCUT-LINKi are used, it is recommended to
・Run ROBOCUT-LINKi and CUT MONITOR i on separate computers.
・Connect ROBOCUT α-iE Series models or earlier to "CUT MONITOR i" and
ROBOCUT α-CiA Series models to "ROBOCUT-LINKi".

If setting up both CUT MONITOR i and ROBOCUT-LINKi on a single computer,

note the following:
・Connect all ROBOCUT α-iE and iD Series models to be connected to the
network to ROBOCUT-LINKi.
(A configuration such as the following is not possible: α-iE Series models
are connected to ROBOCUT-LINKi and α-iD Series models are connected
to CUT MONITOR i.)
・Do not start the "data management process V2" of CUT MONITOR i.
(The "data management process" can be started.)

1.4 CONFIRMING THE NETWORK CONNECTION

When the connection is completed, use the Windows ping command to confirm the network connection.

(1) Turn ON the power of ROBOCUTs, computer, and network devices.

(2) On the ROBOCUT Handy setting - Communication screen, confirm the IP addresses of the
ROBOCUTs.

- 245 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(3) Issue the command "ping (IP-address-of-the-ROBOCUT) –t".

(Example: ping 192.168.11.4 –t)

(4) If a reply is received constantly, such as "Reply from 192.168.11.4: bytes=32 time<1ms TTL=128",
the communication line is normal.

If "Request timed out." etc. is displayed, the network is not connected properly.
・Confirm the cable connection.
・Confirm that the power of the broadband router and the hub is ON.
・Confirm that the IP addresses and the subnet masks of the computer and the ROBOCUT
are set properly.

(5) Press and hold down the "Ctrl" key on the keyboard and press the "C" key to end the ping command.

- 246 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP

1.5 INSTALLING ROBOCUT-LINKi

・Before installation, stop all other software applications.
・Perform installation with a user name with Administrator authority.
・Use ROBOCUT-LINKi with the same user name as the one with which installation is performed.

(1) Insert the ROBOCUT-LINKi CD-ROM into the PC.

The "AutoPlay" dialog box is displayed. Click "Run setup.exe".

NOTE
If the "AutoPlay" dialog box is not displayed, start "Setup.exe" in the CD-ROM.
Example: If the CD-ROM is in drive D,
Start D:\Disks\Disk1\Setup.exe.

(2) When the user account control dialog box of "Setup.exe" is displayed, click "Yes".

(3) The "Choose Setup Language" dialog box is displayed.

Select the language to use, and click the "Next" button.

(4) The "Choose Destination Location" dialog box is displayed.

To change the destination location, click the Change button and specify a folder.
Confirm the destination location, and click the "Next" button.

- 247 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

NOTE
The "Windows", "Program Files", and "Program Files (x86)" folders cannot be
specified.

(5) The "Select Features" dialog box is displayed.

Select the feature(s) to install, and click the "Next" button.

NOTE
Always select "Common". (Installation is not possible if a check is removed
from it.)

(6) The "Ready to Install the Program" dialog box is displayed.

Click the "Install" button to start installation.

- 248 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP

(7) When the installation is completed, the completion dialog box is displayed.
Click the "Finish" button.

(8) Installation of ROBOCUT-LINKi is now completed.

Then, from the Windows Start menu, start "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting" and register the
ROBOCUT(s) to connect to ROBOCUT-LINKi.
(See Chapter 2, "REGISTRATION AND SETTING".)

- 249 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

1.6 ADDING AND DELETING ROBOCUT-LINKi FEATURES

To add and delete features after installation, execute setup.exe in the ROBOCUT-LINKi CD-ROM.

・Before executing setup.exe, stop all other software applications.

・Execute setup.exe with a user name with Administrator authority.
・Execute setup.exe with the same user name as the one with which installation is performed.

(1) Insert the ROBOCUT-LINKi CD-ROM into the PC.

The "AutoPlay" dialog box is displayed. Click "Run setup.exe".

NOTE
If the "AutoPlay" dialog box is not displayed, start "Setup.exe" in the CD-ROM.
Example: If the CD-ROM is in drive D,
Start D:\Disks\Disk1\Setup.exe.

(2) When the user account control dialog box is displayed, click "Yes".

(3) The "Welcome" dialog box is displayed.

Select "Modify", and click the "Next" button.

- 250 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP
(4) The "Select Features" dialog box is displayed.
Select a feature, and click the "Next" button.

(5) When the modification is completed, the "Maintenance Complete" dialog box is displayed.
Click the "Finish" button.

(6) Start "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting".

Select the "ROBOCUT" tab, and change all ROBOCUT registration data.
For details of the operation, see Subsection 2.2.3, "Changing Registration Data".

- 251 -
1.SETUP FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

1.7 UNINSTALLING ROBOCUT-LINKi

・Before uninstallation, stop all ROBOCUT-LINKi software programs.
・Perform uninstallation with a user name with Administrator authority.
・Perform uninstallation with the same user name as the one with which installation is performed.

(1) Click "Uninstall a program" in the Control Panel.

(2) A list of software programs installed in the computer is displayed.

From the list, double-click "FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi".

(3) A confirmation dialog box is displayed. Click "Yes".

- 252 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 1.SETUP
(4) When the uninstallation is completed, the "Uninstall Complete" dialog box is displayed.
Click the "Finish" button.

NOTE
If an attempt is made to uninstall any files in common use by Windows
applications (shared files), a window may be displayed asking you to confirm
whether to delete the shared files. These files may be used by other
applications. For safety's sake, do not delete these files.

1.8 PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE CD

(1) Handle the CD taking care not to scratch, leave fingerprints and allow to dust or dirt to become
attached to the recording surface (side opposite to the one where a label is printed) of the CD.
(2) Wipe off any dust or dirt on CD gently with a soft, dry cloth or using a commercially available CD
cleaner.
Never use solvents.
(3) You can write characters only on the label-printed side of the CD.
When writing characters, use an oil-based pen or water-based felt-tip pen.
Do not use a ball-point pen, pencil or other sharp-tipped object.
(4) Do not leave the CD in the direct sunlight or in high-temperature or humid locations.
(5) Do not affix labels on the CD.

- 253 -
2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

2 REGISTRATION AND SETTING

2.1 STARTING ROBOCUT-LINKi SETTING
After the setup of ROBOCUT-LINKi is completed, start "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting" and register the
ROBOCUT(s) to connect in ROBOCUT-LINKi.
To connect additional ROBOCUTs to ROBOCUT-LINKi, use "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting" to
additionally register them.

To change the NC program storage folder on the computer and to register mail sending address, use
"ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting" and set data.

"ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting" manages all settings about ROBOCUT-LINKi.

(1) If ROBOCUT-LINKi software programs such as "ROBOCUT-LINKi Server" and "Program

manager" are started, stop all these software programs before starting "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting".

(2) [Windows 7]
From the Windows Start menu, start "Setting".
(Start => All Programs => FANUC => ROBOCUT-LINKi => Setting)

[Windows 8]
Click "Setting" in the Apps screen.

- 254 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING
"ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting" starts.

Select the desired tab.

"ROBOCUT"
Register a ROBOCUT in ROBOCUT-LINKi.

"Program manager"
Set the NC program file storage location and so on.
This tab is displayed if "Program management" is selected during installation.

"Mail function"
Set mail sending addresses, sending conditions, and so on.
This tab is displayed if "Mail function" is selected during installation.

- 255 -
2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

2.2 REGISETERING AND DELETING ROBOCUTS

2.2.1 Registration
[ROBOCUT α-CiA Series models]
Register a ROBOCUT in ROBOCUT-LINKi, using Enter (Automatic).

(1) Turn ON the power of only the ROBOCUT to register using Enter (Automatic).
・If wishing to register two ore more ROBOCUTs using Enter (Automatic), turn OFF the power of
the other ROBOCUTs.
・The power of the following ROBOCUTs need not be turned OFF:
- Previously registered ROBOCUTs
- α-iE and iD Series models

(2) Display the "ROBOCUT" tab.

Click the "Enter (Automatic)" button.

- 256 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING
(3) The "Enter" dialog box is displayed.
Enter the name of the ROBOCUT to register, and click the OK button.

NOTE
Assign a unique name to each ROBOCUT.

If the message "The communication failed." is displayed, confirm the following:

・The power of the ROBOCUT is OFF.
→Turn ON the power.
・An Ethernet cable is not connected to the ROBOCUT or the computer.
→Connect the cable.
・"Name (ROBOCUT)" on the ROBOCUT Handy setting - Communication screen
is not the initial value.
→Set "ROBOCUT" and turn OFF and ON the power of the ROBOCUT.
・The network settings of the ROBOCUT or the computer are not correct.
→Confirm the communication settings (such as the IP addresses and subnet
masks) of the ROBOCUT and the computer.

- 257 -
2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(4) When the message "New data has been entered. Turn off and on the power of ROBOCUT." is
displayed, the registration is completed.
The registered name is displayed in the list.

(5) Turn OFF and ON the power of the ROBOCUT.

NOTE
If registering the second and subsequent ROBOCUTs successively using Enter
(Automatic), note the following:
・ Turn OFF and ON the power of the ROBOCUT just registered using Enter
(Automatic), and wait for at least 10 minutes before registering the next
ROBOCUT using Enter (Automatic).
・ If you want to register the ROBOCUT using Enter (Automatic) immediately,
restart the computer.

- 258 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING

[ROBOCUT α- iE and iD Series models]

Register a ROBOCUT in ROBOCUT-LINKi, using Enter (Manual).

NOTE
For registration using Enter (Manual), data is registered in the computer, but the
data for the ROBOCUT is not changed.
Set data on the ROBOCUT screen.

(1) Click the "Enter (Manual)" button.

(2) The "Enter (Manual)" dialog box is displayed.

Enter the IP address of the ROBOCUT to register, and click the OK button.

(3) The "Enter" dialog box is displayed.

Enter the ROBOCUT name to register, and click the OK button.

(4) The message "New data has been entered." is displayed, and the registered name is displayed on the
list.
Confirm the "No." (machine number: No. 01 to No. 32) with which the name is registered.

NOTE
Register ROBOCUT α- iE and iD Series models with No. 1 to No. 24.

(5) On the ROBOCUT Handy setting - Communication screen, set the "No." confirmed in (4) for
"Machine No.".
According to the ROBOCUT-LINKi features installed, select between YES and NO for "Monitor
function" to enable and disable it.
If using "Operation monitor" or "Mail function": Select YES for "Monitor function".
If not using "Operation monitor" or "Mail function": Select NO for "Monitor function".

- 259 -
2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(6) Display the ROBOCUT menu screen, and enter "9990".

On the menu, "CNC parameter" is displayed. Touch the button to switch the screen.

- 260 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING
(7) The CNC screen is displayed.
Touch the blank portion at the lower right of the screen to switch the vertical soft key display.
Then, touch the "PARAMETER" button.

(8) Touch the "NEXT PAGE" button below the vertical soft key several times to display the "EMBED
PORT" soft key.
Then, touch the "EMBED PORT" button.

- 261 -
2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(9) Position the cursor on the "HOST NAME" field.

Enter the ROBOCUT name registered with "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting".

(10) Turn ON and OFF the power of the ROBOCUT.

(11) Registration is now completed.

2.2.2 Entering Comments

Use this function if wishing to display a comment on the operation monitor.

(1) Click the "Comment" button.

(2) The "Comment" dialog box is displayed.

Select a ROBOCUT, and enter a comment.
When the entry ends, click the "Set" button.

- 262 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING

(3) When the message "Comment has been changed." is displayed, the procedure is now completed.

The entered comment is displayed in the list.

2.2.3 Changing Registration Data

･It is desired to change a registered ROBOCUT name.
･Setup.exe in the ROBOCUT-LINKi CD-ROM is started, and a function to install is added or an
installed function is deleted.
In these and other cases, click the "Change" button and change the registration data.

(1) Click the "Change" button.

(2) The "Change" dialog box is displayed.

Select the ROBOCUT the data for which is to be changed.
To change the ROBOCUT name, enter a new name.
When the entry ends, click the "Change" button.

(3) [ROBOCUT α- CiA Series models]

When the message "Data has been changed." is displayed, the procedure is completed.
Turn OFF and ON the power of the ROBOCUT.
[ROBOCUT α- iE and iD Series models]
- 263 -
2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

After the message "Data has been changed." is displayed, perform the setting in 4).

(4) If setup.exe in the ROBOCUT-LINKi CD-ROM is started, and a function to install is added or an
installed feature is deleted, change the YES/NO setting of "Monitor function" on the ROBOCUT
Handy setting - Communication screen.

If a ROBOCUT name is changed, change "HOST NAME" on the ROBOCUT CNC screen.

See Subsection 2.2.1, "Registration", for details.

(5) Turn OFF and ON the power of the ROBOCUT.

2.2.4 Deleting Registration Data

To delete a registered ROBOCUT from ROBOCUT-LINKi, click the "Delete" button.

(1) Click the "Delete" button.

(2) The "Delete" dialog box is displayed.

Select the ROBOCUT to delete, and select the "Delete" button.

(3) [ROBOCUT α- CiA Series models]

When the message "Data has been deleted." is displayed, the procedure is completed.
Turn OFF and ON the power of the ROBOCUT.

[ROBOCUT α- iE and iD Series models]

After the message "Data has been deleted." is displayed, perform the setting in (4).

(4) On the ROBOCUT Handy setting - Communication screen, set "NO" for "Monitor function".
Also, on the ROBOCUT CNC screen, enter a space in the "HOST NAME" field (enter <Shift> <N>
<Input> on the ROBOCUT operator's panel), and turn OFF and ON the power.
For how to enter "HOST NAME", see Subsection 2.2.1, "Registration".

(5) Turn OFF and ON the power of the ROBOCUT.

REFERENCE
If a space is entered in the "HOST NAME" field, "NC-(MAC-address)" data is
automatically set.

- 264 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING

2.3 SETTING THE PROGRAM MANAGER

2.3.1 Setting the NC Program Storage Folder

Set the NC program file storage folder on the computer, which is referenced by the program manager (NC
program input/output function).
There are two folder types:

Common folder:
A folder common to all ROBOCUTs.
Use this folder if wishing to make NC programs available for common use by all ROBOCUTs.

Separate folder:
Folder assigned to a single ROBOCUT.
Use this folder if wishing to input and output different NC program files to and from different
ROBOCUTs.

Which folder to use can be specified with "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting" or "Program manager".

(1) Display the "Program manager" tab.

Click the "Folder change" button.

- 265 -
2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(2) The "Folder change" dialog box is displayed.

"Share NC program folder"

If wishing to make the NC program file available for common use by all ROBOCUTs, place a check
next to this item.
If wishing to use different NC program files with different ROBOCUTs, remove the place next to
this item.

"Common folder"
Specify the NC program file storage folder common to all ROBOCUTs.

"Separate folder"
Specify the separate NC program file storage folder for each ROBOCUT.

When the setting ends, click the OK button.

2.3.2 Setting the NC Program File Extension

Set the extension of the NC program file to be created on the computer when an NC program is sent
from the ROBOCUT to the computer using the program manager (NC program input/output function).

(1) Click the "Extension" button.

(2) The "Extension" dialog box is displayed.

Enter an extension and click the OK button.

2.3.3 Specifying an Editor

Specify the text editor to use when referencing and editing an NC program with the program manager
(NC program input/output function).

(1) Click the "Editor" button.

- 266 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING
(2) The "Editor" dialog box is displayed.

Specify the text editor execution file (exe file), and click the OK button.

2.4 SETTING THE MAIL FUNCTION

2.4.1 Registering a Mail Address

Register the mail sending addresses for the mail function (function that sends the ROBOCUT operating
state by email).

(1) Display the "Mail function" tab.

Click the "Enter" button.

- 267 -
2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(2) The "Enter" dialog box is displayed.

Enter a sending mail address.

Then, establish an association between the entered mail address and a ROBOCUT(s).

Example 1: If sending the states of all ROBOCUTs by email

Example 2: If sending the state of only a specific ROBOCUT by email

When the setting ends, click the "Enter" button.

(3) When the message "New data has been entered." is displayed, the registration is completed.

The address is displayed in the list.

- 268 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING

2.4.2 Changing Registration Data

・It is desired to temporarily stop the transmission of mails to a specific address
・It is desired to send the operating state of a newly added ROBOCUT by email
In these and other cases, click the "Change" button and change the registration data.

(1) Click the "Change" button.

(2) The "Change" dialog box is displayed.

Select a mail address, and then change settings.

・If wishing to temporarily stop the transmission of mails to the selected address, place a check next to
"Do not send the mail to this address".
・Place a check next to the ROBOCUT whose operating state is to be sent.

When the setting ends, click the "Change" button.

(3) When the message "Data has been changed." is displayed, the procedure is completed.

- 269 -
2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

2.4.3 Deleting Mail Addresses

To delete a registered mail address, click the "Delete" button.

(1) Click the "Delete" button.

(2) The "Delete" dialog box is displayed.

Select the mail address to delete, and click the "Delete" button.

(3) When the message "Data has been deleted." is displayed, the procedure is completed.

2.4.4 Setting Sending Conditions

Select the ROBOCUT state in which mails are to be sent.

(1) Click the "Trigger" button.

(2) The "Trigger" dialog box is displayed. Place a check next to the items that require it.

"Alarm or Wire break"

A mail is sent if an alarm is generated in the ROBOCUT or if a wire break occurs in the wire during
cutting.

"Cutting complete"
A mail is sent when cutting is completed or at an M00/M01 stop.

"Cycle"
A mail is sent at constant intervals.
Set the interval (cycle) at which to send a mail in the "Interval" field.
To stop the mail transmission at constant intervals when cutting is completed and the ROBOCUT is
stopped or if the power of the ROBOCUT is OFF, place a check next to "Do not send mail if
[Cutting complete] or [Disconnect]".

When the setting ends, click the OK button.

- 270 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING

2.4.5 Adding Mail Contents

If wishing to add ROBOCUT information to the mail to sent, click the "Contents (Addition)" button.

(1) Click the "Contents (Addition)" button.

(2) The "Contents (Addition)" dialog box is displayed. Place a check next to the items that require it.

"Length"
The distance that has been cut so far since the start of cutting is added to the mail contents.

"Total length"
The total cutting length calculated with the ROBOCUT drawing function is added to the mail
contents.

"Progress"
The progress of cutting is added to the mail contents.

Examples of mail contents:

C600IA-001
[CYCLE START]
Length : 500.0000 mm
Total length : 1000.0000 mm
Progress : 50.00 %

When the setting ends, click the OK button.

2.4.6 Testing Mail Transmission

After registering a mail address in ROBOCUT-LINKi and make changes to the settings of Windows Live
Mail, perform a transmission test.

(1) Click the "Test" button.

(2) The "Test" dialog box is displayed.

- 271 -
2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

Select the mail address to which to send a test mail, and then click the "Send" button.

(3) When the message "Mail has been sent." is displayed, confirm the mail on the destination computer
or cellular phone. (It may take some time until the mail is delivered.)

Test mail contents:

Subject Test mail
Text
ROBOCUT-LINKi

If the message "Mail transmission failed." is displayed, confirm the registered mail address and the
settings of Windows Live Mail and so on.
(Refer to the transmission log.)

2.4.7 Referencing the Transmission Log

If, when an attempt is made to send a test mail, the message "Mail transmission failed." is displayed, and
the mail cannot be sent, confirm the transmission log.

(1) Click the "Log" button.

(2) The transmission log is displayed.

Example 1: Log of a mail sent in a transmission test (example)

2012/05/01 16:45 Test Mail (A)
ret = 5 (B)
[email protected] (C)

(A): Mail transmission time and title

(B): Error code
(C): Mail sending address

Example 2: Log of a mail sent with the mail function (example)

05/01/12 16:24:09 0 (A)
[email protected] (B)
ROBOCUT : Periodic notification (C)
C600IA-001 (D)
[READY]

- 272 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING

(A): Mail transmission time and error code

(B): Mail sending address
(C): Mail title
(D): Mail contents

Error codes:
0: Success
1: Failed to connect to the SMTP server.
3: Another error (other than 4 to 9) occurred.
4: Failed to send the host name.
5: Failed to send the mail address of the source.
6: Failed to send the mail address of the destination.
7: Failed to start mail transmission.
8: Failed in the socket communication of the mail contents.
9: Failed to end mail transmission.

When the referencing is completed, stop the text editor.

- 273 -
2.REGISTRATION AND SETTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

2.5 ENDING ROBOCUT-LINKi SETTING

Click the "Close" button.

- 274 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 3.PROGRAM MANAGER

3 PROGRAM MANAGER
The "program manager" is a function that inputs and outputs NC programs between computer and
ROBOCUTs.

3.1 STARTING THE PROGRAM MANAGER

(1) [Windows 7]
From the Windows Start menu, start "Program management".
(Start => All Programs => FANUC => ROBOCUT-LINKi => Program management)

[Windows 8]
Click "Program management" in the Apps screen.

(2) The ROBOCUT program manager starts.

(3) Click the "+" button next to "Machine List", and a list of ROBOCUTs registered with
ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting is displayed.

- 275 -
3.PROGRAM MANAGER FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(4) Double-click a registered ROBOCUT name, and communication with that ROBOCUT starts.
When communication is started normally, a list of NC programs registered in the ROBOCUT is
displayed in "List of Files in NC:".

3.2 TRANSFERRING PROGRAMS

3.2.1 Transferring Programs from ROBOCUT to Computer

(1) From "List of Files in NC:", select the NC program to transfer, and drag and drop it in "File List:".

(2) The "Upload NC Program" dialog box is displayed.

Confirm the NC program to transfer, and click the "Upload" button.

- 276 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 3.PROGRAM MANAGER
(3) The NC program is transferred from the ROBOCUT to the computer
When the transfer ends, a message such as the following is displayed.

Click the OK button.

The NC program files are added to the computer.

(NOTE)

NOTE
・Specify the folder to which to add the NC program file, using ROBOCUT-LINKi
Setting.
・If a check is placed next to "Tool" - "Share NC program folder", the NC program
file is added to the folder common to all ROBOCUTs.
If a check is not placed, the NC program file is added to the separate folder for
the ROBOCUT.
・NC programs prohibited from being edited, such as NC programs with O9000 to
O9999 numbers, cannot be transferred.

- 277 -
3.PROGRAM MANAGER FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

3.2.2 Transferring Programs from Computer to ROBOCUT

(1) From "File List:", select the NC program file to transfer, and drag and drop it in "List of Files in
NC:".

(2) The "Download NC Program" dialog box is displayed.

Confirm the NC program file to transfer, and click the "Download" button.

(3) The NC program is transferred from the computer to the ROBOCUT.

When the transfer ends, a message such as the following is displayed.

Click the OK button.

The NC programs are added to the ROBOCUT.

- 278 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 3.PROGRAM MANAGER

NOTE
NC programs prohibited from being edited, such as NC programs with O9000 to
O9999 numbers, cannot be transferred.

3.3 DELETING PROGRAMS

3.3.1 Deleting NC Program Files from the Computer

(1) From "File List:", select the NC program file to delete.

(2) Press the "Delete" key on the keyboard.

The "Delete File" dialog box is displayed.

Click the "Delete" button.

(3) The "Confirm File Deleting" dialog box is displayed.

To confirm each file, click "Yes". Otherwise, click "No".

(4) If "Yes" is selected in (3), a confirmation dialog box is displayed for each file to delete.

- 279 -
3.PROGRAM MANAGER FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

To delete it, click "Yes". Otherwise, click "No".

If "No" is selected in (3), this dialog box is not displayed.

(5) When the file deletion is completed, the "Delete File" dialog box is displayed.

Click the OK button.

NOTE
Read only files cannot be deleted.

3.3.2 Deleting NC Programs from the ROBOCUT

(1) From "List of Files in NC:", select the NC program to delete.

(2) Press the "Delete" key on the keyboard.

The "Delete NC Program" dialog box is displayed.

Confirm the NC program to confirm, and click the "Delete" button.

- 280 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 3.PROGRAM MANAGER
(3) When the NC program deletion is completed, the following dialog box is displayed.

Click the OK button.

NOTE
NC programs prohibited from being edited, such as NC programs with O9000 to
O9999 numbers, cannot be deleted.

3.4 RENAMING NC PROGRAM FILES

(1) From "File List:", select the NC program file to rename.

(2) From the menu, select "File => Rename".

The "Rename File" dialog box is displayed.

Enter a new name, and click the "Change" button.

(3) The file is renamed.

- 281 -
3.PROGRAM MANAGER FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

NOTE
Even if a file is renamed, the NC program number registered in the ROBOCUT
does not change.
For example, suppose that the NC program file O0001.DAT contains an NC
program O0001.
Even if the file is renamed from O0001.DAT to O0100.DAT, the NC program in
O0100.DAT remains as O0001.
If an NC program file is transferred to the ROBOCUT, the NC program is
registered in the ROBOCUT, with the O number in the NC program file.
Thus, if the NC program file O0100.DAT is transferred to the ROBOCUT, the NC
program is registered in the ROBOCUT, as O0001.
If wishing to change the NC program number to be registered in the ROBOCUT
(O number), change the O number in the NC program file.

3.5 REFERENCING AND EDITING NC PROGRAMS

3.5.1 Referencing and Editing NC Program Files in the Computer

(1) From "File List:", select the NC program file to reference and edit.

- 282 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 3.PROGRAM MANAGER
(2) From the menu, select "File => Edit", and the editor is started, so that the NC program file can be
referenced and edited.

NOTE
Specify the editor to start, using the "Program manager" tab of
"ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting".

- 283 -
3.PROGRAM MANAGER FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

3.5.2 Referencing and Editing NC Programs in the ROBOCUT

(1) From "List of Files in NC:", select the NC program to reference and edit.

(2) From the menu, select "Communication => Edit", and the editor is started, so that the NC program
can be referenced and edited.

NOTE
・NC programs prohibited from being edited, such as NC programs with O9000
to O9999 numbers, cannot be referenced or edited.
・The currently selected program in the ROBOCUT cannot be edited.

3.6 EXITING THE PROGRAM MANAGER

From the menu, select "File => Exit program management".

- 284 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 3.PROGRAM MANAGER

3.7 CAUTIONS
(1) Depending on the operating state of the ROBOCUT, restrictions may be imposed on the transfer of
NC programs and on the referencing, editing, and deletion of NC programs in the ROBOCUT. The
following are some examples.

[Transfer of programs from ROBOCUT to computer]

・An attempt is made to transfer NC programs prohibited from being edited, such as programs with
O9000 to O9999.
[Transfer of programs from computer to ROBOCUT]
・An attempt is made to transfer NC programs prohibited from being edited, such as programs with
O9000 to O9999.
・The NC program to transfer has the same O number as the NC program currently selected in the
ROBOCUT.
・Alarm "PW000 POWER MUST BE OFF" is generated.
・The number of NC programs registered in the ROBOCUT or the memory size exceeds the
maximum.

[Referencing, editing, and deletion of NC programs (programs in the ROBOCUT)]

・The NC program to delete is currently selected on the ROBOCUT.
(Note, however, that if the ROBOCUT is in edit mode, the program is deleted, and the selected NC
program number changes.)
・The NC program to edit is currently selected on the ROBOCUT.
・Alarm "PW000 POWER MUST BE OFF" is generated.

(2) Depending on the format and attribute states of NC program files on the computer, restrictions may
be imposed on the transfer of NC programs.
Note the following:

[Add an "%" at the beginning and end of an NC program file]

%
O0001
G80G40G49
・
・
M30
%

[Assign an NC program number (O1 to O9999)]

O0001 <<< OK
O12345 <<< NG (5 digits)
O-1 <<< NG (Negative value)
O0.001 <<< NG (Decimal point)
OPQRS <<< NG (Not a number)

[Do not use characters that cannot be used in the ROBOCUT]

g80g40g49 <<< NG (lower-case characters)
Ｇ９１ <<< NG (two-byte characters)
If an attempt is made to transfer such an NC program file to the ROBOCUT, an alarm is generated in
the ROBOCUT.

[Remove the read-only check from the file attributes of an NC program file]

- 285 -
3.PROGRAM MANAGER FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(3) If the power of a ROBOCUT is turned OFF during communication, and then communication is to be
performed again with the same ROBOCUT, perform the following operation:
・ Start communication with another ROBOCUT (double-click another ROBOCUT name in
"Machine List")
or
・Restart the program manager.

3.8 ERROR CODES

0x7D1 A system error occurred.
・ Restart the PC. Alternatively, turn ON the power of the ROBOCUT again.

0x7D2 A memory error occurred.

・ The memory in the PC is insufficient.
Stop any unnecessary software applications.

0x835 A machine lock error occurred.

・ Another software application is communicating.
Wait for a while and retry.
Alternatively, stop the software application that is communicating.

0x839 A communication error occurred.

・ Confirm that the cable is connected properly.
・ Confirm that the power of the ROBOCUT is ON.
・ Confirm that the communication environment is created properly.
(IP address, subnet mask, and other settings)
・ The transferred NC program file is not correct.
Confirm the format of the NC program file.
・ The transferred NC program has the same O number as the NC program currently
selected in the ROBOCUT.
Either change the O number of the NC program to transfer or select an NC program with
a different O number in the ROBOCUT before attempting to transfer.
・ Confirm that the security software product does not block the network communication of
the program manager (CutProg).
・ Confirm that 8193 is set for "Port number (TCP)" on the ROBOCUT Handy setting -
Communication screen.

0x83F A file creation error occurred.

・ When an attempt is made to transfer a program from computer to ROBOCUT, the NC
program file cannot be found on the computer.
Confirm the NC program file on the computer.
・ When an attempt is made to transfer a program from ROBOCUT to computer, the NC
program file on the computer that is to be overwritten is read-only.
Confirm the NC program file on the computer.
・ The NC program file to transfer is being used with another software application.
Confirm the software application in use.
・ The NC program file storage folder is not correct.
On the "Program manager" tab of "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting", confirm the settings.
・ If this error occurs if an attempt is made to communicate with the ROBOCUT again
immediately after a communication error (0x839) occurs, restart the program manager.

- 286 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 4.OPERATION MONITOR

4 OPERATION MONITOR
The "operation monitor" is a function that monitors the operating states of ROBOCUTs, using a computer,
tablet PC, smartphone, and so on.

4.1 STARTING THE OPERATION MONITOR

Start the following two software programs:
・ROBOCUT-LINKi Server
・Web browser (such as Internet Explorer)

4.1.1 Starting ROBOCUT-LINKi Server

[Windows 7]
From the Windows Start menu, start "Server".
(Start => All Programs => FANUC => ROBOCUT-LINKi => Server)

[Windows 8]
Click "Server" in the Apps screen.

When the user account control dialog box of " SetConfig.exe" is displayed, click "Yes".

When it is started for the first time, the following message is displayed. Click "Allow access".

"ROBOCUT-LINKi Server" starts.

- 287 -
4.OPERATION MONITOR FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

When a connection between the ROBOCUT and ROBOCUT-LINKi is completed, "CONNECT" is

displayed.
(The figure shows an example in which the ROBOCUT registered with machine No. 1 using
"ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting" is connected to ROBOCUT-LINKi Server.)

4.1.2 Starting the Web Browser

[Computer on which ROBOCUT-LINKi has been set up]

[Windows 7]
From the Windows Start menu, start "Operation monitor".
(Start => All Programs => FANUC => ROBOCUT-LINKi => Operation monitor)

Internet Explorer starts, and the "operation monitor" site of ROBOCUT-LINKi is displayed.

[Other Windows7- or Window8-installed computer connected in the local area]

(1) [Windows 7]
Click the Internet Explorer icon in the task bar.

[Windows 8]
Click "Internet Explorer" in the Start screen.

Internet Explorer starts.

(2) In the address bar, enter

"http://(IP-address-of-the-server-on-which-ROBOCUT-LINKi-has-been-set-up)/default.aspx".
Example: http://192.168.11.2/default.aspx

- 288 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 4.OPERATION MONITOR
(3) The "operation monitor" site of ROBOCUT-LINKi is displayed.

(4) To enable it to start easily the next and subsequent times, add this page to "Favorites".

[Windows 7 (Internet Explorer 8)]

[Windows 8 (Internet Explorer 10)]

- 289 -
4.OPERATION MONITOR FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

4.2 REFERENCING A MACHINE LIST

It is possible to reference the operating states of ROBOCUTs in a list format.

Click "PreView" in the upper part of the screen.

(A)

(B)

(C)

(A) A ROBOCUT name registered with "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting" is displayed.

(B) The color changes according to the operating state of the ROBOCUT.
(C) The operating state of the ROBOCUT is displayed.

- 290 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 4.OPERATION MONITOR

4.3 REFERENCING OPERATING STATES

It is possible to reference the operating states of ROBOCUTs.

Click "Handy" in the upper part of the screen.

(A) (C)

(B)
(D)
(E)

(F) (G) (H) (I)

(A) Any comment entered with "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting" is displayed.

(B) The NC program number currently selected in the ROBOCUT is displayed.
(C) Cutting progress information is displayed.
(D) The elapse of time from the start of cutting to the present is displayed.
(E) Any alarm that has been generated in the ROBOCUT is displayed.
(F) The present cutting count is displayed.
(G) The present cutting speed is displayed.
(H) In the event of a wire break, the icon is displayed.
(I) The operation mode of the ROBOCUT is displayed.

- 291 -
4.OPERATION MONITOR FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

4.4 REFERENCING THE CUTTING MONITOR SCREEN

It is possible to reference the ROBOCUT cutting monitor screen.

NOTE
It is not possible to reference the cutting monitor screens of ROBOCUT α- iE
and iD Series models.

(1) Click "Monitor" in the upper part of the screen.

The following screen is displayed.

- 292 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 4.OPERATION MONITOR
(2) From the machine list located on the left of the screen, click a ROBOCUT name.
The following screen is displayed.

- 293 -
4.OPERATION MONITOR FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(3) The cutting monitor screen of the clicked ROBOCUT is displayed.

Click the "Refresh" button to update the display of the cutting monitor screen.

- 294 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 4.OPERATION MONITOR

4.5 CHANGING CUTTING CONDITIONS

It is possible to change the present cutting conditions.

NOTE
It is not possible to change the cutting conditions of ROBOCUT α- iE and iD
Series models.

(1) Click "Sending EDM" in the upper part of the screen.

The following screen is displayed.

- 295 -
4.OPERATION MONITOR FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(2) From the machine list located on the left of the screen, click a ROBOCUT name.

The currently used cutting conditions are displayed.

Click the input box of the item to change, and enter a value.
When the entry ends, click the "Check EDM" button.

- 296 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 4.OPERATION MONITOR
(3) The cutting condition data to be sent to the ROBOCUT is displayed.

Check the data first, and then click the "Send" button.
To modify the data, click the "Modify EDM" button. (The previous screen reappears.)

NOTE
When you click the "Modify EDM" button to return to the previous screen, each
data item returns to its value before the change.

(4) Data is sent, and the cutting conditions for the ROBOCUT are changed.

NOTE
If the changed cutting condition data is not appropriate, cutting failures and
alarms may occur. Thus, use great caution.
If, for example, the cutting of the ROBOCUT progresses to finishing while the
rough cutting conditions are being changed on the computer, sending the
changed cutting conditions will cause rough cutting to be started again.

- 297 -
4.OPERATION MONITOR FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

4.6 EXITING THE OPERATION MONITOR

Exit the following two software programs:
・Web browser (such as Internet Explorer)
・ROBOCUT-LINKi Server

4.6.1 Exiting the Web Browser

[Windows7 and Windows8-installed computer]
Exit Internet Explorer that opens the "operation monitor" site.

4.6.2 Exiting the ROBOCUT-LINKi Server

From the "ROBOCUT-LINKi Server" menu, select "File => Exit".

NOTE
If the mail function is being used, do not exit "ROBOCUT-LINKi Server".

- 298 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 5.MAIL FUNCTION

5 MAIL FUNCTION
・During cutting, an alarm or a wire break occurs, causing the ROBOCUT operation to stop.
・Cutting ends.
The "mail function" is a function that sends emails to a cellular phone and a computer when these and
other events occur in ROBOCUTs.
This function can also be used to send emails periodically to confirm the states of ROBOCUTs.

NOTE
・Set mail sending addresses, sending conditions, and so on, using
"ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting".
・Before using the mail function, confirm that mails are sent properly, using the
"Test" function in the "Mail function" tab of "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting".

5.1 STARTING THE MAIL FUNCTION

Using the mail function requires that "ROBOCUT-LINKi Server", which monitors the operating states of
ROBOCUTs, be started beforehand.
If "ROBOCUT-LINKi Server" has already been started in order to use the "operation monitor", for
example, it need not be started again.
Other software programs need not be started, either.

[Windows 7]
From the Windows Start menu, start "Server".
(Start => All Programs => FANUC => ROBOCUT-LINKi => Server)

[Windows 8]
Click "Server" in the Apps screen.

When the user account control dialog box of "SetConfig.exe" is displayed, click "Yes".

When it is started for the first time, the following message is displayed. Click "Allow access".

- 299 -
5.MAIL FUNCTION FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

"ROBOCUT-LINKi Server" starts.

When a connection between the ROBOCUT and ROBOCUT-LINKi is completed, "CONNECT" is

displayed.
(The figure shows an example in which the ROBOCUT registered with machine No. 1 using
"ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting" is connected to ROBOCUT-LINKi Server.)

When a connection between ROBOCUT and ROBOCUT-LINKi is completed ("CONNECT" is

displayed), the mail function is ready to use.
When an event occurs, such as the occurrence of an alarm during the machining by the connected
ROBOCUT, a mail is automatically sent.

5.2 EXITING THE MAIL FUNCTION

From the "ROBOCUT-LINKi Server" menu, select "File => Exit".

NOTE
If the operation monitor is being used, do not stop "ROBOCUT-LINKi Server".

By clicking the "Change" button in the "Mail function" tab of ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting" and placing a
check next to "Do not send the mail to this address", mail transmission can be stopped while the
ROBOCUT-LINKi Server remains active.

5.3 MAIL CONTENTS

According to the events that occur in the ROBOCUT, the following mails are sent.
(The mail contents are examples.)

[When an alarm is generated]

Subject ROBOCUT : Alarm
Text

C600IA-001 ROBOCUT Name

[PS0010] Operating state of the ROBOCUT (Generated alarm number)
PS0010 An unusable G code is specified. Alarm message

- 300 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 5.MAIL FUNCTION
[At wire break]
Subject ROBOCUT : Wire break
Text

C600IA-001
[Wire broken]

[At the completion of cutting]

Subject ROBOCUT : Machining completed
Text

C600IA-001
[Cutting complete]

[At an M00/M01 stop]

Subject ROBOCUT : M00/M01 stop
Text

C600IA-001
[M00/M01 Stop]

[Periodic transmission]
Subject ROBOCUT : Periodic notification
Text

C600IA-001
[Operation]

If contents are added with the "Mail function" tab of "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting", the information is
added to the text.
(Example)
Subject ROBOCUT : Periodic notification
Text

C600IA-001
[Operation]
Length:100.0000 mm
Total length:200.0000 mm
Progress:50.00%

NOTE
For ROBOCUT α- iE and iD Series models, mails are not sent at a M001/M01
stop.

- 301 -
5.MAIL FUNCTION FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

5.4 CAUTIONS
Mail reception by a cellular phone and a computer:
・Depending on the state of the mail server and the mail receiver, mail reception may be delayed or fail.

Mail transmission in the event of an alarm:

・If two or more alarms are generated at the same time, only a single representative alarm is indicated
in the mail text.
・A mail is sent only if an alarm is generated during memory operation.
No mail is sent if an alarm is generated during manual operation or if, for example,
the ROBOCUT is reset (not yet operated) in memory mode.
Depending on the alarm generated, the ROBOCUT may enter an emergency state.
If such an alarm is generated during operation, no mail is sent.
・If an alarm is released immediately after it is generated, no mail may be sent.
・If an alarm is generated immediately after the start of memory operation, no mail may be sent.

Mail transmission at a wire break:

・A mail is sent only if a wire breaks during memory operation.
No mail is sent in the event of a wire break during manual operation, etc.
・No mail may be sent if a wire break occurs immediately after the start of memory operation.
・No mail is sent if the operation of the ROBOCUT continues with the disconnection recovery
function even after a wire break.

Mail transmission at the completion of cutting:

・A mail is sent if "M02" or "M30" is issued during memory operation.
・A mail may not be sent if an NC program that is stopped in several seconds
(for example, an NC program the text of which contains an M02 command only).

- 302 -
 6.CUTTING RESULT DATA
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi COLLECTION

6 CUTTING RESULT DATA COLLECTION

This function automatically collects the following data and saves it to the computer:
・Cutting time and used wire amount
・Wire break and alarm occurrence information
・Used cutting conditions, etc.

6.1 COLLECTING CUTTING RESULT DATA

Starts "ROBOCUT-LINKi Server".

[Windows 7]
From the Windows Start menu, start "Server".
(Start => All Programs => FANUC => ROBOCUT-LINKi => Server)
[Windows 8]
Click "Server" in the Apps screen.

When the user account control dialog box of "SetConfig.exe" is displayed, click "Yes".
When it is started for the first time, the following message is displayed. Click "Allow access".

"ROBOCUT-LINKi Server" starts.

When a connection between the ROBOCUT and ROBOCUT-LINKi is completed, "CONNECT" is

displayed.
(The figure shows an example in which the ROBOCUT registered with machine No. 1 using
"ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting" is connected to ROBOCUT-LINKi Server.)
After the connection is completed, data is automatically collected and saved.

- 303 -
6.CUTTING RESULT DATA
COLLECTION FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

6.2 REFERENCING CUTTING RESULT DATA

[Windows 7]
From the Windows Start menu, start "Cutting result viewer".
(Start => All Programs => FANUC => ROBOCUT-LINKi => Cutting result viewer)
[Windows 8]
Click "Cutting result viewer" in the Apps screen.

Microsoft® Excel starts.

When Cutting result viewer is started for the first time, a "Security Warning" is displayed.
Click the "Enable Content" button to enable the macros of Cutting result viewer.

6.2.1 Menu
When "Cutting result viewer" starts, the "Menu" sheet is displayed.

Click "Cutting result list", "Result", "Master", or "Report". The relevant sheet is displayed.
Cutting result list: Displays a list of cutting result data collected and saved to the computer.
Select a cutting result you want to reference from the list.
Result: Displays detail data of the cutting result you select.
Master: Displays registered master data.
Report: Enter dimensions and other measurement data in this sheet to create a cutting
result report.
First, click "Cutting result list".

- 304 -
 6.CUTTING RESULT DATA
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi COLLECTION

6.2.2 Cutting result list

Click "Cutting result list" on the "Menu" sheet. A list of cutting result data collected and saved to the
computer is displayed.

・ A list of cutting results of all ROBOCUTs connected to ROBOCUT-LINKi is displayed.

・ The cutting results are classified according to the machine, product name (comment of the main
program), and cutting start date and time.
・ The line on which the product name is displayed in light gray indicates data collected when cutting
was not performed.
(operation check with dry run, program performing only positioning or rapid traverse, etc.)
・ "Machine" indicates the ROBOCUT name registered using "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting".
・ "Operator" indicates the operator ID set on the ROBOCUT Operator's panel window.

・ Click the return button to display the "Menu" sheet.

・ Click the refresh button to redisplay the cutting result list.

・ Click the delete button to delete the cutting result list.

Double-click the product name of the cutting result you want to reference.

- 305 -
6.CUTTING RESULT DATA
COLLECTION FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

6.2.3 Result
Double-click a product name displayed on the "Cutting result list" sheet. Cutting result data is
displayed.
The following shows an example of producing two identical figures twice. (Cut-off after finishing)

・ Explanation of data
Product:
Comment of the machining program (main program)
Machine:
ROBOCUT name registered using "ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting"
Operator:
Operator ID set on the ROBOCUT Operator's panel window
O number:
Program number of the machining program (main program)
Start date:
Cutting start date and time

- 306 -
 6.CUTTING RESULT DATA
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi COLLECTION

Length (Total):
Distance from the start to the end of cutting
Cycle time (Total):
Operation time from the start to the end of cutting
Used wire:
Amount of wire used from the start to the end of cutting
Power consumption:
Amount of power consumed from the start to the end of cutting
Process No.:
Serial number assigned to each process from the start to the end of cutting
Processes are separated by a wire cut command (M50) or cutting condition change
command (S or E code).
Figure position:
Wire feed position of each process (X and Y machine coordinates when M60 is specified)
The cutting start position (machine coordinates) is displayed for Figure position when the
program contains no M60 or for a process before M60 is specified after the start of
cutting.
EDM No.:
Number of the cutting condition used for each process
Cutting time:
Cutting time for each process. The time for movement at rapid traverse is not included.
"0" is displayed for a process for movement from one figure to another in which no
cutting is performed.
AWF retry:
Number of wire feed failures in each process
Wire break:
Number of wire breaks during cutting for each process
Wire short:
Number of times the wire comes in contact with the workpiece during cutting for each
process (short-circuits)
If a wire short continuously occurs several times in a short period of time, the number of
times is assumed to be 1.
Any wire short during retrace operation is not counted.
Cutting interruption:
Number of times operation is stopped by pressing the FEED HOLD key on the operator's
panel during cutting for each process or cutting is restarted after stopped due to an alarm
Water temp. (Max., Min.):
Maximum and minimum water temperatures for each process
Ambient temp. (Max., Min.):
Maximum and minimum ambient temperatures for each process
Resistivity (Max., Min.):
Maximum and minimum resistivities for each process
Wire diameter, Wire material, Wire net, Work material, Thickness, Work shift amount,
Clearance, Straightness clearance, Corner R, Rotation, Axis rotation, Scale factor, Mirror image
(X, Y), Axis exchange, Taper mode, Program plane, Thickness, Upper guide position, Support
distance, Lower guide position, 10 times input:
ROBOCUT standard setting screen data used for each process
EDM No., NUM, PM, VS, CC, VM, ON, OFF, AC, SVM, SV, SVG, WP1A, WP1B, WP2A,
WP2B, T, WF, FR, FC, SPD, SPC, AIC, STOFST, OFST:
Cutting condition number and data used for each process

･ If a wire break, wire short, or cutting interruption occurs for each process, the number of times it
occurred is displayed in the relevant column.

- 307 -
6.CUTTING RESULT DATA
COLLECTION FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

･ Click the number to display the sheet on which events during cutting are recorded.
(See Subsection 6.2.4.)

・ Click a "Water temp. (Max.)", "Water temp. (Min.)", "Ambient temp. (Max.)", "Ambient temp.
(Min.)", "Resistivity (Max.)", or "Resistivity (Min.)" cell to display a graph showing changes in
temperature or resistivity during cutting.
(See Subsection 6.2.5.)

・ Click the return button to display the "Cutting result list" sheet.

・ Click the master registration button to register the current cutting

result as master data. (See Subsection 6.3.1.)

・ Click the check button to compare the current cutting result with
master data. (See Subsection 6.3.2.)

・ Click the delete button to delete the cutting result data on the sheet.

6.2.4 Event
Click the number displayed in a "Wire break", "Wire short", or "Cutting interruption" cell on the
"Result" sheet to display events that occurred during cutting.
(When the number is 0, it cannot be clicked.)

・ Explanation of data
Date, Time:
Date and time when the relevant event occurred (based on the ROBOCUT built-in clock)
Event:
Event which occurred

Start:
Machining started from the beginning of a program.
Start (On the way operation):
Machining restarted after it had been stopped with M00 or M01 or by pressing the FEED
HOLD key on the operator's panel.
Start (In the middle of a program):
Machining started in the middle of a program.
- 308 -
 6.CUTTING RESULT DATA
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi COLLECTION

Start (Not wire vertical position):

Machining started from the beginning of a program in the status in which the wire was not
in the vertical position.
Start (In the middle of a program, Not wire vertical position):
Machining started in the middle of a program in the status in which the wire was not in the
vertical position.
Start (Not hold point):
Machining restarted from a position at which it had not been stopped with M00 or M01 or
by pressing the FEED HOLD key on the operator's panel.
Restart:
Machining restarted by pressing the RE-START key on the operator's panel.
Program end (M30/M02):
M30 or M02 was specified and machining ended.
Program stop (M00/M01):
M00 or M01 was specified and machining stopped.
Feed hold:
The FEED HOLD key on the operator's panel was pressed and machining was held.
When the cut-off function was used, machining was held before cut-off.
Alarm:
An alarm was issued.
Warning:
A warning was issued.
Wire break:
A wire break occurred during cutting.
Wire short:
The wire came in contact with the workpiece during cutting (short-circuit).
Power on:
The power to the ROBOCUT was turned on.
Power off (Operator's panel):
The POWER OFF button on the operator's panel was pressed and the power to the
ROBOCUT was turned off.
Auto power off:
The automatic power off function operated and the power to the ROBOCUT was turned
off.
Auto power recovery:
The automatic power recovery function operated.
Key on (Vertical):
The VERTICAL key on the operator's panel was pressed.
Key on (Start point return):
The START POINT RETURN key on the operator's panel was pressed.
Key on (Hold point return):
The HOLD POINT RETURN key on the operator's panel was pressed.
Override change (Operator's panel):
The FEEDRATE OVERRIDE switch on the operator's panel was set from 100% to
another value.
"/" Skip on:
The SKIP key on the operator's panel was turned on.
"/" Skip off:
The SKIP key on the operator's panel was turned off.
Start (Positioning):
Positioning started.
Completion (Positioning):
Positioning was completed.
Process change (S code):
The S code was specified and the process changed.
- 309 -
6.CUTTING RESULT DATA
COLLECTION FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

Process change (E code):

The E code was specified and the process changed.
Process change (M50):
Wire cut (M50) was specified and the process changed.
Ready:
The RESET key on the operator's panel was pressed and the ROBOCUT entered the reset
state.
Temperature change (Water), Temperature change (Ambient):
The water or ambient temperature changed by at least 0.5 degrees from the temperature at
the power on or when it had changed by at least 0.5 degrees previously.
Water resistivity change:
The resistivity changed by at least 1.0 × 10000 Ωcm from the resistivity at the power on or
when it had changed by at least 1.0 × 10000 Ωcm previously.
Date change:
The date changed.

Process No.:
Process for which the event occurred
Figure position:
Wire feed position for the process for which the event occurred (X and Y machine coordinates
when M60 was specified)
Water temperature, Ambient temperature, Resistivity, Filter pressure, Override, O number, N
number, ABS, MCN:
Current ROBOCUT values when the event occurred
S/E:
Number of the cutting condition used when the event occurred

D:
Number of the offset used when the event occurred
"0" is displayed when the event occurred for a program with no D command or between the
start of cutting and the specification of the D code.
Mode, Status:
ROBOCUT operation mode and operation status when the event occurred
Alarm, Warning:
Numbers of issued alarms and warnings and their messages
When no alarm or warning was issued, this cell is left blank.

・ Click "Wire break" in the Event column to display the ROBOCUT cutting monitor screen (image)
when the wire break occurred.

・ Click the return button to display the "Result" sheet.

- 310 -
 6.CUTTING RESULT DATA
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi COLLECTION

6.2.5 Graph
In the "Result" sheet, click a "Water temp. (Max.)", "Water temp. (Min.)", "Ambient temp. (Max.)",
"Ambient temp. (Min.)", "Resistivity (Max.)", or "Resistivity (Min.)" cell to display a graph showing
changes in temperature or resistivity during cutting.

・ This graph shows changes in water and ambient temperatures, and resistivity from the start to the
end of cutting.

・ Click the return button to display the "Result" sheet.

6.2.6 Ending Reference

Exit Microsoft® Excel.
Click "Don't Save".

- 311 -
6.CUTTING RESULT DATA
COLLECTION FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

6.3 COMPARING CUTTING RESULT DATA

6.3.1 Registering Master Data

If you want to compare cutting results of the same product with each other, first register cutting result
data collected when a non-defective product is produced that is to be used as reference as master data to
"Cutting result viewer".

・ Procedure for registering master data

(1) Start "Cutting result viewer".

(2) Click "Cutting result list" on the "Menu" sheet.
(3) Double-click the product name of the cutting result you want to use as reference from the list on
the "Cutting result list" sheet.
(4) Click the master registration button in the "Result" sheet.
Data on the "Result" sheet is registered to the "Master" sheet.

(5) Set tolerances.

Cutting time:
If the difference between the cutting result and master data exceeds the tolerance, an error
is determined.
Set a value in seconds.
AWF retry, Wire break, Wire short, Cutting interruption:
If the cutting result value exceeds each relevant tolerance, an error is determined.
Water temp. (Max.), Ambient temp. (Max.), Resistivity (Max.):
If the cutting result value exceeds [master data + tolerance], an error is determined.
Water temp. (Min.), Ambient temp. (Min.), Resistivity (Min.):
If the cutting result value does not reach [master data - tolerance], an error is determined.
Other items:
No tolerance is set.
If the cutting result value is not the same as the master data value, an error is determined.

- 312 -
 6.CUTTING RESULT DATA
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi COLLECTION

(6) Save master data.

From the Microsoft® Excel "File" menu, select "Save As".

Specify a unique name easy to identify, such as the machining product name, in "File name".
Select a save destination easy to find, such as the desktop, and click the "Save" button.

A cutting result viewer (Excel file) dedicated to the product is created.

・ If you want to register master data for different products, perform steps (1) to (6) and create a cutting
result viewer (Excel file) for each product.

・ Click the return button to display the "Result" sheet.

・ Click the delete button to delete the master data.

6.3.2 Comparing Cutting Result Data

・ Procedure for comparing cutting result data

(1) Double-click an Excel file saved in step (6) described in Subsection 6.3.1, "Registering Master
Data".
(2) Click "Cutting result list" on the "Menu" sheet.
(3) Double-click the product name of the cutting result you want to compare with master data from
the list on the "Cutting result list" sheet.
(4) Click the check button on the "Result" sheet.

On the "Result" sheet, each cell containing data determined to be an error is filled in red.

- 313 -
6.CUTTING RESULT DATA
COLLECTION FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

6.4 CREATING A REPORT

A form is available for inputting the cutting and measurement results of a machined product.
As some form data, collected cutting result data is automatically input.
Enter measurement values including the figure precision and surface roughness directly in the relevant
cells.
The lines to be input measurement results are automatically displayed according to the number of figures
of a product.
If you create image data in advance, an image can be displayed with measurement points and other data in
the form.

・ Procedure for creating a cutting result report

(1) If you want to display an image in the form, create image data as follows:
File format: JPEG file
Standard size: Horizontal 400 dots, vertical 300 dots
File name: product-name (comment of the machining program (main program)).jpg
(Example: When the comment is "SAMPLE", SAMPLE.jpg)

Save destination: \!ROBOCUT-LINKi\Data\Qcdata\Drawing folder

(Example: When ROBOCUT-LINKi is installed in drive C,
C:\!ROBOCUT-LINKi\Data\Qcdata\Drawing)

(2) Double-click the product name of the cutting result you want to reference on the "Cutting result
list" sheet.
(3) On the "Menu" sheet, click "Report".
The "Report" sheet is displayed.

- 314 -
 6.CUTTING RESULT DATA
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi COLLECTION

(4) Enter measurement values including the figure precision and surface roughness in the relevant
yellow cells.

When you have entered the measurement values, click the save button.

(5) If you want to print the report, click the print button.
A print image is displayed. Click the Microsoft® Excel Print button.

REFERENCE
The saved measurement values are managed for each machine, product name,
and cutting start date and time together with cutting result data automatically
collected by the ROBOCUT.
The next time you reference the cutting result data, the saved measurement
values are automatically input to the Report sheet.

6.5 MANAGING CUTTING RESULT DATA

The amount of cutting result data increases each time cutting is performed.
Periodically move cutting result data to backup media and perform other maintenance so that the capacity
of the hard disk on the computer on which ROBOCUT-LINKi is set up does not become insufficient.

Save destination of cutting result data: \!ROBOCUT-LINKi\Data\Qcdata\Mc01 to Mc32 folder

(Example: When ROBOCUT-LINKi is installed in drive C,
C:\!ROBOCUT-LINKi\Data\Qcdata\Mc01 to Mc32)

- 315 -
7.TROUBLESHOOTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

7 TROUBLESHOOTING
7.1 CHECKING THE COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT
If communication noise caused by magnetic fields, radio waves, etc. enters the network, this
may adversely affect the devices on the network, possibly causing communication failures.
This is not limited to ROBOCUTs alone. Various machine tools, industrial machines,
high-voltage electrical power lines, and so on may generate strong magnetic fields and ratio
waves, which can make the Ethernet unable to communicate.
If a communication failure occurs during the operation of ROBOCUT-LINKi, issue the
PING command from the command prompt of the computer and check the status of the
communication line.

(1) Start the command prompt and issue "ping (IP-address-of-the-ROBOCUT) -t".
(Example: ping 192.168.1.101 -t)

(2) If a reply is received constantly, such as "Reply from 192.168.1.101: bytes=32

time<1ms TTL=128", the communication line is normal.

- 316 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
(3) If "General failure" is generated, a communication failure has occurred.
Create a communication environment in which a reply is returned constantly.
For information about the handling notes, performance, and so on of the devices used,
contact the manufacturers or dealers of the individual devices.

HINT
To end the ping command, press and hold down the "Ctrl" key on the keyboard
of the computer and press the "C" key.

- 317 -
7.TROUBLESHOOTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

7.2 CHECKING THE IP ADDRESSES AND SUBNET MASKS

[Computer]
Start the command prompt and issue "ipconfig".

Confirm data displayed for "IPv4 Address" and "Subnet Mask".

[ROBOCUT]
Confirm data displayed for "IP address (ROBOCUT)" and "Subnet mask" on the Handy
setting - Communication screen.

- 318 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.3 CHECKING THE FIREWALL (ROBOCUT-LINKi SERVER)

(1) Click "System and Security" in the Control Panel.

(2) Click "Windows Firewall".

(3) Click "Advanced settings".

- 319 -
7.TROUBLESHOOTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(4) Click "Inbound Rules".

(5) Confirm that "Action" of "DataSrv2" is set to "Allow".

"Block" may be set for any unused "Profile" (Domain, Private, or Public).

- 320 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
To change the "Action" setting, position the cursor on "DataSrv2", click the right button
of the mouse, and select "Properties". For "Action" on the "General" tab, select "Allow
the connection".

NOTE
If you use a commercially available security software product, refer to the
manual supplied with the product.

7.4 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

7.4.1 No Reply to the ping Command

Symptom:
When the ping command is issued, the message "Request timed out.", "Destination host
unreachable.", "General error.", or the like is displayed.

Action:
・ Confirm that the power of the ROBOCUT is ON.
・ Confirm that the network cables are connected to the computer and ROBOCUT
properly.
> Confirm that the cables are inserted all the way into the ports.
> Confirm that the network cables connected to the computer and ROBOCUT are
not connected to the WAN side of the broadband router.
・ Confirm that the power of the broadband router and the hub is ON.

- 321 -
7.TROUBLESHOOTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

・ Click "Network and Internet" in the "Control Panel", then sequentially click "Network
and Sharing Center" and "Change adapter settings". Confirm that the computer
network adapter is not disabled.

7.4.2 Error Code 0x*** Displayed by the Program Manager

Action:
See Section 3.8, "ERROR CODES".

7.4.3 ROBOCUT Not Connected to ROBOCUT-LINKi Server

Other than “CONNECT”

Action:
・ Confirm that YES is set for "Monitor function" on the ROBOCUT Handy setting -
Communication screen.
Also confirm that 9100 is set for "Port number".
For details, see Section 1.2, "SETTING UP THE ROBOCUT".

(1) Confirm the IP address set for the computer.

(For details, see Section 7.2, "CHECKING THE IP ADDRESSES AND SUBNET
MASKS".)
(2) Confirm the address set for "IP address (Server PC) on the ROBOCUT Handy setting -
Communication screen. (For details, see Section 7.2, "CHECKING THE IP
ADDRESSES AND SUBNET MASKS".)
(3) Confirm that the addresses confirmed in (1) and (2) are the same.

NOTE
If using the operation monitor and the mail function, assign a unique IP address
to the computer on which to set up ROBOCUT-LINKi.

・ Confirm that a security software product such as Windows Firewall does not block the
network communication of ROBOCUT-LINKi Server.

- 322 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 7.TROUBLESHOOTING
For details, see Section 7.3, "CHECKING THE FIREWALL (ROBOCUT-LINKi
SERVER)".

7.4.4 ROBOCUT Status "END"

Symptom:
The ROBOCUT status displayed by ROBOCUT-LINKi Server changes from "CONNECT" to
"END" and communication between the computer and ROBOCUT is disabled.

Action:
・ Confirm that the power of the ROBOCUT is ON.
・ Issue the PING command from the command prompt of the computer and check the
status of the communication line.
For details, see Section 7.1, "CHECKING THE COMMUNICATION ENVIRONMENT".

NOTE
・ Use wired cables to connect the network between the ROBOCUT and
computer.
・ If "END" is displayed, turn OFF and ON the power of the ROBOCUT to restart
communication.

- 323 -
7.TROUBLESHOOTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

7.4.5 "Server Error in '/' Application." Displayed on the Operation

Monitor
Symptom:
When an attempt was made to reference the ROBOCUT cutting monitor screen on the
operation monitor, the following message appeared: "Server Error in '/' Application.
Access to the path 'C:\inetpub\wwwroot\hdcpy\Mc01\request.txt' is denied."
After that, clicking the ROBOCUT name displayed in PreView brings no response.

No response

Action:
(1) Restart ROBOCUT-LINKi Server.
When the user account control dialog box of SetConfig.exe is displayed, click "Yes".
(For details, see Subsection 4.1.1, "Starting ROBOCUT-LINKi Server".)
After ROBOCUT-LINKi Server starts, exit it, and restart the computer.

(2) If the user account control dialog box of SetConfig.exe is not displayed by restarting
ROBOCUT-LINKi Server, confirm that the ROBOCUT-LINKi installation folder
contains a SetConfig.exe file.
(Example: C:\FANUC\ROBOCUT-LINKi\Bin\SetConfig.exe)
When the folder contains a SetConfig.exe file, double-click it to execute it.
When the user account control dialog box of SetConfig.exe is displayed, click "Yes".

(3) When the folder contains no SetConfig.exe file, insert the ROBOCUT-LINKi CD-ROM
and execute setup.exe.
The "Welcome" dialog box is displayed. Select "Repair" and execute setup.exe.
(For details, see Section 1.6, "ADDING AND DELETING ROBOCUT-LINKi
FEATURES".)
After the SetConfig.exe file is restored, perform operation in step (1) above.

- 324 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

HINT
The security software product you use may recognize SetConfig.exe as
malicious software and delete it from the computer.
SetConfig.exe is safe software that automatically makes the settings required for
operating ROBOCUT-LINKi.

(4) Change the access permission setting for the C:\inetpub\wwwroot\hdcpy folder.
(The setting need not be changed if the language of the OS is English, Japanese,
Chinese (simplified), Korean, German, Italian, Spanish, Turkish, or Czech.)
For details, see Subsection 1.1.7, "Changing the Folder Access Permission Setting".

7.4.6 No Images Displayed on the Operation Monitor

Action:
Confirm that Internet Information Services (IIS) is set up properly.
Confirm that "Directory Browsing", "Static Content", and other required items are checked.
For details, see Subsection 1.1.5, "Setting up the Internet Information Services (IIS)".

- 325 -
7.TROUBLESHOOTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

7.4.7 "Internet Explorer cannot display the webpage" Displayed on

the Operation Monitor

Action:
Set up Internet Information Services (IIS).
For details, see Subsection 1.1.5, "Setting up the Internet Information Services (IIS)".

7.4.8 Cutting Monitor Screen Not Displayed on the Operation

Monitor

Action:
Restart ROBOCUT-LINKi Server.

- 326 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

7.4.9 "HTTP Error 500.19 – Internal Server Error" Displayed on the

Operation Monitor
Symptom:
When an attempt was made to reference the ROBOCUT cutting monitor screen on the
operation monitor, the following message appeared: "HTTP Error 500.19 – Internal
Server Error The requested page cannot be accessed because the related configuration
data for the page is invalid." (Windows 8)

Action:
(1) Click "System and Security" in the "Control Panel". Then, click "Administrative
Tools" and double-click "Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager".

(2) Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager starts.

Expand the tree on the left side of the window and click "Default Web Site".
Then, click "Advanced Settings".

- 327 -
7.TROUBLESHOOTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

(3) Click "Application Pool" in the Advanced Settings window and the rightmost "..."
button.
Then, select "Classic .NET AppPool" from the list and click the OK button.

(4) Click the OK button and close the Advanced Settings window.
As the last step, click "Restart" in "Manage Website" on the right side of the Internet
Information Services (IIS) window.

7.4.10 Operation Monitor Window Not Displayed on Another

Computer in the Network

Action:
・ Confirm the firewall settings.
Confirm that Enabled of "World Wide Web Services (HTTP Traffic-In)" is set to Yes.
For details, see Subsection 1.1.6, "Setting the Firewall".

NOTE
If you use a commercially available security software product, refer to the
manual supplied with the product.

- 328 -
B-85344EN/03 FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi 7.TROUBLESHOOTING

・ Confirm the address entered in the address bar.

"http://(IP-address-of-the-server-on-which-ROBOCUT-LINKi-has-been-set-up)/default.
aspx" should be entered as the address.
Example: http://192.168.11.2/default.aspx

7.4.11 Mail Transmission Disabled

Action:
・ Start Windows Live Mail and confirm that mail is transmitted to the specified address.
・ Start ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting and transmit test mail. Confirm that the mail is
transmitted to the specified address.
For details, see Subsections 2.4.6, "Testing Mail Transmission", and 2.4.7, "Referencing
the Transmission Log".
・ Confirm that the ROBOCUT is connected to ROBOCUT-LINKi Server.

・ Confirm the mail sending conditions.

(For details, see Subsection 2.4.4, "Setting Sending Conditions".)
For details of ROBOCUT events triggering mail transmission, see Section 5.4,
"CAUTIONS".

7.4.12 Mail Transmission Confirmation Dialog Box Displayed

Action:
Change a security option of Windows Live Mail.
For details, see NOTE2 in Subsection 1.1.4, "Setting up Windows Live Mail".

- 329 -
7.TROUBLESHOOTING FANUC ROBOCUT-LINKi B-85344EN/03

7.4.13 Registration of the Second and Subsequent ROBOCUTs

Using Enter (Automatic) Disabled
Symptom:
When an attempt is made to register the second ROBOCUT using Enter (Automatic)
successively after registering the first ROBOCUT using Enter (Automatic) with
ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting, the first ROBOCUT is registered redundantly (the second
ROBOCUT is not registered using Enter (Automatic)).

Action:
After the completion of the registration of the first ROBOCUT using Enter (Automatic),
turn OFF and ON the power of the first ROBOCUT.
Then, wait for at least 10 minutes before registering the second ROBOCUT using Enter
(Automatic).

If the first ROBOCUT is registered redundantly, follow the procedure below to register the
first and second ROBOCUTs again:
1) Delete both data items registered for the first ROBOCUT.
2) Disconnect the network cable of the second ROBOCUT.
3) Set "ROBOCUT" for "Name (ROBOCUT)" for the first ROBOCUT.
After setting, turn OFF and ON the power of the ROBOCUT.
4) Restart the computer.
5) Register the first ROBOCUT using Enter (Automatic) with ROBOCUT-LINKi Setting.
After the completion of the registration using Enter (Automatic), turn OFF and ON the
power of the first ROBOCUT.
6) Wait for at least 10 minutes. Alternatively, restart the computer.
7) Confirm that "ROBOCUT" is set for "Name (ROBOCUT)" for the second ROBOCUT.
Turn OFF the power of the second ROBOCUT and connect the network cable.
After the connection, turn ON the power.
8) Register the second ROBOCUT using Enter (Automatic) with ROBOCUT-LINKi
Setting.
After the completion of the registration using Enter (Automatic), turn ON the power of
the second ROBOCUT.

- 330 -
B-85344EN/03 INDEX

INDEX
Checking the Transmission Status ...............................159
<A> CIRCLE/ARC RADIUS ..............................................175
About Setting up Again....................................................7 Clear.............................................................................161
About Setup......................................................................5 Clearance .......................................................................73
About Uninstalling ...........................................................7 Closed-Area Machining Specification--Setting The
ACTIVATING DIMENSION MEASUREMENT .......172 Wire Cut Start Point ...................................................74
Activating Only the File Transmission Tool ................155 COLLECTING CUTTING RESULT DATA ..............303
Activating the File Transmission Manager ..................156 Color and Layer ................................................... 65,66,67
ACTIVATING THE FILE TRANSMISSION TOOL .155 COMMAND DESCRIPTION......................................183
Activation Using the PC FAPT CUT i Output Function COMMANDS ON THE [VIEW] MENU ....................182
..................................................................................155 COMPARING CUTTING RESULT DATA ...............312
ADDING AND DELETING ROBOCUT-LINKi Comparing Cutting Result Data ...................................313
FEATURES..............................................................250 Confirming the Gear ......................................................55
Adding Mail Contents ..................................................271 Confirming the Installation of Microsoft .NET
Adjusting the Creation Method of a Fitting Curve.........46 Framework 3.5 .........................................................225
AI CORNER CONTROL.............................................119 CONFIRMING THE NETWORK CONNECTION ....245
ANGLES FORMED BY TWO LINES........................176 Confirming the Version..................................................15
Application Software ...................................................154 Contents of PC FAPT CUT i Window ........................11
ASSEMBLE POLYLINE/POLYGON...........................49 Contents of The Screen ................................................168
AUTOMATIC WIRE FEED (AWF) MECHANISM ..119 CONVERSION SPECIFICATION FOR IGES FILE
Auto-rotate/Pause.........................................................184 INPUT/OUTPUT .....................................................149
Auxiliary ........................................................................55 COORDINATE SYSTEM .............................................39
Auxiliary Menu ..............................................................26 COORDINATE SYSTEMS...........................................67
AWF RESULTS MONITOR .......................................220 COPYING FIGURES ....................................................41
Corner R Specification Method .....................................66
<B> CREATING A GEAR....................................................53
BASIC OPERATION ....................................................10 CREATING A MACHINING FIGURE ........................59
BEFORE TROUBLE OCCURS ..................................207 CREATING A NEW PROGRAM .................................35
Buttons .........................................................................157 CREATING A REPORT .............................................314
CREATING CONTOURS .............................................58
<C> Creating Icons ..............................................................198
CAD Data.....................................................................125 Creating NC Data for an Unlisted Machine .................111
CAD DATA INPUT/OUTPUT....................................125 CREATING POLYGONS .............................................45
Canceling All Synchronizing Points at the Same Time..66 Creation..........................................................................57
Canceling of Cutting ......................................................79 Creation for Each Figure and Creation for All Figures ..66
Canceling Synchronizing Point ......................................65 Creation Method of a Fitting Curve ...............................45
CAUTIONS ..........................................................285,302 Cutting 4-Axis Independent Figures ..............................80
CAUTIONS ON USING THE "MODIFY/EDIT" Cutting Condition Setting ..............................................32
MENU COMMANDS................................................56 CUTTING CONDITIONS...........................................119
Cautions Related to an Escape Amount of 0 ..................79 Cutting Monitor Screen Not Displayed on the
Change the Size of the Figure ......................................183 Operation Monitor....................................................326
Change the View Direction of the Figure.....................183 CUTTING RESULT DATA COLLECTION ..............303
CHANGING CUTTING CONDITIONS .....................295 Cutting result list..........................................................305
Changing Icons ............................................................199 Cutting Taper Figure......................................................80
Changing Registration Data ..................................263,269 Cutting Type (basic) ....................................................109
Changing the Contents of the Transmission Operation 158 Cutting Type Selection ..................................................32
Changing the Contour Figure .........................................67 CUTTING TYPES.........................................................87
Changing the Folder Access Permission Setting ..........239 Cutting Types.................................................................88
Changing the Schedule.................................................169
CHECKING THE COMMUNICATION <D>
ENVIRONMENT.....................................................316 Data Format That can be Transmitted..........................154
CHECKING THE FIREWALL (ROBOCUT-LINKi Delete ...........................................................................161
SERVER) .................................................................319 Deleting Buttons/Spaces ..............................................199
CHECKING THE IP ADDRESSES AND SUBNET Deleting Mail Addresses ..............................................270
MASKS ....................................................................318 Deleting NC Program Files from the Computer...........279

i-1
INDEX B-85344EN/03

Deleting NC Programs from the ROBOCUT...............280 File Operation Functions..............................................154

DELETING PROGRAMS ...........................................279 File Specification Areas ...............................................156
Deleting Registration Data ...........................................264 FILE TRANSFER........................................................154
Devices to Which Data can be Transmitted .................154 FILE TRANSMISSION TOOL SCREEN ...................156
DIMENSION MEASUREMENT ................................171 FITTING CURVE..........................................................45
DIMENSION MEASUREMENT FUNCTION ...........171 FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS ......................321
Discarding the Settings/Returning to the Normal State200 FROM THE MENU, SELECT AUXILIARY,
Display All Figures ......................................................183 MEASURE, AND MODIFY IN THIS ORDER. .....180
Display Log..................................................................186 FUNCTION OUTLINE ...............................................154
DISPLAYING MEASUREMENTS.............................178 FUNCTIONS PROVIDED BY MENU BAR ................23
Displaying the Tool Bar Setting screen........................199 FUNCTIONS PROVIDED BY SIDE MENU ...............16
DISTANCE BETWEEN POINT AND ENTITY.........174 FUNDAMENTALS .......................................................10
DISTANCE BETWEEN TWO POINTS .....................173
Drawing Coordinate System ..........................................39 <G>
DRAWING MODE......................................................180 Gear Definitions.............................................................54
DXF CONVERSION SPECIFICATIONS FOR DXF GENERAL FORMAT .................................................213
FILE INPUT/OUTPUT ............................................137 Graph ...........................................................................311
DXF File Input .............................................................129
DXF FILE INPUT/OUTPUT .......................................128 <H>
DXF File Output ..........................................................134 Handling CAD Data Efficiently...................................126
DXF Input Conversion Specifications..........................137 Handling of CAD Data by This System.......................125
DXF Output Conversion Specifications .......................139 Help Menu .....................................................................27
How to Specify Corner Rs .............................................64
<E> HOW TO USE THE RENDERING FUNCTION........182
Each and All Creation ....................................................64 "HTTP Error 500.19 – Internal Server Error"
"Edit" Menu Commands ................................................56 Displayed on the Operation Monitor ........................327
Edit Menu.......................................................................24
EDITING MACHINING DEFINITIONS....................109 <I>
Ending Reference .........................................................311 If No Work Material is Available ................................111
ENDING ROBOCUT-LINKi SETTING .....................274 IF TROUBLE OCCURS..............................................207
Ending the Transmission Operation .............................160 IGES File Input ............................................................141
Enlarges a Specified Rectangle by Mouse to Fill the IGES FILE INPUT/OUTPUT ......................................140
Window ....................................................................183 IGES File Output .........................................................146
Enlarges the Drawing Window Display by a Factor of IGES Input Conversion Specifications.........................149
2................................................................................184 IGES Output Conversion Specifications......................152
Entering Comments......................................................262 Inserting Spaces ...........................................................199
Environment.................................................................189 INSTALLING ROBOCUT-LINKi ..............................247
Error Code 0x*** Displayed by the Program Manager322 "Internet Explorer cannot display the webpage"
ERROR CODES ..........................................................286 Displayed on the Operation Monitor ........................326
Event ............................................................................308 INVOLUTE GEAR FIGURE CREATION ...................53
EXAMPLE TRANSMISSION PROCEDURES ..........169 Inward Offset for a Corner.............................................48
Execution of Extraction................................................185 ITEMS TO BE SET ON THE MACHINE ..................118
Exiting the File Transmission Manager .......................169
EXITING THE MAIL FUNCTION.............................300 <L>
EXITING THE OPERATION MONITOR ..................298 LAYER ..........................................................................39
EXITING THE PROGRAM MANAGER ...................284 Layer Categories ............................................................39
Exiting the ROBOCUT-LINKi Server .........................298 LOADING A FILE ........................................................34
Exiting the Web Browser .............................................298
Extension...................................................................65,67
<M>
M CODE FOR A STOP IMMEDIATELY AFTER
EXTRACT MACHINING FIGURE FROM NC DATA
CUTTING-OFF........................................................216
..................................................................................185
M CODES FOR WIRE CUT AND STOP AFTER
Extracting Option .........................................................189
ESCAPE PRECEDED BY CUTTING-OFF ............217
<F> M Format .....................................................................187
FANUC Format............................................................186 Machine Setting .............................................................70
Figure Creation ..............................................................16 MACHINING DEFINITION .........................................69
FIGURE CREATION ...............................................29,36 MACHINING FIGURE CREATION .......................30,57
File Menu .......................................................................23 MACHINING FIGURE CREATION FUNCTION
FOR DIE WITH RELIEF FIGURES .........................66
i-2
B-85344EN/03 INDEX
MACHINING FIGURE CREATION FUNCTIONS No Offset........................................................................86
(FOR STRAIGHT/TAPERED FIGURES).................64 No Reply to the ping Command...................................321
MACHINING FIGURE CREATION FUNCTIONS NOTE...........................................................................177
FOR 4-AXIS INDEPENDENT FIGURES.................65 NOTE ON CUTTING DIFFERENT PATTERNS AT
Machining Figures and Coordinate Systems ..................67 TOP AND BOTTOM FIGURES................................68
MACHINING INSTRUCTION .....................................31 NOTES.........................................................................181
Machining Instruction and NC Data Preparation ...........22 Notes on Specifying the Glue Tab Position For 4-Axis
MACHINING ORDER EDITING FUNCTION ..........110 Independent Figures ...................................................81
MACHINING START POINT ....................................120
Machining Start Point Setting ........................................31 <O>
Machining Work-pieces of Different Thickness and OFFSET .........................................................................47
Materials...................................................................112 OFFSET AMOUNTS...................................................119
MAIL CONTENTS......................................................300 OPERATING PROCEDURE ....................... 53,57,69,157
MAIL FUNCTION ......................................................299 OPERATING PROCEDURE FOR PRACTICAL
Mail Transmission Confirmation Dialog Box APPLICATIONS......................................................111
Displayed..................................................................329 OPERATION ...............................................................185
Mail Transmission Disabled.........................................329 Operation Guide...........................................................157
MANAGING CUTTING RESULT DATA .................315 OPERATION MONITOR............................................287
MEASURABLE DIMENSIONAL VALUES..............171 Operation Monitor Window Not Displayed on Another
MEASURING COORDINATES .................................172 Computer in the Network .........................................328
Menu ............................................................................304 Option ..........................................................................184
Menus...........................................................................156 OPTIONAL SKIP ........................................................120
MESSAGES DISPLAYED DURING SETUP.............208 OPTIONAL STOP .......................................................120
Modification...................................................................58 OTHER ........................................................................220
"Modify" Menu Commands (Which Do Not Change Other PC FAPT CUT i Icons .........................................11
The Nature of an Involute Gear).................................56 Other Usable Devices.......................................................4
Modify Menu .................................................................23 OTHERS ......................................................................120
Modifying a Gear and Its Teeth .....................................55 OUTLINE OF PROCESSING FOR EACH
Modifying Contours .............................................63,65,66 FUNCTION..............................................................161
MODIFYING FIGURES BY Outputting G10 ..............................................................72
EXTENSION/TRIMMING ........................................40 OUTPUTTING NC DATA..........................................117
MODIFYING GEARS ...................................................55 Outward Offset for a Corner ..........................................47
MODIFYING MACHINING FIGURES .......................63 Overview of DXF.........................................................128
Modifying the Operation Flow.......................................15 Overview of IGES........................................................140
Modifying the Position of a Gear ...................................55
MOUNTING THE WORKPIECE ON THE TABLE ..118 <P>
Move the Position of the Figure ...................................183 PARAMETER SETTING ............................................190
Parameter Setting for Auto Saving...............................195
<N> Parameter Setting for Figure Operation .......................190
NC DATA FOR USING THE [AI CORNER Parameter Setting for Machining Figure Extracting
CONTROL] FUNCTION.........................................214 from NC Data ...........................................................191
NC DATA FOR USING THE [AI SETTING Parameter Setting for Preparing NC Data ....................193
(STANDARD CUTTING CONDITION)] Parameter Setting for View..........................................190
FUNCTION..............................................................214 Parameter Settings Related to Machining Definition ...192
NC DATA FOR USING THE [AUTO WIRE FEED] Performing Modification after "Move/Copy" ................55
FUNCTION..............................................................215 Performing Modification after [Move/Copy].................63
NC DATA FOR USING THE [AWF RESULT Performing Modification Using a Dialog Window ........63
MONITORING] FUNCTION ..................................215 PLOTTER SETTING ..................................................121
NC DATA FOR USING THE [RETRACE] PLOTTING ..................................................................121
FUNCTION..............................................................216 Precautions when using CD. ............................................9
NC DATA FORMAT............................................205,213 PRECAUTIONS WHEN USING THE CD .................253
NC DATA PREPARATION...................................33,113 Precision of CAD Data ................................................127
NC MACHINE FILE ...................................................203 PREFACE .................................................................... p-1
NC MACHINE SETTING ...........................................203 Preparation Information .................................................31
NC MACHINE SETTING TOOL OPERATION ........205 PREPARATION INFORMATION................................70
NC MACHINE SPECIFICATION ..............................203 PREPARING NC DATA .............................................113
NETWORK CONNECTION .......................................243 Prerequisites.....................................................................3
No Images Displayed on the Operation Monitor..........325 PRINTING MACHINING TIME ESTIMATES..........117

i-3
INDEX B-85344EN/03

PRINTING NC DATA.................................................117 SELECTING ENTITIES ...............................................38

PRIOR TO SETTING UP (OPERATING Selecting Gears to be Modified......................................55
ENVIRONMENT) .......................................................3 Selecting the Device and Setting the Transmission
PROCEDURE ................................................................28 Conditions ................................................................157
PROCEDURES............................................................122 Selection of NC Data ...................................................185
Producing Two or more Identical Figures....................112 Send .............................................................................161
PROGRAM MANAGER .............................................275 "Server Error in '/' Application." Displayed on the
Program Start Point ........................................................73 Operation Monitor....................................................324
PROGRAMMING OPERATION ..................................28 SETTING....................................................... 179,186,190
Setting a Unique IP Address ........................................226
<R> Setting Data....................................................................59
Reading the Latest Information about PC FAPT CUT i.10 Setting Drawing Layers .................................................39
Read-Only and Read/Write ..........................................162 SETTING FOR EXTERNAL APPLICATION ...........200
Receive.........................................................................161 Setting Menu..................................................................27
Reduces the Drawing Window Display by a Factor of 2 SETTING OPERATING ENVIRONMENTS .............200
..................................................................................184 Setting Procedure .........................................................162
REFERENCING A MACHINE LIST..........................290 Setting Reception Control Conditions..........................167
Referencing and Editing NC Program Files in the Setting Sending Conditions..........................................270
Computer ..................................................................282 Setting The Communication Conditions ......................165
REFERENCING AND EDITING NC PROGRAMS...282 Setting the Cutting Conditions .......................................82
Referencing and Editing NC Programs in the Setting the Firewall ......................................................237
ROBOCUT...............................................................284 Setting the Input Conversion Method ................... 130,142
REFERENCING CUTTING RESULT DATA ............304 SETTING THE MAIL FUNCTION ............................267
REFERENCING OPERATING STATES ...................291 SETTING THE NC DATA OUTPUT FORMAT........115
REFERENCING THE CUTTING MONITOR Setting the NC Program File Extension .......................266
SCREEN...................................................................292 Setting the NC Program Storage Folder.......................265
Referencing the Transmission Log...............................272 Setting the Output Conversion Method................. 135,147
Refresh .........................................................................162 SETTING THE PROGRAM MANAGER...................265
REGISETERING AND DELETING ROBOCUTS .....256 SETTING THE PROGRAMMED PLANE &
Registering a Mail Address ..........................................267 WORKPIECE THICKNESS....................................218
Registering Master Data...............................................312 Setting the Transmission Control Conditions...............166
Registering Menu Items ...............................................199 SETTING TRANSMISSION CONDITIONS..............162
Registering/Extracting Cutting Conditions ....................86 SETTING UP PC FAPT CUT i .......................................5
Registration ..................................................................256 SETTING UP THE COMPUTER................................223
REGISTRATION AND SETTING..............................254 Setting up the Internet Information Services (IIS) .......233
Registration of the Second and Subsequent SETTING UP THE ROBOCUT ..................................240
ROBOCUTs Using Enter (Automatic) Disabled ......330 Setting up Windows Live Mail ....................................230
Rename ........................................................................162 SETTING, REGISTERING, AND CONFIRMING
RENAMING NC PROGRAM FILES..........................281 THE CUTTING CONDITIONS ................................82
RENDERING FUNCTION..........................................182 SETUP ......................................................................3,223
Required System ..........................................................223 Single Coordinate System and Multiple Coordinate
Reset and Redraw.........................................................184 Systems ......................................................................67
RESTORING SETTINGS............................................198 SPECIFYING A CLEARANCE FOR EACH FIGURE 82
Result ...........................................................................306 SPECIFYING A RADIUS, DISTANCE, AND
REVERSE CUT ...........................................................217 ANGLE ......................................................................36
ROBOCUT Not Connected to ROBOCUT-LINKi Specifying an Editor ....................................................266
Server .......................................................................322 SPECIFYING AND CANCELING MACHINING
ROBOCUT Status "END"............................................323 USING A MACHINING FIGURE ............................74
Specifying Converting Range ......................................185
<S> Specifying Files ...........................................................158
S Format.......................................................................187 Specifying of Batch Processing of Circular Figure........78
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...........................................s-1 Specifying Open-Area Machining .................................77
SAVING A FILE ...........................................................34 SPECIFYING POSITIONS ...........................................37
SAVING AND LOADING FILES.................................34 Specifying Synchronizing Points on the Top and
Saving Settings/Returning to the Normal State............200 Bottom Planes ............................................................65
Se Format .....................................................................188 Specifying the Device and Plotter................................165
Selecting a Command ..................................................158 Standard Setting Files ..................................................165
Selecting Contours .........................................................59 STANDARD SETTINGS ............................................195

i-4
B-85344EN/03 INDEX
Standard Settings Related to Involute Gears ................195
Standard Settings Related to Machining Instruction ....196
Standard Settings Related to Machining Profiles .........196
Standard Settings Related to NC Data Preparation ......198
Starting PC FAPT CUT i ...............................................10
Starting ROBOCUT-LINKi Server..............................287
STARTING ROBOCUT-LINKi SETTING.................254
STARTING THE MAIL FUNCTION .........................299
STARTING THE OPERATION MONITOR ..............287
STARTING THE PROGRAM MANAGER................275
Starting the Web Browser ............................................288
Starting Transmission...................................................159
Step ..............................................................................184
Storing The Tool Bar Definition File ...........................198
SWITCH OVER OF THE ON/OFF OF MEASURED
INFORMATION ......................................................179

<T>
Taper Specification ...................................................64,66
Terminating PC FAPT CUT i ........................................10
Testing Mail Transmission...........................................271
THE WORKPIECE BOTTOM SURFACE IS THE
PROGRAMMED PLANE (WORKPIECE IS
RISING UP FROM THE TABLE TOP). .................219
THE WORKPIECE BOTTOM SURFACE IS THE
PROGRAMMED PLANE........................................218
THE WORKPIECE TOP SURFACE IS THE
PROGRAMMED PLANE (WORKPIECE IS
RISING UP FROM THE TABLE TOP). .................219
THE WORKPIECE TOP SURFACE IS THE
PROGRAMMED PLANE........................................218
THREE-DIMENSIONAL DRAWING ..........................68
TOOL BAR SETTING ................................................198
Tooth Definition.............................................................53
TRANSFERRING PROGRAMS .................................276
Transferring Programs from Computer to ROBOCUT 278
Transferring Programs from ROBOCUT to Computer 276
Transmission Protocols ................................................154
TRANSMISSION SCHEDULE MANAGEMENT .....168
Transmission to and from the CNC..............................169
TROUBLESHOOTING ........................................207,316
TYPES OF FIGURES....................................................36

<U>
UNINSTALLING ROBOCUT-LINKi.........................252
Use Function ..................................................................70
Using the Help Function to Become Familiar with the
Operating Procedure...................................................15

<V>
View Menu.....................................................................25

<W>
Window Menu................................................................26
Wire Diameter, Workpiece Material, Nozzle Gap
Setting ........................................................................72
WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING...............73
World Coordinate System ..............................................39

i-5
B-85344EN/03 REVISION RECORD

REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents
ROBOCUT-LINKi
03 June,2013
. "Cutting Result Viewer" has been added.
ROBOCUT-LINKi
02 Feb.,2013 ・ Windows 8 has been supported.
・ "FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS" has been added.
01 July, 2012

r-1
 B-85344EN/03

* B - 8 5 3 4 4 E N / 0 3 *